(1988). Hindi-Arabic Kosh. New Delhi: Central Hindi Directorate.  
ÔAbd al-Nur, Jabbur (1983). Dictionnaire Abdel-Nour al-Mufassal: Arabe-francais/MuÕjam 
ÔAbd al-Nur al-Mufassal: ÔArabi-faransi. Beirut: Dar al-Õilm lil-malayin.  
Aal, Hosny A. Wahab A. (1992) A Contrastive Linguistic Study of the Influence of 
English-Arabic Translation on Journalistic Models in Arabic, with a Special Emphasis on 
the Egyptian Press. Ph.D., University of Bath.
Aarts, Jan, & Oostdijk , Nellek (1988). Corpus-Related Research at Nijmegen University.  
Proc. of Eighth International Conf. on English Lang. Research on Computerized Corpora. 
In Merja Kyto,Ossi  Ihalainen, & Matti Rissanen (Eds.), Corpus Linguistics, Hard and 
Soft Amsterdam: Rodopi.
Aartun, Kjell (1981). Sentences with Specific Particles and the Subjunctive in Arabic. 
Oriens., 27-28.
Abaab, H. (1984). Un transducteur phonologique de lÕarabeÕ. CGE Compte-rendu, 46.
Abaab, H. (1984) Contribution au traitement automatique de la langue arabe: conception 
dÕun synthetiseur morpholoqique utilisable en EAO. University of Paris 7.
Abboud, Peter (1986). The Hal Construction and the Main Verb in the Sentence. In Joshua 
A. Fishman,Andree Tabouret-Keller,Michael Clyne,Bh. Krishnamurti, & Mohamed 
Abdulaziz (Eds.), The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the 
Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the 
Sociology of Language (pp. 191-196). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Abboud, Peter F. (1970). Spoken Arabic. In Thomas A. Sebeok (Eds.), Current Trends in 
Linguistics VI:  Linguistics in So. West Asia and No. Africa (pp. 439-466). The Hague: 
Mouton.
Abboud, Peter F. (1979). SibawayhiÕs Notion of Grammaticality. Al-ÔArabiyya, 12, 58-
67.
Abboud, Peter F. (1988). Speech and Religious Affiliation in Egypt. In Mohammad Ali 
Jazayery & Werner Winter (Eds.), Languages  & Cultures: Studies in Honour of Edgar C. 
Polome (pp. 21-27). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Abboud, Peter F., & McCarus, Ernest N. (1983). Elementary Modern Standard Arabic, 
parts 1 & 2. Cambridge:  Cambridge Univ. Press: Cambridge:  Cambridge Univ. Press.  
Abd El-Moneim, Aliaa Ahmed (1989a). Agreement in standard Arabic verbal clauses. 
International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Sciences, 6.1, 21-29.
Abd El-Moneim, Aliaa Ahmed (1989b) The Role of INFL. Ph.D., The University of 
Connecticut.
Abd-Rabbo, Mohamad Zakaria (1988) Some Morphological Constraints in Classical 
Arabic. Ph.D., Stanford University.
Abd-Rabbo, Mohamad Z. (1990). Sound Plural and Broken Plural Assignment in Classical 
Arabic.  Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. (pp. 55-93). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Abdel Haleem, M. A. S. (1992). Grammatical Shift for Rhetorical Purposes: Iltifat and 
Related Features in the QurÕan. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 
55(3), 407-432.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid (1983). Sex Differentiation and Linguistic Variation : Case 
Study of Spoken Arabic in Amman. In Jonathan Owens & Issam Abu-Salim (Ed.), Second 
Annual Linguistics Conference,  (pp. 101-20). Irbid: Yarmouk University Dept. of 
English.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid (1986a). The emergence of an urban dialect in the Jordaian 
urban centers. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 5, 53-63.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid (1986b). A linguistic and sociocultural study of personal 
names in Jordan. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 80-94.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid (1987). Cross-dialectal variation in Arabic: competing 
prestigious forms. Language in Society, 16(3), 359-68.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid (1989). Language and womenÕs place with special reference 
to Arabic. Language Sciences, 11(3), 305-324.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid, & Abu-Salim, Issam (1987). Slips of the tongue in Arabic 
and their theoretical implications. Language Sciences, 9(2(66)), 145-71.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid, & Awwad, Mohammad (1989). Reflexes of Classical 
Arabic Interdentals:  A Study in Historical Sociolinguistics. Linguistische Berichte, 
122(Aug), 259-282.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid, & Suleiman, Saleh M. (1990). Lexical Conditioning of 
Phonological Variation. Language Sciences, 12(4), 291-330.
Abdel-Jawad, Hassan Rashid E. (1981) Lexical and Phonological Variation in Spoken 
Arabic in Amman. Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Abdel-Karim, A. (1985). From a free Arabic text to its word frequency table: the search for 
the solution. Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Informatics, SP, 16-19.
Abdelfattah, Nabil Mohamed Saber (1990) Linguistic Changes in Journalistic Language in 
Egypt, 1935-1989: A Quantitative and Comparative Analysis. Ph.D., The University of 
Texas at Austin.
Abdeljaber, Naji (1985) Evaluation of Ibn MadaaÕs Criticism of the Arab Grammarians. 
Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Abdelmoumene, Nacira (1988) Sentential Complementation in French, English and Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Essex (UK).
Abdo, Daud (1977). Alifat am Hamazat. Al-ÔArabiyya, 10(1-2), 46-54.
Abdrabou, Abdelrahman A. (1988). Relationship between Translation and Text 
Linguistics. Journal of English, 16(1988 Sept), 1-7.
Abdu, Hussein Ramadan (1988) Italian Loanwords in Colloquial Libyan Arabic as Spoken 
in the Tripoli Region. Ph.D., University of Arizona.
Abdul-Fadl (1961) VolkstŸmliche Texte in arabischen Bauerndialekte der Šgyptischen 
Provinz Sharqiyya mit dialektgeographischen Untersuchungen zur Lautlehre. WestŠlischen 
Wilhelms-UniversitŠt zu MŸnster dissertation, 
Abdul-Ghany, Muhammad Kamal Eldeen (1981) Government Binding in Classical Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Abdul-Hassan, Raad Shakir (1988) Variation in the Educated Spoken Arabic of Iraq: A 
Sociolinguistic Study. Ph.D., University of Leeds (United Kingdom).
Abdul-Karim, Kamal Wadih (1980) Aspects of the Phonology of Lebanese Arabic. Ph.D., 
University of Illnois-Urbana.
Abdulaziz, Mohamed H. (1986). Factors in the development of modern Arabic usage. 
International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 62, 11-24.
Abdullah, Tariq Najam (1990). Irregular forms of triliteral nouns. International Journal of 
Islamic and Arabic Studies, 7.1, 41-64.
Abdurakhman, KamalÕ Nazhib (1988). Semantika padezhei v russkom i arabskom 
iazykakh. Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom, 1, 86-90.
Abed, E.,Ali, N., & Hagazi, N. (1987). Information content in textual data: revisited for 
Arabic text. Jounal of the American Society for Information Science, 38(2), 133-37.
Abel, Francoise (1985). Gestes de conversation dans le constantinois. Geste & Image, 4, 
39-67.
Abellan Perez, Juan (1981). Contribucion de la linguistica historica al conocimiento del 
medievo albojense. Awraq (Madrid), 4, 31-35.
Abi-aad, A. (1980). Systeme verbal et expression du temps et de la modalite en arabe et en 
francais. In J. P. Davoine (Eds.), Linguistique et enseignement des langues (pp. 263-318). 
Lyon: PU de Lyon.
Abu El-Haija, Lutfi Ahmad (1981) The Acquisition of the Negation System in Arabic as 
Spoken in Jordan. Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University.
Abu Libdeh, AsÕad Jabr (1991) A Discourse Perspective on Figurative Expression in 
Literary Works with Reference to English/Arabic Translation. Ph.D., Heriot-Watt 
University (United Kingdom).
Abu Nahleh, Lamis Yacoub (1985) A Syntactic-Semantic Analysis of Object Clitics and 
Pronouns in Ramallah Palestinian Arabic. Ph.D., The University of Michigan.
Abu RaÕad, Ahmad Muhammad Sulayman (1990). Semantic development of purification 
(at-Taharah) as linguistic and juristic technical terms. International Journal of Islamic and 
Arabic Studies, 7.2, 73-100.
Abu-Absi, Samir (1981). Language-in-Education in the Arab Middle East. Annual Review 
of Applied Linguistics, 129-143.
Abu-Absi, Samir (1984). Language Planning and Education in the Arab World. 
International Education Journal, 1(2), 113-132.
Abu-Absi, Samir (1986). The modernization of Arabic: problems and prospects. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 28(3), 337-48.
Abu-Absi, Samir (1990). A Characterization of the Language of Iftah ya Simsim:  
Sociolinguistic and Educational Implications for Arabic. Language Problems and Language 
Planning, 14(1), 33-46.
Abu-Ghazaleh, Ilham Nayef (1983) Theme and the function of the verb in Palestinian 
Arabic narrative discourse. Ph.D., University of Florida.
Abu-Haidar, Farida (1979). A Study of the Spoken Arabic of Baskinta. Leiden: Brill.  
Abu-Haidar, Farida (1987). The treatment of the reflexes of /q/ and /k/ in the Muslim 
dialect of Baghdad. Journal of Arabic Linguistics 17, 41-57.
Abu-Haidar, Farida (1992). Shifting Boundaries:  The effect of MSA on dialect 
convergence in Baghdad. In E. Broselow,Mushira Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.),  
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 91-106). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John 
Benjamins.
Abu-Haidar, J. A. (1989). The Diminutives in the Diwan of Ibn Quzman: A Product of 
Their Hispanic Milieu? Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 52(2), 239-
254.
Abu-Haider, Farida (1988). Speech Variation in the Muslim Dialect of Baghdad-Urban vs. 
Rural. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 19, 74-80.
Abu-Haider, Farida (1989). Are Iraqi Women More Prestige Conscious Than Men?  Sex 
Differentiation in Baghdadi Arabic. Language in Society, 18(4), 471-481.
Abu-Haider, Farida (1990). Maintenance and Shift in the Christian Arabic of Baghdad. 
Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 21, 47-62.
Abu-Jarad, Hassan Ali (1986) English Interlanguage of Palestinian University Students in 
Gaza Strip:  An Analysis of Relative Clauses and Verb Tense. Ph.D., Ball State 
University.
Abu-Mansour, Anas Hasan (1986) A functional analysis of sentence structure in standard 
Arabic: a three-level approach. Ph.D., University of Florida.
Abu-Mansour, Mahasen (1987) A Nonlinear Analysis of Arabic Syllabic Phonology with 
Special Reference to Makkan. Ph.D., University of Florida.
Abu-Mansour, Mahasen (1992). Vowel Shortening in Two Arabic Dialects. In E. 
Broselow,Mushira Eid, & J McCarthy (Eds.),  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 
47-76). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Abu-Mansour, Mahasen Hasan (1990). Epenthesis, Gemination and Syllable Structure. 
Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid & John 
McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 167-191). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Abu-Mansour, Mahasen Hasan (1991). Epenthesis in Makkan Arabic:  Unsyllabified 
Consonants v. Degenerate Syllables.  Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic 
Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, 
III (pp. 137-154). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Abu-Melhim, Abdel-Rahman (1991). Code-Switching and Linguistic Accommodation in 
Arabic.  Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & 
Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perpsectives on Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 231-250). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Abu-Nahleh, Lamice (1982). The scope and function of language repair in foreigner 
discourse. Interlanguage Studies Bulletin - Utrecht, 6(1), 112-20.
Abu-Salim, Issam (1982). Syllable structure and syllabification in Palestinian Arabic. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 12(1), 1-28.
Abu-Salim, Issam M. (1980). Epenthesis and geminate consonants in Palestinian Arabic. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 1-12.
Abu-Salim, Issam M. (1982a) A reanalysis of some aspects of Arabic phonology: a 
metrical approach. Ph.D., University of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana.
Abu-Salim, Issam M. (1982b). Syllable Structure and Syllabification in Palestinian Arabic. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, vol. 12 no. 1(1982 Spring), 1-28.
Abu-Salim, Issam M. (1986). Vowel shortening in Palestinian Arabic: a metrical 
perspective. Lingua:  International Review of General Linguistics, 68(2-3), 223-40.
Abu-Salim, Issam M. (1987). Vowel harmony in Palestinian Arabic:  a metrical 
perspective. Journal of Linguistics, 23(1), 1-24.
Abu-Salim, Issam M. (1988). Consonant Assimilation in Arabic:  An Autosegmental 
Perspective. Lingua, 74(1), 45-66.
Abu-Salim, Issam M., & Abd-el-Jawad, Hassan R. (1988). Syllable Patterns in Levantine 
Arabic. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 18(2), 1-22.
Abubakre, Razaq ÔDeremi (1983). The Learning of Arabic by Yoruba Speakers. Jolan: 
Journal of the Linguistic Association of Nigeria, 2, 143-152.
Abuhamdia, Zakaria A. (1988). The Arabic Language regions. In Ulrich Ammon,Norbert 
Dittmar, & Klaus J. Mattheier (Eds.), Sociolinguistics:  an international handbook of the 
science of language and society (pp. 1238 -1244). Berlin: de Gruyter.
Abumdas, Abdul Hamid Ali (1985) Libyan Arabic Phonology. Ph.D., University of 
Michigan.
Abunahleh, Lamice, & others (1981). The Scope and Function of Language Repair in 
Foreigner Discourse. Interlanguage Studies Bulletin, 6(1), 112-120.
Abutajdine, D., & others (1988). Reconstruction of Arabic long vowels using time varying 
linear prediction technique. In ICASSP 88 (International Conference on Acoustics, Speech 
and Signal Processing, i (pp. 319-22). New York: 
Achour, Christiane (1990). Toward a history of French in the colonies-The case of Algeria. 
Etudes de Linguistique Appliquee, 78, 87-96.
Addeweesh, Rashid Abdulrahman (1985) A Syntactic and Semantic Study of Hal: 
ÒCircumstantialÓ Structures in Modern Literary Arabic Prose Literature. Ph.D., University 
of Michgan.
Affi, Elhami Abdelzaher (1988) Linguistic Perspectives of Interlingual Translation. Ph.D., 
Aftat, Mokhtar (1982) The Acquisition of Negation and Wh-Questions in a Moroccan 
Arabic Speaking Four-Year-Old Child. Ph.D., University of Texas-Austin.
Agius, Dionisius A. (1980). Maltese: A Semitic and romance language. Al-ÔArabiyya, 
13(1-2), 14-27.
Agius, Dionisius A. (1981). A Semitic Maltese Inventory with a Possible Siculo-Arabic 
Intervention. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik (ZAL), 6, 7-15.
Agius, Dionisius A. (1982). Semitic and Romance:  the two elements forming Maltese. The 
USF Language Quarterly, 21(1-2), 21-4.
Agius, Dionisius A. (1984). Arabic Literary Works as a Source of Documentation for 
Technical Terms of the Material Culture. Berlin: Schwarz.  
Agius, Dionysus A. (1989). Arabic under Shidyaq in Malta 1833-1848. Journal of Maltese 
Studies, 19-20(1989-1990), 52-57.
Ahmad, Abdul Hadi (1983) The Acquistion of Vocabulary of English as a Second 
Language by Arabic Native Children. M.A., University College of North Wales Dept. of 
Linguistics, Bangor. U.K.
Ait Taleb, Saadia (1987). Arabic as a technological language:  Problems and perspectives  
(LÕArabe, langue technologique, problemes et perspectives). Le Langage et lÕHomme, 
22(2(64)), 105-11.
Ait-Oumeziane, Ramdane (1986a). Le Statut de la fonction ÔsujetÕ dans deux parlers arabes: 
Constantine et Tripoli. La Linguistique: Revue de la Societe Internationale de Linguistique 
Fonctionnelle, 22(1), 81-92.
Ait-Oumeziane, Ramdane (1986b). The status of the function ÒsubjectÓ in two Arabic 
Dialects: Constantine and Tripoli  (Le statut de la fonction ÒsujetÓ dans deux parlers arabes: 
Constantine et Tripoli). Linguistique, 22(1), 81-92.
Ait-Oumeziane, Ramdane (1986c). The teaching of grammar to Arabic native speakers: The 
solution of contrastive pragmatics. Contrastes, 12, 53-70.
Ait-Oumeziane, Ramdane (1988). Vowel Contrasts and Phonological Variation.  The 
Example of French and of Mahgreb Arabic. Contrastes, 16(May), 81-101.
Akesson, Joyce (1990) Ahmad b. ÔAli b. MasÕud on Arabic Morphology: Marah al-arwah: 
Edited with Translation, Commentary and Introduction. Ph.D., Lunds Universitet 
(Sweden).
Akesson, Joyce (1991). The Strong Verb and Infinitive Noun in Arabic. Acta Orientalia, 
52, 35-48.
Akinnaso, F. Niyi, & Ogunbiyi, Isaac A. (1990). The Place of Arabic in Language 
Education and Language Planning in Nigeria. Language Problems and Language Planning, 
12(1), 1-19.
Akram, Mohammed, & SaÕadeddin, A.M. (1987). Target-world experiential matching:  the 
case of Arabic/English translating. Quinquereme, 10(2), 137-164.
Al-Abed Al-Haq, Fawwaz Mohammad (1985) A Case Study of Language Planning in 
Jordan. Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Al-Aboudi, Fahmi Basil Shukri (1985) The Syntax of ÔIdafahÕ, Annexation in Arabic. 
Ph.D., Indiana University.
Al-Ani, Salman (1976). The development and distribution of the Arabic sound ÔqafÕ in 
Iraq. In Donald P. Little (Eds.), Essays on Islamic Civilization (pp. 48-55). Leiden: E.J. 
Brill.
Al-Ani, Salman (1985). From Arabic Sounds to Pictures. Islamic Horizons, 
Nov./Dec.(1985), 11and 22.
Al-Ani, Salman (1987). Abstract and Concrete Interaction in the Arabic Sound System. In 
Robert Olson & Salman Al-Ani (Eds.), Islamic and Middle Eastern Societies (pp. 209-
217). Amana Books.
Al-Ani, Salman (1989). Advancement in Speech Technology (in Arabic). In Basic College 
of Education Annual Book (pp. 422-434). Kuwait City: Kuwait University.
Al-Ani, Salman (1992a). Lexical Stress Variation in Arabic:  An Acoustic Spectrographic 
Analysis. Proceedings of the Colloquium on Arabic Grammar:  The Arabist, 1992, 9-27.
Al-Ani, Salman (Ed.). (1992b).  Readings in Arabic Linguistics. Bloomington:   Indiana 
University Linguistics Club.
Al-Ani, Salman (1993). Stress Variation of the Adjective Phrase in Arabic. Anthropological 
Linguistics, 1993.
Al-Ani, Salman (1994). The Treatise of Ibna Sina:  An Original Contribution to Arabic 
Phonetics. In Raji Rammuny & Dilworth Parkinson (Eds.), Investigating Arabic: 
Linguistic, Pedagogical and Literary Studies in Honor of Ernest N. McCarus Greyden 
Press.
Al-Ani, Salman, & El-Dalee, Mohamed (1984). Tafkhim in Arabic:  The Acoustic and 
Physiological Parameters. In Proceedings of the Xth International Congress of Phonetic 
Sciences,  (pp. 385-389). Utrecht, The Netherlands: 
Al-Ani, Salman,Port, Robert F., & Maeda, Shosaku (1980). Temporal compensation and 
universal phonetics. Journal of Phonetica, 37, 235-252.
Al-Ani, Salman, & Shammas, Jacob Y. (1985). Phonology and Script of Literary Arabic. 
Troy, MI (1980) and Bloomington, IN (1985): InternatÕl Book Centre (1980) and InternatÕl 
Institute of Islamic and Arabic Studies (1985).  
Al-Ani, Salman , & Tel, Shadia (1991). Interlingual and Intralanguage Interference in 
English-Arabic Bilinguals. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, VIII(No. 
1), 61-80.
Al-Ani, Salman H., & Ahmad, Yayah (1988). A Report on the Symposium Dealing with 
Advancement in Speech Technology for Arabic. Arab Journal for the Humanities, 8, 326-
337.
Al-Ani, Salman H., & Al-Shammas, Jacob Y. (1980). The Phonology and Script of 
Literary Arabic (2 ed.). Montreal: Institute of Islamic Studies, McGill University.  
Al-AsÕad, Abdul Karim Muhammad (1984). Fundamental Trends in the Studies of Arabic 
Grammar. Journal of College of Arts, King Saud University, 11(1), 245-263.
Al-Aswad, Mohamed Kaleefa (1984) Contrastive Analysis of Arabic and English Verbs in 
Tense, Aspect, and Structure. Ph.D., 
Al-Badarin, Muhammad (1988). The Representation of Geminates in Arabic. International 
Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 5.1, 59-76.
Al-Batal, Mahmoud (1990). Connectives as Cohesive Elements in a Modern Expository 
Arabic Text.  Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira  
Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 234-268). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Al-Batal, Mahmoud (1994). Connectives in Arabic Diglossia: The case of Lebanese Arabic. 
In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 91-119). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Al-Batal, Mahmoud Mohammad Adel (1985) The cohesive role of connectives in a modern 
expository Arabic text. Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Al-Bazi, Mohammed (1983) Scopal Properties of the Arabic Relative Clause. Ph.D., 
University of Washington.
Al-Besbasi, Ibrahim Ali (1991) An Empirical Investigation of Some Cognitive Processes of 
Translation between English and Arabic with Special Reference to the Use of Dictionaries 
(Volumes I and II). Ph.D., University of Exeter (United Kingdom).
Al-Chalabi, Samir A. R. (1984). Modern Arabic Terminology and Bilingual Lexicography: 
Activities and Problems. Papers from Summer Inst. on ESP in Arab World Held at Univ. 
of Aston in Birmingham, in Aug. 1983. In John Swales & Hassan Mustafa (Eds.), English 
for Specific Purposes in the Arab World (pp. 280-291). Birmingham: Language Studies 
Unit, University of Aston.
Al-Fassi Al-Fahri, A. (1989). Grammatical theory and parsing. ProcKuw2, 221-271.
Al-Haq, Fawwaz Al-Abed (1989). Implication of language planning into Arabization in 
Jordan. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 6.2, 19-34.
Al-Haq, Fawwaz Al-Abed (1992). Functional or Anaphoric Control in Jordanian Arabic. 
Language Sciences (LangS), 14(1-2, 1992 Jan-Apr), 1-28.
Al-Harbi, Abdallah (1990) A Syntactic Approach to Arabic Verbal Morphology. Ph.D., 
University of Essex (United Kingdom).
Al-Harbi, Awwad Ahmad Al-Ahmadi (1991). Arabic Loanwords in Acehnese.  Papers 
from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Lingistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid 
(Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 93-117). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Al-Hroot, Ali (1989). Invisible subject pronouns in Arabic. International Journal of Islamic 
and Arabic Studies, 6.1, 39-55.
Al-Hroot, Ali Khalaf (1987) Some Aspects of Deletion in Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana 
University.
Al-Imam, Y., & Al-Khalifa, F. (1989). Computer aided study of stress rules in Modern 
Standard Arabic. Arab Journal for Humanities, 9(34).
Al-Jabr, Abdulfattah Mohammad (1987) Cohesion in Text Differentiation:  A Study of 
English and Arabic. Ph.D., University of Aston in Birmingham (UK).
Al-Jehani, Nasir M. (1990). Color Terms in Mecca: A Sociolinguistic Perspective. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 32(1-2), 163-174.
Al-Jihani, Nasir Mohammed (1985) Sociostylisitc Stratification of Arabic in Makkah. 
Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Al-Johani, Maneh Hammad (1982) English and Arabic Articles: A Contrastive Analysis in 
Definiteness and Indefiniteness. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Al-Jubouri, Adnan J. R. (1984). The Role of Repetition in Arabic Argumentative 
Discourse. Papers from Summer Inst. on ESP in Arab World Held at Univ. of Aston in 
Birmingham, in Aug. 1983. In John Swales & Hassan Mustafa (Eds.), English for 
Specific Purposes in the Arab World (pp. 99-117). Birmingham: Language Studies Unit, 
University of Aston.
Al-Jubouri, Adnan Jabbar Radhi (1987) Computer-Aided Categorisation and 
Quantifaication of Connectives in English and Arabic. Ph.D., University of Aston in 
Birmingham (U.K.).
Al-Jubouri, Adnan J. R., & Knowles, Frank E. (1988). A Computer-Assisted Study of 
Cohesion Based on English and Arabic Corpora: An Interim Report. Proc. of Thirteenth 
Internat. Conf., Univ. of E. Anglia (Norwich), 1-4 Apr. 1986. In John P. G. Roper 
(Eds.), Computers in Literary and Linguistic Research (pp. 59-77). Paris; Geneva: 
Champion; Slatkine.
Al-Kahtany, Abdallah H. (1992) Anaphoric Relations in Arabic and English Spoken 
Narratives. Ph.D., Michigan State University.
Al-Kenai, Jamal B. S. (1985) Some Linguistic and Cultural Problems of English-Arabic 
Translation and Their Implications for a Strategy of Arabization. Ph.D., University of 
Glasgow (United Kingdom).
Al-Khamash, Salim Soliman (1991) Addad:  A Study of Homo-Polysemous Opposites in 
Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Al-Khatib, Mahmoud Abed Ahmad (1988) Sociolinguistic Change in an Expanding Urban 
Context:  A Case Study of Irbid City, Jordan. Ph.D., University of Durham (UK).
Al-Khrisat, Mohammad Mustafa (1992) Structuring the Arabic Lexicon and Thesaurus 
with Lexical-Semantic Relations to Support Information Retrieval. Ph.D., Illinois Institute 
of Technology.
Al-Mozainy, Hamza Qublan,Vroman Bley, Robert, & McCarthy, John J. (1985). Stress 
shift and metrical structure. Linguistic Inquiry, 16(1), 135-44.
Al-Muhannadi, Muneera (1992) A Sociolinguistic Study of WomenÕs Speech in Qatar. 
Ph.D., University of Essex.
Al-Najjar, Balkees (1984) The syntax and semantics of verbal aspect in Kuwaiti Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Utah.
Al-Najjar, Balkees (1991). Grammaticalization of Lexical Markers in Kuwaiti Arabic. Folia 
LInguistica:  Acta Societatis Linguisticae Europae (FoLi), 25(3-4, 1991), 665-675.
Al-Najjar, Majed Flayih (1984) Translation as a correlative of meaning: cultural and 
linguistic transfer between Arabic and English. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Al-Nasser, A. (1986). Sibawayh the phonologist. A critical study of the phonetic and  
phonological theory of Sibawayh as presented in his treatise Al-Kitab. London & New 
York: Kegan Paul International.  
Al-Nattafi, Muhammad Thaib (1984). The rhyming vowels in Al-MutanabbiÕs poetry. 
Journal of College of Arts, 11(2), 728-47.
Al-Qadi, Nassir Saleh (1991) Acquisition of English Derivational Morphology by Arab 
Speakers. Ph.D., University of Georgia.
Al-Qadi, Nassir Saleh (1992). The Acquisition of English Derivational Morphology by 
Arab Speakers:  Empirical Testing. Language Sciences (LangS), 14(1-2 1992 Jan-Apr).
Al-Qadi, Wadad (1981). Studia Arabica et Islamica. Festschrift for Ihsan ÔAbbas on His 
Sixtieth Birthday. Beirut: American Univ. of Beirut.  
Al-Qahtani, Duleim Masoud (1988) Semantic Valence of Arabic Verbs (Volumes I and II). 
Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Al-Rufai, M. (1983). Cultural effect on the comprehensibility of reading texts. Jyvaskyla 
Cross-Language Studies, 10, 35-46.
Al-Sadeqi, Faeqa (1990) A Tagmemic Analysis of Al-BuxalaaÕ. Ph.D., The University of 
Michigan.
Al-Shabab, O.S. (1987) Organizational and Textual Structuring of Radio News Discourse 
in English and Arabic. Ph.D., University of Aston in Birmingham (United Kingdom).
Al-Shabbab, Omar, & Swales, John (1986). Rhetorical features of Arab and British news 
broadcasts. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 31-42.
Al-Shahi, Ahmed (1988). Some Personal Names and Nicknames among the Riverain 
People of Northern Sudan. Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 19(2), 131-
139.
Al-Shahrani, Saeid Abdullah (1988) The Phonology of the Spoken Arabic of the Shahran 
Tribe in Southwestern Saudi Arabia. Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Al-Shalan, Abdulaziz (1983) Word Order and Passivization in Arabic. Ph.D., University 
of Washington.
Al-Sharhan, Ali Abdullaziz (1988) Language in Education in the United Arab Emirates: A 
Sociolinguistic Approach. Ph.D., University of Essex (United Kingdom).
Al-Sharyofi, EIsa (1992) Topic-Comment Constructions in Arabic:  A Syntactic Approach. 
Ph.D., Indiana University.
Al-Sughayer, Khalil Ibrahim (1990) Aspects of Comparative Jordanian and Modern 
Standard Arabic Phonology. Ph.D., Michigan State University.
Al-Sweel, Abdulaziz (1983) Word Order in Standard Arabic:  A Lexical Approach. Ph.D., 
University of Washington.
Al-Sweel, A. Aziz I. (1987). Verbal and nominal forms of Najdi Arabic. Anthropological 
Linguistics, 29(1), 71-90.
Al-Sweel, Abdulaziz I. (1990). Some Aspects of Najdi Arabic Phonology. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics, 21, 71-82.
Al-Tajir, Mahdi Abdalla (1982). Language and Linguistic Origins in Bahrain: The Baharna 
Dialect of Arabic. London: Kegan Paul International.  
Al-Tarouti, Ahmed Fathalla (1992) Temporality in Arabic Grammar and Discourses. 
Ph.D., Univ. of California, Los Angeles.
Al-Tayan, M. (1983) The incompatibility of consonants and its role in the coining of Arabic 
words between the classical heritage and new statistics. Damascus University.
Al-Tonis, Abbas (1980). Egyptian colloquial Arabic ; A structure review. Cairo: American 
University in Cairo.  
Al-Umar, Mohammad Mahmoud, & Awad, Mohammad Amin (1988). The relationship 
between the verb and the time of occurrence in Classical Arabic. International Journal of 
Islamic and Arabic Studies, 5.2, 52-89.
Al-Waer, M. (1983). Towards a modern and realistic sentential theory of basic structures in 
standard Arabic. Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Proceedings, 195-201.
Al-Waer, Mazen (1984) Toward a Modern and Realistic Sentential Theory of Basic 
Structures in Standard Arabic. Ph.D., 
Al-Waer, M. (1989). The syntactic and semantic analysis of the generation of the Arabic 
sentence. ProcKuw2, 172-220.
Al-Wer, Enam Essa (1992) Phonological Variation in the Speech of Women from Three 
Urban Areas in Jordan. Ph.D., University of Essex.
Albers, Hans-Georg (1987). Text reception and processing:  Culture-specific conditions of 
test comprehension in German as a Second Language Instruction-The case of Arabic 
students  (Textwahrnehmung und texterfahrung. kulturspezifische bedingungen des 
textverstandnisses im unterricht Deutsch als Fremdsprache-dargestellt am Beispiel 
arabischsprachiger). Zielsprache Deutsch, 18(3), 9-21.
Alexandru, D., & others (1983). Some errors in the acquisition of Romanian by Arabic 
speakers. Analele Universitatii din Timisoara, Seria stiinte filologice, 21, 83-87.
Alfalahi, Hussain Ali (1981) The Relationship between Discourse Universals and 
Discourse Structure of English and Arabic. Ph.D., University of South Carolina.
Alghamdi, Mansour M. A. (1990) Analysis, Synthesis and Perception of Voicing in 
Arabic. Ph.D., University of Reading (United Kindom).
Alghazo, Mohammad Hamdan (1987) Syncope and Epenthesis in Levantine Arabic:  A 
Nonlinear Approach. Ph.D., University of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana.
Alharbi, Lafi M. (1992) Formal Analysis of Intonation:  The Case of the Kuwaiti Dialect of 
Arabic. Ph.D., Heriot-Watt University.
Ali Bouacha, Abdelmadjid (1992). La Generalisation dans le discours: Langues officielles 
et discours de bois. Langages, 105, 100-113.
Ali, Latif H. (1970). Some Aspects of Negation in English and Baghdadi Arabic. 
Archivum Linguisticum, N.S. 1(1970), 67-83.
Ali, Latif H. (1983). Remarks on Òparticle movementÓ and Òextraposition from NPÓ rules: 
a study in contrastive analysis. Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 16, 33-41.
Ali, N. (1988a). Arabic syntax from a computational linguistic perspective. In 2nd 
International Conference of the Linguistic Society of Morocco,  . Rabat: 
Ali, Salah Salim (1988b). Symbol, Deviation, and Culture-Bound Expression as a Source 
of Error in Arabic-English Poetic Translation. Babel, 34(4), 211-221.
Ali, Salah Salim (1992). Misrepresentation of Some Ellipted Structures in the Translation 
of the QurÕan:  An Analytical Study. Meta:  Journal des Traducteurs/TranslatorsÕ Journal, 
37(no. 3 1992 Sept), 487-490.
Alio, Khalil (1988). Conjugation in Bidiya, a Chadic Language in Guera, Chad, and the 
Integration of Verbs Borrowed from French and Arabic. Cahiers du LACITO, 3, 81-93.
Alioua, Ahmed (1985). A Phonetic Study of [au] and [ai] in Literal Arabic:  Acoustic 
Analysis Based on Spectrography [Moroccan Speaker]. Travaux de lÕInstitut de Phonetique 
de Strasbourg, 17, 13-44.
Alpatov, V.M. (1990). On the Comparative Study of Linguistic Traditions [The Statement 
of the Problem]. Voprosy Yazykoznaniya, 39(2), 13-25.
Alrabaa, Sami (1985). The Use of Address Pronouns by Egyptian Adults: A 
Sociolinguistic Study. Journal of Pragmatics: An Interdisciplinary Bi-monthly of Language 
Studies, 9(5), 645-657.
Alrabaa, Sami (1986). Diglossia in the classroom:  the Arabic case. Anthropological 
Linguistics, 28(1), 73-79.
Alrabaa, Sami (1987). Social usage of address forms in Egypt: a sociolinguistic study. 
Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 16, 123-9.
AlShammaÕ, Ghada (1986). A sociolinguistic study of some basic characteristics of 
expression of the Syrian Arab personality. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 106-14.
Altoma, Salih J. (1970). Language Education in Arab Countries and the Role of the 
Academies. In Thomas A. Sebeok & others (Eds.), Current Trends in Linguistics, VI:  
Linguistics in So. West Asia and No. Africa (pp. 690-720). The Hague: Mouton.
Altoma, Salih J. (1980). Toward unified linguistics terminology. Al-ÔArabiyya, 13(1-2), 
51-64.
Alvar, Manuel (1992). Del castellano al espanol. Cuadernos Hispanoamericanos: Revista 
Mensual de Cultura Hispanica, 500, 7-39.
Alvarez-Pereyre, Frank (1987). Linguistics and Oral Traditions:  The Case of the Jewish 
Languages. Cahiers du LACITO, 2, 157-172.
Alwan, Abeer (1989). Perceptual Cues for Place of Articulation for the Voiced Pharyngeal 
and Uvular Consonants. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, 86(2), 549-556.
Amaireh, Khalil (1981). Various Elements Ascertaining Meaning in Arabic Grammar. 
Journal of Semitic Studies, 26(Spring), 31-45.
Amaireh, Khalil (1982). The affective meaning of some exclamatory styles in Arabic 
grammar. Al-ÔArabiyya, 15(1-2), 66-81.
Amaireh, Khalil (1984a). Aspects of Classification and Functional Syntax in Classical 
Arabic Grammar. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 1.1, 33-54.
Amaireh, Khalil (1984b). Generative Transformational Theory and its Arabic Grammatical 
Origin. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 1.2, 69-87.
Amaireh, Khalil (1989). The semantic value of the relative pronoun in Arabic. International 
Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 6.1, 75-94.
Amara, Muhammad (1988). Arabic Diglossia:  Conditions for Learning Standard Arabic. 
Al-Jadid, 12, 14-23.
Amara, Muhammad (1989). Developments and Changes in the Palestinian Arab Village in 
Israel:  Zalafa as an example. MatbaÕt Alairat, Umm Al-Fahm.
Amara, M. H. (1986) The Integration of English and Hebrew Lexical Items into the Arabic 
Spoken in an Arab Village in Israel. M. A. thesis, Bar-Ilan University.
Amara, Muhammad Hasan, & Spolsky, Bernard (1986). The diffusion and integration of 
Hebrew and English lexical items in the spoken Arabic of an Israeli village. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 43-54.
Amayreh, Ismael (1991). The orientalists and the history of their relationsip with the Arabic 
language. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Sciences, 8.2, 29-54.
Amayreh, Mohammad A. (1988). An Analytical Study of Modern Arabic Linguistic Terms. 
International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 5.2, 91-111.
Amayreh, Muhammad A. (1989). The basic structural features of Arabic:  a comparative 
study. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 6.2, 85-105.
Ambros, Arne A. (1984). Einige Bemerkungen zu ÔHavingÕ in Arabic (ZAL 11). 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 13, 91-93.
Ambros, Arne A. (1987). Lakin and Lakinna in the Koran. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 
17, 21-30.
Ambros, Arne A. (1988). Reflections on ficl of Pairing and Equivalence. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 19, 27-31.
Ambros, Arne A. (1989). Syntaktische und stilistische Funktionen des Energikus im 
Koran. Wiener Zeits. fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, 79, 35-56.
Amilcar Cipriano, Nestor (1979). Introduction to the Study of the Comma [Continuation]. 
Yelmo, 42-43(Oct-Mar), 5-6.
AmirÕiants, I. A. (1980). Predaniia o nazvaniiakh nekotorykh arabskikh gorodov. In E. M. 
Murzaev,V. A. Nikonov, & V. V. TsybulÕskii (Eds.), Onomastika Vostoka (pp. 170-173). 
Moscow: Nauka.
Anani, Mohammad (1980). Some phonetic differences between Arabic and English 
vowels. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikatiosnforschung, 33, 
709-14.
Anani, Mohammad (1983). Some differences between Arabic and English comparative 
structures. Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 17, 79-84.
Anani, Mohammad (1985a). Differences in distribution between Arabic /l/, /r/ and English 
/l/, /r/. Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 20, 129-33.
Anani, Mohammad (1985b). Phonetic description of Arabic consonants by early Arab 
linguists. The Bulletin, The Phonetic Sociey of Japan, 179, 14-17.
Anani, Mohammad (1988). Arabic and English Imperative Structures. IRAL, 26(3), 239-
243.
Anani, Mohammad (1989). Incorrect Stress Placement in the Case of Arab Learners of 
English. IRAL, 27(1), 15-21.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1981a). ÒTo Dare To SayÓ in Arabic. Revue Roumaine de 
Linguistique, 26(4), 323-327.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1981b). Observations on the genesis of general and specific meaning 
in an epistle of al-Marzuqi. Historiographia Linguistics, 8(2-3), 237-48.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1982). Elements of a theory of modality from the old Arab 
grammarians. Revue Roumaine de Linguistique, 27(4), 287-91.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1985a). The Arabic form Ôafalu: A typological approach. Revue 
Roumaine de Linguistique, 30(3), 249-54.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1985b). Arabic linguistic thought from a contemporary perspective  
(Gindirea lingvistica araba in perspectiva contemporana). Studii si cercetari lingvistice, 
36(3), 175-8.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1985c). Indefinite, Partitive, and Approximation in Arabic. Revue 
Roumaine de Linguistique, 30(6), 521-524.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1985d). New studies on the history of Arabic grammar. Revue 
Roumaine de Linguistique, 30(2), 185-8.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1985e). The theoretical/normative relation in various periods of 
Classical Arabic Grammar. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 15, 1-10.
Anghelescu, Nadia (1988). Aspect in Arabic:  Suggestions for an Analysis. Revue 
Roumaine de Linguistique, 33(5), 343-353.
Angoujard, Jean-Pierre (1986). Prosodic Hierarchies in Arabic  (Les hierarchies 
prosodiques en arabe). Revue quebecoise de linguistique, 16(1), 11-38.
Angoujard, Jean-Pierre (1987a). Accentuation et Syncope Dans Le Parler du Caire:  Quels 
Parametres? In David Odden (Eds.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics (pp. 13-
10). Dordrecht: Foris.
Angoujard, Jean-Pierre (1987b). Metrical Structure of Arabic. Providence, RI: Foris 
Publications.  
Angoujard, Jean-Pierre (1988). La Place de la syllabe dans une phonologie pluri-lineaire. 
Recherches Linguistiques de Vincennes, 17, 17-28.
Angoujard, Jean-Pierre, & El-Mejjad, Khadija (1988). Prosodic Aspects of the Speech of 
Marrakesh. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 18, 7-32.
Angoujard, J. P. (1981). Marqueur du feminin et systeme vocalique dans lÕarabe de 
Damas. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28( June-Sept.), 345-357.
Anwar, Mohamed Sami (1979). Remarks on a Collection of Speech Errors. International 
Journal of Psycholinguistics, 6(2(14)), 59-72.
Anwar, Mohamed Sami (1980). Morpheme Structure Conditions as Phonological Rules. In 
W. Dressler (Eds.), Phonologica (pp. 1-8). Innsbruck.
Anwar, Mohamed Sami (1981). The Legitimate Fathers of Speech Errors. Historiographia 
Lingustica, 8(2-3), 249-265.
Aoun, Youssef (1979). Is the Syllable or the Supersyllable a constituent? MIT Working 
Papers in Linguistics, 1, 140-148.
Aoun, Youssef (1981). ECP, move, and subjacency. Linguistic Inquiriy, 12(4), 637-45.
Aoun, Youssef (1982). Expletive PROs. In Alec Marantz (Eds.), (pp. 1-4). 
Aoun, Youssef, & Sportiche, Dominique (1981). The Domain of Weak Cross-Over 
Restrictions. MIT Working Papers in Linguistics, 3, 43-52.
Arkoun, M. (1981). Etudes de linguistique arabe. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 
28(June-Sept.).
Armagost, James L. (1977). On Disjunctive Ordering. In Frances Ingemann (Eds.), Papers 
from the 1975 Mid-America Linguistics Conference (pp. 13-26). Lawrence: Linguistic 
Dept., Univ. of Kansas.
Armistead, Samuel G., & Monroe, James T. (1983). Albas, mammas, and code-switching 
the Kharjas: a reply to Keith Whinnom. La  Coronoica: Spanish Medieval Language and 
Literature Journal and Newsletter, 11(2), 174-207.
Arveiller, Raymond (1979). Guaral and Reptile. Travaux de Linguistique et de Litterature, 
17(1), 87-96.
Arveiller, Raymond (1980). Notes lexicales: Termes de voyage. In Marc Dominicy & Marc 
Wilmet (Eds.), Linguistique romane et linguistique francaise: Hommages a Jacques Pohl 
(pp. 21-37). Brussels: Ed. de lÕUniv. de Bruxelles.
Asfoor, Majid Ahmad (1982) Difficulties English speakers encounter in Arabic phonology. 
Ph.D., University of San Francisco.
Ashoor, A. A., & Prochazka, T., Jr. (1982). Saudi Arabic Speech Audiometry. 
Audiology/Audiologie, 21(6), 493-508.
Ashoor, A. A., & Prochazka, T., Jr. (1985). Saudi Arabic Speech Audiometry for 
Children. British Journal of Audiology, 19(3), 229-238.
Assaf, Azim Sudki (1989) The Interrogative System of English Interlanguage: A 
Performance Analysis of Arabic-Speaking Adult LearnersÕ Acquisition of English Oral 
interrogatives. Ph.D., Stanford University.
Assubaiai, Saud Humaid (1979) Empirical bases for the interlanguage of Arab students 
learning English. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Ata, Ibrahim W. (1981). Stubborn Structures in ÔArabicÕ English. Journal of the School of 
Languages, 8, 158-163.
Atallah, Wahib (1979). Etymologie de QurÕan, le Coran. Folia Orientalia (FoliaO), 20, 97-
105.
Atari, Omar Fayez (1983) A contrastive analysis of Arab and American university students:  
strategies in accomplishing written English discourse functions:  implications for EFL. 
Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Atawneh, Ahmad (1992a). Code-Mixing in the Speech of Arabic-English Bilinguals. In E. 
Broselow,Mushira Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV 
(pp. 219-244). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Atawneh, Ahmad Mahmoud Abdul-Hadi (1992b) Politeness Theory and the Directive 
Speech-Act in Arabic English Bilinguals:  An Empirical Study. Ph.D., University of New 
York, Stony Brook.
Aurayieth, Abdulhamid (1982) The Phonology of the Verb in Libyan Arabic. Ph.D., 
University of Washington.
Avishur, Yitzhak (1990). ÔhyhÕ ÔsrÕ ÔhuhÕ in Arabic, Syriac, and Judeo-Arabic. 
Leshonenu/Lesonenu:  A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and Cognate 
Subjects, 55(1-2, 1990 Sept-Dec).
Avram, Andrei (1983). On the distinctive phonological traits of nasal consonants. Revue 
Roumaine de Linguistique, 28(4), 293-7.
Awad, G. (1985). La morphophonologie de lÕarabe: systeme numŽrique de projection 
Žtude prosodique (une description linguistique en vue dÕun traitement automatique. Paris-
VIII.
Awad, G.,Bohas, G., & Hlal, Y. (1982). Analyse automatique de la rime en poŽsie arabe. 
ƒtudes Arabes, 1, 18-30.
Awad, Maher (1990). Gender and Number Agreement in Standard Arabic. Colorado 
Research in Linguistics, 2, 1-6.
Awad, Mohammad Amin, & Al-Umar, Mohammad Mahmoud (1988). The Relationship 
Between the Verb and the Time of Occurence in Classical Arabic (In Arabic). International 
Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 5(2), 52-89.
Awwad, Mohammad (1990). Equivalence and translatability of English and Arabic Idioms. 
Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics (PSCL), 26(1990), 57-67.
Awwad, Mohammad Amin (1983). Topic-comment and acceptability constraints on 
embedded structures in modern standard Arabic. Studia Linguistica, 37(2), 175-92.
Awwad, Mohammad Amin (1987). Free and bound pronouns as verbs in rural Palestinian 
colloquial Arabic. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 16, 108-18.
Ayalon, Ami (1989). Dimuqratiyya, hurriyya, jumhuriyya: The Modernization of the 
Arabic Political Vocabulary. Asian and African Studies, 23(1), 23-42.
Ayoub, Georgine (1990). De ce qui Ône se dit pasÕ dans le Livre de Sibawayhi: La Notion 
de tamtil. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 
May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic 
Grammar (pp. 1-15). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Ayoub, G. (1991). La Nominalite du nom ou: La Question du tanwin. Arabica: Journal of 
Arabic and Islamic Studies, 38(2), 153-213.
Ayoub, Georgine, & Bohas, Georges (1981). Arab Grammarians, the Noun Phrase, and 
Good Sense. Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 267-284.
Azer, Hany Amin (1985). The expression of negation in Egyptian colloquial Arabic (ECA). 
Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9, 15-18.
Aziz, Yowell Y. (1983). Transliteration of English proper nouns into Arabic. Meta, 28(1), 
70-84.
Aziz, Yowell Y. (1985). Modes of Address in English-Arabic Translation. Babel: 
International Journal of Translation, 31(3), 144-146.
Aziz, Yowell Y. (1988). Theme-Rheme Organization and Paragraph Structure in Standard 
Arabic. Word, 39(2), 117-128.
Azzam, Rima (1990) The Nature of Arabic Reading and Spelling Errors of Young 
Children: A Descriptive Study. Ph.D., Columbia University Teachers College.
Baalbaki, Ramzi (1981). Arab Grammatical Controversies and Extant Sources of the 
Second and Third Centuries A. H. In Wada Al-Qadi (Eds.), Studia Arabica et Islamica (pp. 
1-26). Beirut: American University of Beirut.
Baalbaki, R. (1983). The Relation between nahw and balagha: A Comparative Study of the 
Methods of Sibawayhi and Gurgani. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 11, 7-23.
Baalbaki, Ramzi (1985). The treatment of qiraÕat by the second and third century 
grammarians. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 15, 11-32.
Baalbaki, Ramzi (1986). On the Meaning of the Waw al-maÔiyya Construction. Al-
ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 7-18.
Baalbaki, Ramzi (1990). IÔrab and BinaÕ from Linguistic Reality to Grammatical Theory. 
Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In 
Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar 
(pp. 17-33). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Bahloul, Maher (1993). The Copula in Modern Standard Arabic. In Mushira Eid & Clive 
Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V (pp. 209-230). Amsterdam & 
Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Bahloul, Maher (1994) The Syntax and Semantics of Taxis, Aspect, Tense and Modality in 
Standard Arabic. Ph.D., Cornell University.
Bahloul, Maher, & Wayne, Harbert (1993). Agreement Asymetries in Arabic. In The 
Eleventh West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics,  . Jonathan Mead.
Bahloul, Raja (1994) Inflectional Morphology, Negation and the Clausal Structure in 
Tunisian Arabic. M.A., Cornell University.
Bahumaid, Showqi Ali (1990) Lexical Interference of English in Colloquial Aden Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Exeter (United Kingdom).
Bakalla, Muhammad H. (1979). SibawayhiÕs contribution to the study of Arabic phonetics. 
Al-ÔArabiyya, 12(1-2), 68-76.
Bakalla, M. H. (1981). The Treament of Nasal Elements by Early Arab and Muslim 
Phoneticians. Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 285-305.
Bakalla, M.H. (1983). Arabic Linguistics:  An Introduction and Bibliography. London: 
Mansell.  
Baker, Mona (1987). Review of methods used for coining new terms in Arabic. Meta, 
32(2), 186-8.
Bakhit, Bushra ElÕ Fasyl (1985). Iz opyta orientirovaniia lingvostranovedcheskogo 
slovaria na sudanskuiu auditoriiu. Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom, 3, 67-72.
Bakir, Murtadha (1980). Aspects of Clause Structure in Arabic: A Study of Word Order in 
Literary Arabic. Bloomington: Indiana University Linguistics Club.  
Bakir, Murtadha (1986). Sex differences in the approximation to standard Arabic:  a case 
study. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 3-9.
Bakir, Murtadha J. (1988). Notes on Subjacency as a Syntactic Constraint in Arabic and 
English. Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 22, 73-96.
Bakir, Murthadha J. (1990). Notes on Subjacency as a Syntactic Constraint in Arabic and 
English. In Jacek Fisiak (Eds.), Further Insights into Contrastive Analysis (pp. 329-355). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Baldi, Sergio (1988). A First Ethnolinguistic Comparison of Arabic Loanwords Common 
to Hausa and Swahili. Annali Ist. Univ. Orientale, 48(4).
Baldi, Sergio (1989). On Semantics of Arabic Loan Words in Hausa.  Proc. of 
International Symposium on Chadic Linguistics. In Zygmunt Frajzyngier (Eds.), Current 
Progress in Chadic Linguistics (pp. 285-301). Philadelphia: Benjamins.
Ball, Martin J. (1982). Aspects of the acquisition of non-native phonological contrasts. 
Polyglot, 4(fiche 1), 1-17.
Bani Yasin, Raslan, & Owens, Jonathan (1984). The Bduul Dialect of Jordan. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 26(2), 202-232.
Bani Yasin, R., & Owens, J. (1987). The Phonology of a Northern Jordanian Arabic 
Dialect. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, 137(2), 297-331.
Bar-Lev, Zev (1982). The logic of interdigitation. Papers in Linguistics, 15(1-4), 77-86.
Bar-Lev, Zev (1986). Discourse theory and Òcontrastive rhetoricÓ. Discourse Processes, 
9(2), 235-46.
Barbot, M. (1981). Evolution de lÕarabe contemporain, I: Bibliographie dÕarabe moderne et 
du Levant; Introduction au parler de Damas; II: Les Sons du parler de Damas. Paris: 
Maisonneuve.  
Barbot, Michel (1983). Reflexions sur les reformes modernes de lÕarabe litteral. In Istvan 
Fodor & Claude Hagege (Eds.), Language Reform: History and Future (pp. 127-154). 
Hamburg: Buske.
Barbot, Michel (1984). LÕInterrogation en arabe. Ling. Palatina Colloquia II. In Paul 
Valentin (Eds.), LÕInterrogation: Actes du Colloque tenu les 19 et 20 decembre 1983 par le 
departement de linguistique de lÕUniversite de Paris-Sorbonne (pp. 197-208). Paris: PU 
Paris-Sorbonne.
Barcelo, Carmen (1990). ?Galgos o podencos? Sobre la supuesta berberizacion del pais 
valenciano en los siglos VIII y IX. Al- Qantara: Revista de Estudios Arabes, 11(2), 429-
460.
Bardiner, Duncan B. (1979). The Semantics of Russian Verbal Suffixes:  A First Look. 
Slavic and East European Journal, 23(3), 381-394.
Barkho, Leon Y. (1990). Implications of Weather-Related Language: Contrasts between 
Arabic and English. Journal of Pragmatics: An Interdisciplinary Bi-monthly of Language 
Studies, 14(3), 471-476.
Bashir, Samih Mahmoud (1982) A Functional Approach to Arabic Relative Clauses with 
Implications for Foreign Language Teaching. Ph.D., Columbia University Teachers 
College.
Bastide, Mario (1980a). Le Temoignage des ecrivains maghrebins de langue francaise sur 
les interferences phonologiques du francais et de lÕarabe. Le Francais dans le Monde, 156, 
26-29.
Bastide, Mario (1980b). Phonological interference between Arabic and French, as testified 
to by North African authors writing in French. Le Francais dans le Monde, 20(156), 26-9.
Beaumont, Jean-Charles (1987). Borrowing in Moroccan Arabic:  Sociolinguistic factors 
of integration  (LÕ Emprunt en arabe marocain: facteurs sociolinguistiques dÕintegration). 
McGill Working Papers in Linguistics, 4(2), 53-88.
Bechtold, John Ivan (1990) Memory and Comprehension of Inferences in Complex 
Sentences: A Comparison of English, Spanish, Chinese and Arabic. Ph.D., Kansas State 
University.
Beesley, K.,Buckwalter, T., & Newton, S. (1989). Two-level finite state analysis of 
Arabic morphology. CAM PROC 1, session 2a.3, 1-10.
Beesley, Kenneth R. (1991). Computer Analysis of Arabic Morphology:  A Two-Level 
Approach with Detours.  Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In 
Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 155-
172). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Beeston , A.F.L. (1984). Sabaic Grammar. Manchester:: University of Manchester.  
Beeston, A. F. L. (1981a). A Medieval ÔOtherwiseÕ Idiom. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 6, 69-70.
Beeston, A. F. L. (1981b). Some Notes on Classical Arabic Syntax. Journal of Semitic 
Studies, 26(1981 Spring), 21-30.
Beeston, A.F.L. (1985). Two BiÕr inscriptions reexamined. Bulletin of the School of 
Oriental and African Studies, 48(1), 42-52.
Beeston, A.F.L. (1989). A Matter of Length, Unambiguous Examples of Short and Long 
Vowel Sounds in Classical Arabic. Journal of Semitic Studies, 34(2), 347-354.
Behnstedt , P. (1987). On the elative form afaÔlal in Aleppo Arabic  (Zur Elativform afaclal 
im Aleppinischen). Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 17, 92-3.
Behnstedt, Peter (1981). Weitere koptische Lehnworter im Agyptisch-Arabischen. Die 
Welt des Orients: Wissenschaftliche Beitrage zur Kunde des Morgenlandes, 12, 81-98.
Behnstedt, Peter (1982). Iz-zarga. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 7, 74-75.
Behnstedt, Peter (1987). Remarks on the dialects from the SaÔdah [North Yemen] region  
(Anmerkungen zu den dialekten der Gegend von SaÔdah (Nord-Jemen)). Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 16, 93-107.
Behnstedt, Peter (1988). Lexikalisches aus dem Jemen. Die Welt des Orients: 
Wissenschaftliche Beitrage zur Kunde des Morgenlandes, 19, 142-155.
Behnstedt, Peter (1989). Christlich-Aleppinische Texte. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 20, 43-96.
Behnstedt, Peter (1991). Noch einmal zum Problem der Personalpronomina henne (3. Pl.), 
- kon (2. Pl.) und -hon (3. Pl.) in den syrisch-libanesischen Dialekten. Zeitschrift der 
Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, 141, 235-252.
Behnstedt, Peter , & Woidich, M. (1982). Die egyptischen Oasen: Eine dialektologischer 
Vorbericht. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 8, 39-71.
Behnstedt, Peter, & Woidich, Manfred (1985). Die Agyptisch-arabischen Dialekte. 
Wiesbaden: Reichert.  
Behnstedt, Peter, & Woidich, M. (1988). Die Šgyptisch-arabischen Dialekte:  Band 3, 
Texte:  II. Niltaldialekte, III. Oasendialekte. Wiesbaden: Reichert.  
Beker, Dan (1981). Nivim u-fitgamim Ôarviyim be-hashvaÕot milim be-yemei ha-beinayim. 
Leshonenu LaÕAm: Kuntresim ÔAmamiyyim le-ÕInyane Lashon/Popular Journal of 
Language, 32, 35-46.
Belazi, Hedi M. (1992). Multilingualism in Tunisia and French/Arabic Code switching 
among Educated Tunisian Bilinguals. Ithaca: Cornell University.  
Belkaid, Yamina (1984). The Vowels of Modern Literary Arabic-A Spectrographic 
Analysis. Travaux de lÕInstitut de Phonetique de Strasbourg, 16, 217-240.
Bellamy, J. (1985). A New Reading of the Namarah Inscription (Arabic in Nabataean 
Script). Journal of the American Oriental Society, 105(1), 31-51.
Bellamy, James A. (1987). Arabic names in the Chanson de Roland: Saracen Gods, 
Frankish swords, RolandÕs horse, and the Olifant. Journal of the American Oriental 
Society, 107(2), 267-77.
Bellamy, James A. (1988). Two Pre-Islamic Arabic Inscriptions Revised:  Jabal Ramm and 
Umm al-Jimal. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 108(3), 369-378.
Bellamy, James A. (1989). The Arabic Alphabet. In Wayne M Senner & Keith N Schoville 
(Eds.), The Origins of Writing (pp. 91-102). Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press.
Bellman, D. (1983). Remarks about notion-problems of the dialectics between the national 
and the international and about the actual understanding of literature by the Arab  Baath. In 
Fourth International Conference on the Theoretical Problems of Asian and African 
Literatures,  (pp. 382-9). Bratislava:  Literary Institute of the Slovak Academy of Sciences.
Belnap, Kirk, & Gee, John (1994). Classical Arabic in Contact: The transition to near 
categorical agreement patterns. In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters 
(Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic 
Linguistics (pp. 121-149). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Belnap, R. Kirk (1987a). Complementation in Modern Standard Arabic and Giv—nÕs 
implicational hierarchical scales. In R. Kirk Belnap,L. Morgenthaler, & R. Foye (Ed.), 
Penn Review of Linguistics,  (pp. 1-13). Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania.
Belnap, R. Kirk (1987b). WhoÕs Taking Arabic and What on Earth For?  A Survey of 
Students in Arabic Language Programs. Al-ÔArabiyya, 20(1-2), 29-42.
Belnap, R. Kirk (1991) Grammatical Agreement Variation in Cairene Arabic. Ph.D., 
University of Pennsylvania.
Belnap, R. Kirk (1993). The Meaning of Deflected/Strict Agreement Variation in Cairene 
Arabic. In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V (pp. 
97-118). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Belnap, R. Kirk, & Shabaneh, Osama (1992). Variable Agreement with Nonhuman 
Controllers in Classical and Modern Standard Arabic. In Ellen Broselow,Mushira Eid, & 
John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 245-262). Amsterdam 
& Phildelphia: John Benjamins.
Benabdellah, A. (1981). Problemes dÕarabisation de la science et coordination des termes 
scientifiques. Internat. Symposium, Moscow, 27-30 Nov., 1979. In Magdalena Krommer-
Benz (Eds.), Theoretical and Methodological Problems of Terminology/Problemes 
theoriques et methodologiques de terminologie/Teoreticheskie i metodologicheskie voprosy 
terminologii. (pp. 399-411). Munich: Saur.
Benabdi, Linda C. (1986). Lexical expansion in the Maghrib: the functional linguistic 
corpus. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 61, 65-78.
Bendelac, Alegria (1988). Humor and affectivity in Jacquetia, the Judeo-Spanish language 
of Northern Morocco. Humor, 1(2), 177-186.
Bender, M. Lionel (1983). Color term encoding in a special lexical domain: Sudanese 
Arabic skin colors. Anthropological Linguistics, 25(1), 19-27.
Benhallam, Abdu (1978). Geminates:  A New Approach. In Ralph E. Cooley,Mervin R. 
Barnes, & John A. Dunn (Eds.), Papers of the 1978 Mid-America Linguistics Conference 
at Oklahoma (pp. 212-221). Norman: Dept. of communication, University of Oklahoma.
Benhallam, Abdu (1979). MIT Phonology and Arabic. Papers from the Regional Meetings, 
Chicago Linguistic Society, 15, 30-41.
Benhallam, Abdu (1980a). Constraints on Syllables in Arabic. In Robert S. Haller (Eds.), 
Lincoln:  Area Studies Committee in Linguistics (pp. 344-54). Lincoln: University of 
Nebraska.
Benhallam, Abderrafi (1980b) Syllable Structure and Rule Type in Arabic. Ph.D., 
University of Florida.
Benjamin, Hary (1989). Middle Arabic:  proposals for new terminology. Al-ÔArabiyya, 
22(1-2, 1989), 19-36.
Benmamoun, Elabbas (1991a). Causatives in Moroccan Arabic.  Papers from 3rd Annual 
Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives 
on Arabic LInguistics, III (pp. 173-195). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Benmamoun, E. (1991b). Negation and Verb Movement. In Proceedings of NELS 21,  . 
GLSA, University of Massachusetts at Amherst.
Benmamoun, E. (1992a) Inflectional Morphology:  Problems of Projection, Representation 
and Derivation. Ph.D. dissertation, University of So. California.
Benmamoun, E. (1992b). Null Pronominals in the Context of NPs and QP. In Proceedings 
of WCCFL 1992,  . 
Benmamoun, E. (1992c). Structural Conditions on Agreement. In Proceedings of NELS 
22,  . GLSA, University of Massachusetts, Amherst.
Bentahila, Abdelali (1983a). Language attitudes among Arabic-French bilinguals in 
Morocco. Clevedon: Bank House.  
Bentahila, Abdelali (1983b). Motivations for code-switching among Arabic-French 
bilinguals in Morocco. Language and Communication, 3(3), 233-43.
Bentahila, Abdelali, & Davies, Eirlys E. (1983). The syntax of Arabic-French code 
switching. Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics, 59(4), 301-30.
Bentahila, Abdelali, & Davies, Eirlys E. (1991). Standards for Arabic: One, Two or Many? 
Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics, 17(1), 69-88.
Berge, Heliane Jill (1981). Mutations vocaliques dans les dialectes hispano-arabes. 
Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(1981 June-Sept.), 362-368.
Bergman, Elizabeth (Ed.). (1993).  Keeping it in the Family:  Gender and Conflict in 
Moroccan Arabic Proverbs. New York:   Columbia University Press.
Bergman, Elizabeth Marie (1992) What the Old Ones Said: The Syntax of the Moroccan 
Arabic Proverb. Ph.D., The University of Michigan.
Bergman, Elizabeth Marie (1993) What the Old Ones Said: The Syntax of the Moroccan 
Arabic Proverb. Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Bergstrasser, Gotthelf (1928). Introduction to the Semitic Languages (Daniels, Peter T., 
Trans.). Winona Lake, Indiana: Eisenbrauns.  
Bernal, Martin (1987). On the Transmission of the Alphabet to the Aegean Before 1400 
B.C. Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research, 267(Aug), 1-19.
Bernards, Monique P. L. M. (1990). The Basrian Grammarian ÔAbu ÔUmar al-Garmi: His 
Position between Sibawayhi and Mubarrad. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on  Hist. of Arabic 
Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter 
(Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 35-47). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
BertelÕs, A.E. (1982). Subdivisions of the Lexicon, Semantic Fields and Thematic Groups 
of Words. Voprosy yazykonznaniya, 31(4), 52-63.
Bertrand, Catherine (1990). Four Linguistic Trumps. Le Francais dans le Monde, 
29(supplement 14), 46-48.
Besner, Derek,Daniels, Shona, & Slade, Christine (1982). Ideogram Reading and Right 
Hemisphere Language. The British Journal of Psychology, 73(1), 21-28.
Besner, Derek,Snow, Doug, & Davelaar, Eileen (1986). Logographic reading: is the right 
hemisphere special? Canadian Journal of Psychology, 40(1), 45-53.
Bezirgan, Najm A. (1979). Some logical rules in al-Kitab. Al-ÔArabiyya, 12(1-2), 77-82.
Biesterfeldt, Hans-Hinrich (1990). Ibn FarigunÕs Chapter on Arabic Grammar in His 
Compendium of the Sciences. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, 
Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in 
the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 49-56). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Biletskii, A.O. (1981). On words of Eastern origin in Western language. Movoznavstvo, 
15(5(89)), 47-51.
Billiez, Jacqueline (1985). Les jeunes issus de lÕimmigration algerienne et espagnole a 
grenoble: quelques aspects sociolinguistiques. International Journal of the Sociology of 
Language, 54, 41-56.
Blanc, Haim (1971). Arabic. In Thomas A. Sebeok & others (Eds.), Current Trends in 
Linguistics, VII:  Linguistics in Sub-Saharan Africa (pp. 501-509). The Hague: Mouton.
Blanc, Haim (1981). Egyptian Arabic in the Seventeenth Century: Notes on the Judeo-
Arabic Passages of Darxe NoÕam (Venice, 1697). In Shelomo Morag (Eds.), Studies in 
Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth 
Birthday by HisGoitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by His Students, 
Colleagues, and Friends. (pp. 185-202). Jerusalem: Magnes Press.
Blau, Joshua (1981a). The Emergence and Linguistic Background of Judeo-Arabic: A 
Study of the Origins of Middle Arabic. Leiden: Brill.  
Blau, Joshua (1981b). The State of Research in the Field of the Linguistic Study of Middle 
Arabic. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(1981 June-Sept.), 187-203.
Blau, Joshua (1982a). Remarks on the development of some pronominal suffixes in 
Hebrew. Hebrew Annual Review, 6, 61-7.
Blau, Joshua (1982b). Some Ugaritic, Hebrew, and Arabic Parallels. Journal of Northwest 
Semitic Languages (JNWSL), 10, 5-10.
Blau, Joshua (1983). Vestiges of tanwin -un and the case ending -u as attested in Yemenite 
Judeo-Arabic texts from the seventeenth century. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and 
African Studies, 46(3), 528-31.
Blau, Joshua (1985). Notes on the use of different registers of Judeo-Arabic by one 
author. Hebrew Annual Review, 9, 75-8.
Blau, Joshua (1988). Studies in Middle Arabic and Its Judaeo-Arabic Variety. Jerusalem: 
Magnes Press, Hebrew Univ.  
Blau, Joshua (1990). The Academy of the Hebrew Language and the Arabic Language 
Academies. Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and 
Cognate Subjects, 54(2-4), 269-278.
Blau, Joshua (1991). Kavim Milonyim Ofyaniyim HaMeshutafim LaAravit HaYehudit 
VeLaLehagim HaAraviyim HaHadashim. In Judith Dishon & Ephraim Hazan (Eds.), 
Mehkarim BaSafrut Am Yisrael UVeTarbut Teyman - Sefer HaYovel LeProfessor Yehuda 
Ratzaby (pp. 11-17). Ramat-Gan: Bar-IIan UP.
Blau, Joshua, & Hopkins, Simon (1984). On early Judaeo-Arabic orthography. Journal of 
Arabic Lingusitics, 12, 9-27.
Bloch, Ariel (1980). Direct and Indirect Relative Clauses. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 5, 8-34.
Bloch, Ariel A. (1990). Damir al-saÕn. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 21, 30-39.
Blohm, Dieter (1981). Zur Funktion des Partizip Aktiv im modernen Hocharabisch. 
Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 34, 143-
151.
Blohm, Dieter (1989a). Arabic Verbs of Horizontal Movement:  The Action Type and 
Semantics of Verb Forms. Linguistische Studien, 189, 1-16.
Blohm, Dieter (1989b). Terminativ-2-Verben im Arabischen. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 42(6).
Blohm, Dieter (1991). Some Remarks on Writing a Grammar of Modern Standard Arabic. 
Folia Orientalia, 28, 89-98.
Blommaert, Jan M.E. (1985). The semantics of Bantu colour terms. Grazer Linguistische 
Studies, 24, 63-76.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1980). Zur Haufigkeit von Verben im Neuhocharabischen. Zeitschrift 
fur Arabische Linguistik, 5, 35-69.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1981a). Zum Begriff der ÔVlenzÕ des Verbums in der Arabischen 
Nationalgrammatik. Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 329-344.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1981b). Zur Deutung von fa-nadaha min tahtiha. Zeitschrift fur 
Arabische Linguistik, 6, 70-72.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1982a). Eine mogliche Parallele zu fa-Õummuhu hawiyatun (Sure 101, 
9). Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 9, 79-80.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1982b). yiÕanina. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 7, 75-76.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1985). Notes on the importance of variant readings and grammar in the 
Tafsir al-Galalayn. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 15, 33-44.
Bobzin, Hartmut (1990). Guillaume Postel (1510-1581) und die Terminologie der 
arabischen Nationalgrammatik. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, 
Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in 
the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 57-71). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Bobzin, Harmut, & Versteegh, Kees (Ed.). (1985).  Studies in the history of Arabic 
grammar: proceedings of the first symposium on the history of Arabic grammar.   
Boff, Marie-Christine (1983). A Contribution to the Experimental Study of Back 
Consonants in Classical Arabic (Moroccan Speakers). Travaux de lÕInstitut de Phonetique 
de Strasbourg, 15, 1-363.
Bohas, Georges (1981). Quelques Aspects de lÕArgumentation et de lÕExplication chez les 
Grammairiens Arabes. Arabica, 28(2-3), 204-221.
Bohas, Georges (1985). Explanation in Arab phonology. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 
15, 45-52.
Bohas, Georges (1986). Accent and deletion of e in the Damascus Dialect of Arabic  
(Accentuation et effacement de e dans le parler de damas). Revue quebecoise de 
linguistique, 16(1), 39-60.
Bohrer, William G. (1988). The Well-Formedness Condition:  Bounded versus 
Unbounded Association. Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics 
(ESCOL), 5, 36-46.
Bokamba, Eyamba G. (1984). Language in African Culture and Society. Studies in the 
Linguistic Sciences, 14(2).
Boldyrev, A.H. (1984). ÒThe Seven Repeated RhymesÓ [From the history of one term of 
Arabic-Persian versification]. Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 33(3), 44-7.
Bolozky, Shmuel, & Haydar, Adnan F. (1986). Colloquial gender neutralization in the 
numeral systems of modern Hebrew and Lebanese Arabic. Al-ÕArabiyya, 19(1-2), 19-28.
Bolozky, Shmuel; Saad, George N. (1983). On Active and Non-Active Causativizable 
Verbs in Arabic and Hebrew. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 10, 71-79.
Bonfante, Giuliano (1986). The continuity of Latin in Sicily  (La continuita del latino in 
Sicilia). Mediterranean Language Review, 2, 47-9.
Bonnard, Henri (1985). Francophonie maghrebine. LÕ Information Grammaticale, 26, 20-
22.
Bonnot, Jean-Francois (1979). Experimental Study of Some Aspects of Gemination and 
Emphasis in Arabic. Travaux de lÕInstitut de Phonetuque de Strasbourg, 11, 109-118.
Borer , Hagit , & Tuller, Laurice (1985). Nominative/agreement complementarity and VSO 
order in standard Arabic. Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9, 27-32.
Borg, Alexander (1984). Kormakiti Arabic:  phonological notes and texts. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics, 13, 68-85.
Borg, Albert J. (1980). An aspectual distinction in verbs and nouns in Maltese. Archivum 
Linguisticum: A Review of Comparative Philology and General Linguistics, 11, 107-17.
Borg, Albert J. (1981). A Study of Aspect in Maltese. A Study of Aspect in Maltese: 
Karoma.  
Borg, A.J.,Comrie, B. , & Plank, F. (1984). Object diffuseness in Maltese. In Objects: 
Towards a Theory of Grammatical Relations (pp. 109-26). London: Academic Press.
Bosworth, C. E. (1989). A Note on taÕarrub in Early Islam. Journal of Semitic Studies, 
34(2), 355-362.
Bouacha, Abdelmadjid-Ali (1984). Toward a local comprehension of the notion of second 
language. Le Francais dans le Monde, 24(189), 33-37.
Bouamrane, Ali (1986) Aspects of the Sociolinguistic Situation in Algeria. Ph.D., 
University of Aberdeen (UK).
Boucherit, Aziza (1987). Arabic-French alternative discourse in Algiers  (Discours 
alternatif arabe-francais a Alger). La Linguistique, 23(2), 117-29.
Boucherit, Aziza (1991). Convergence et resistance des hommes et des langues. 
International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 87, 55-70.
Boucherit, Aziza (1992). Quelques remarques a propos du cheminement des emprunts en 
arabe algerien. LÕ Information Grammaticale, 54, 56-58.
Bouhadiba, Farouk A. N. (1988) Aspects of Algerian Arabic Verb Phonology and 
Morphology. Ph.D., University of Reading (UK).
Boukous, Ahmed (1979). La Situation linguistique au Maroc: Competition symbolique et 
acculturation. Revue Litteraire Mensuelle, 602-603, 5-21.
Bovingdon, Rigu (1989). The Mould of a New Environment:  THe Maltese Language in 
Australia. Journal of Maltese Studies, 19-20(1989-1990), 110-115.
Boysson-Bardies, Benedicte de,Halle, Pierre,Sagart, Laurent, & Durand, Catherine 
(1989). A Crosslinguistic Investigation of Vowel Formants in Babbling. Journal of Child 
Language, 16(1), 1-17.
Brahimi, Brahim (1987). Benefits and Drawbacks of Arabization. Le Francais dans le 
Monde, 27(213), 39-41.
Brame, M. (1985). Recursive syntax of Arabic speech. Workshop Papers Kuwait, 1.
Brame, Michael K. (1983). Bound anaphora is not a relation between NPs: evidence for 
local word grammar (without trees). Linguistic Analysis, 11(2), 139-66.
Bramon, Dolors (1987). Article Agglutination and Deglutination in Castilian and Catalan 
Arabisms. Vox Romanica, 46, 138-179.
Branca, P. (1990). Basic Units of the Arabic Speech at the Graphic-Semantic Interface. 
Aevum-Rassegna di Scienze Storiche Linguitiche e Filologiche, 64(3), 489-501.
Braun, Friederike (1985). Umgekehrte Anrede im Arabischen. In Ursula Pieper & Gerhard 
Stickel (Eds.), Studia Linguistica Diachronica et Synchronica Werner Winter Sexagenario 
Anno MCMLXXXIII Gratis Animis ab Eius Collegis, Amicis Discipulisque Oblata (pp. 
81-92). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Breeze, Andrew (1991). Old English ealfara, ÔPack-HorseÕ: A Spanish-Arabic Loanword. 
Notes and Queries, 38, 15-17.
Bresova, Jitka (1991). Arabske ekvivalenty ceskych slovotvornych prostredku vyjadrovani 
voluntativni modality. Sbornik Praci Filosoficke Fakulty Brnenske University: Rada 
Jazykovedna - A, 39, 93-97.
Briceno Jauregui, Manuel (1988). The Genesis of Spanish. Glotta, 3(2), 8-12.
Briffa, Charles (1989). White Dipping Sails. Journal of Maltese Studies, 19-20, 62-70.
Britti, Anthony (1980). A history of right dislocation in certain Levantine Arabic dialects. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 121-39.
Broeder, Peter (1992). Possession in a New Language. Applied Linguistics, 13(1), 100-
118.
Broeder, Peter, & Extra, Guus (1991). Acquisition of Kinship Reference: A Study on 
Word-Formation Processes of Adult Language Learners. International Journal of Applied 
Linguistics, 1(2), 209-227.
Broselow, Ellen (1979). Cairene Arabic Syllable Structure. Linguistic Analysis, 5(4), 345-
382.
Broselow, Ellen (1980). Syllable structure in two Arabic dialects. Studies in the Linguistic 
Sciences, 10(2), 13-24.
Broselow, Ellen (1982). On predicting the interaction of stress and epenthesis. Glossa: An 
International Journal of Linguistics, 16(2), 115-32.
Broselow, Ellen (1983a). A lexical treatment of Cairene Arabic object clitics. In Current 
Approaches to African Linguistics (pp. 287-97). Dordrecht: Foris.
Broselow, Ellen (1983b). Nonobvious Transfer: On Predicting Epenthesis Errors. In 
Susan M. Gass & Larry Selinker (Eds.), Language Transfer in Language Learning (pp. 
269-280). Rowley: Newbury House.
Broselow, Ellen (1984) Ahmaric, automatic spreading, and the obligatory contour 
principle. Ms., University of New York, Stony Brood.
Broselow, Ellen (1988a). An investigation of transfer in second language phonology. 
Studies in Descriptive Linguistics, 17, 77-93.
Broselow, Ellen (1988b). Prosodic Phonology and the Acquisition of a Second Language. 
In Suzanne Flynn & Wayne OÕNeil (Eds.), Linguistic Theory in Second Language 
Acquisition (pp. 295-308). Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic.
Broselow, Ellen (1992a). Parametric Variation in Arabic Dialect Phonology. In E. 
Broselow,M. Eid, & J. McCarthy (Eds.),  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 7-
46). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Broselow, Ellen (1992b). Transfer and Universals in Second Language Epenthesis. In 
Susan M.  Gass & Larry Selinker (Eds.), Language Transfer in Language Learning (pp. 
71-86). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Broselow, E.,Eid, M., & McCarthy, J. (Ed.). (1992).  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics 
IV. Amsterdam & Philadelphia:   John Benjamins.
Broselow, Ellen, & McCarthy, John (1984). A theory of internal reduplication. Linguistic 
Review, 3(1), 25-88.
Bruhn, Thea Corinne (1986) A Study of the Relationship among Language, Culture and 
Cognition. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Brusset, J., & Saroh, A. (1987). CrŽation dÕune base de donnŽes lexicale de lÕarabe Žcrit: 
Utilisation pour un systeme morpho-syntaxique No. UniversitŽ de Tunis, Centre dÕEtudes 
et de Recherches Economiques et Sociales.
Brustad, Kristen E. (1992) The Comparative Syntax of Four Arabic Dialects:  An 
Investigation of Selected Topics. Ph.D., Harvard University.
Bubenik, Vit (1979). Thematization and passivization in Arabic. Lingua, 49(4), 295-313.
Bubenik, Vit (1990). Structural Influence of Arabic and Persian on the North-Western 
Indo-Aryan Languages. In Jim Black (Eds.), Papers from the Fourteenth Annual Meeting 
of the Atlantic Provinces Linguistic Association St. JohnÕs, Newfoundland: 
Buckwalter, Timothy A. (1988). A Brief Note on OCP and Arabic Texts. Literary and 
Linguistic Computing: Journal of the Association for Literary and Linguistic Computing, 
3(4), 271-272.
Budagov, V.B. (1986). Linguistic terms of Arabic origin in literary-artistic azerbaijani [The 
nineteenth and the beginning of the twentieth centuries]  (Azerbajdahaned ebi-bedii dilinde 
ereb mensheli lingvistik terminler (XIX esr-XX esrin evvelleri)). Izvestiya Akademii Nauk 
Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyki iskusstov, 3, 92-8.
Bunis, David M. (1983). Some Problems in Judezmo Linguistics. Mediterranean Language 
Review, 1, 103-138.
Buridant, Claude (1980). Problems of Lexical Borrowing in medieval Latin. Cahiers de 
lÕInstitut de Linguistique de Louvain, 6(1-2), 37-67.
Burton, John (1988). Linguistic Errors in the QurÕan. Journal of Semitic Studies, 33(2), 
181-196.
Butcher, A., & Ahmad, K. (1987). Some Acoustic and Aerodynamic Characteristics of 
Pharyngeal Consonants in Iraqi Arabic. Phonetica, 44(3), 156-172.
Bynon, James (1979). The Baby Talk Register and Diachrony:  The Evidence from Arabic 
and Berber. International Conference on Historical Linguistics.
Cabanelas Rodriguez, Dario (1981). Estado linguistico de al-Andalus en torno al siglo XI. 
In Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica (pp. 25-43). Madrid: Inst. Hispano-
Arabe de Cultura.
Cachia, P. (1988). From Sound to Echo in Late Badi Literature (Pre-Modern Arabic 
Literature). Journal of the American Oriental Society, 108(2), 219-225.
Cachia, Pierre (1989). The Development of a Modern Prose Style in Arabic Literature. 
Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 52(1), 65-76.
Cadora, Frederick J. (1966). The Concept of Compatibility in the Study of Language 
Varieties. Word, 22(1, 2, & 3), 310-317.
Cadora, Frederick J. (1979). Interdialectical Lexical Compatibility in Arabic: An Analytical 
Study of the Lexical Relationships among the Major Syro-Lebanese Varieties. Leiden: 
Brill.  
Cadora, Frederic J. (1989). Linguistic Change and the Bedouin-Sedentary Dichotomy in 
Old Arabic Dialects. Anthropological Linguistics, 31(3&4), 264-284.
Cadora, Frederick J. (1992). Bedouin, Village, and Urban Arabic: An Ecolinguistic Study. 
Leiden: E.J. Brill.  
Calder, Norman (1988). Hinth, birr, tabarrur, tahannuth: An Inquiry into the Arabic 
Vocabulary of Vows. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 51(2), 214-
239.
Calder, Norman (1991). The QurraÕ and the Arabic Lexicographical Tradition. Journal of 
Semitic Studies (JSS), 36(2), 297-307.
Call, Mary Emily (1985). Auditory Short-Term Memory, Listening Comprehension, and 
the Input Hypothesis. TESOL Quarterly, 19(4), 765-781.
Calvet, Louis-Jean (1989). Ouatreres or vecees?  Borrowing or Etymology? Le Francais 
dans le Monde, 29(222), 43-44.
Campbell, Robert B. (1981). Towards a Dictionary of Contemporary Arab Writers 
(CEMAM Reports No. Series No: 6). Arab Society 1978-79: Reflections and Realities. 
Beirut: Dar el-Mashreq.
Cantarino, Vicente (1994). From Spoken to Written Language and Back: Some cultural 
considerations on Hispano-Arabic phonetics. In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith 
Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium 
on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 25-35). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Card, Elizabeth Anne (1983) A Phonetic and Phonological Study of Arabic Emphasis. 
Ph.D., Cornell University.
Cardona, Giorgio Raimondo (1981). Schede sulla diffusione dellÕarabo nellÕAfrica 
subsahariana. In Alessandro Bausani & Biancamaria Scarcia Amoretti (Eds.), Il mondo 
islamico tra interazione e acculturazione (pp. 67-76). Roma: Istituto di Studi Islamici.
Cardona, Giorgio R., & Rossi, Adriano V. (1981). LÕarabo oggi: Teoria e prassi della sua 
descrizione linguistica. In Alessandro Bausani & Biancamaria Scarcia Amoretti (Eds.), Il 
mondo islamico tra interazione e acculturazione (pp. 21-36). Roma: Istituto di Studi 
Islamici.
Carter, Michael G. (Ed.). (1981a).  Arab Linguistics:  An Introductory Classical Text with 
Translation and Notes. Amsterdam:   Benjamins.
Carter, Michael G. (1981b). The use of proper names as a testing device in SibawayhiÕs 
Kitab. Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 345-56.
Carter, Michael G. (1985a). The Term Sabab in Arabic Grammar. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 15, 53-66.
Carter, Michael G. (1985b). When Did the Arabic Word ÒNahwÓ First Come to Denote 
Grammar? Language and Communication:  An Interdisciplinary Journal, 5(4), 265-272.
Carter, Michael G. (1990). Qadi, Qadi, Qad: Which Is the Odd Man Out?. Proc. of 2nd 
Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May1987. In Kees 
Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 73-
90). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Carter, Michael G., & Versteegh, Kees (1990). Studies in the History of Arabic Grammer 
II. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company.  
Cassar-Pullicino, J. (1986). Some Parallels between Maltese and Arabic Folklore. Acta 
Ethnographica Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae, 34(1-4), 143-175.
Cassels, David A. (1986). Near-rhyme and its occurrence in the QurÕan. Journal of Semitic 
Studies, 28(2), 303-10.
Cassola, Arnold (1989a). Anthony BurgessÕs MF:  The Mediterranean BAckground to a 
Caribbean Island. Journal of Maltese Studies, 19-20(1989-1990), 27-33.
Cassola, Arnold (1989b). Voci maltesi obsolete e rare di origine italiana nelle Regole per la 
lingua maltese. Archivio Glottologico Italiano, 74(2), 201-204.
Caton, Steven C. (1991). Diglossia in North Yemen: A Case of Competing Linguistic 
Communities. Southwest Journal of Linguistics, 10(1), 143-159.
Caubet, Dominique (1983). Quantification, Negation, Interrogation:  less emplois de la 
particule si en arabe marocain. Arabica, XXX(3), 227-245.
Caubet, Dominique (1984). A le recherche dÕun invariant:  les emplois de la particule si en 
arabe marocain. In Operations de determination II (pp. 33-56). Paris: University of Paris.
Caubet, Dominique (1985). Language bebe en marocain. Communication faite au 
G.L.E.C.S., Avril 85, 73-106.
Caubet, Dominique (1985-1986). Systemes aspecto-temporels en arabe maghrebin. MAS-
GELLAS, 1985-86, 97-127.
Caubet, Dominique (1986). Les deux parfaits en arabe marocain. In Aspects, Modalite:  
Progblemes de Categorisation Grammaticale (pp. 71-102). Paris: University of Paris.
Caubet, Dominique (1987). Passif et Transitivite:  Etude comparative de lÕanglais et de 
lÕarabe marocain. In La Transitivite (pp. 109-126). Universite de Saint-Etienne.
Caubet, Dominique (1989). The three values of the active participles in Moroccan Arabic. 
In Proceedings of the 1989 International Conference on Europe and the Middle East,  (pp. 
346-349). University of Durham: 
Caubet, Dominique (1991a). The active participle as a means to renew the aspectual 
system:  a comparative study in several dialects of Arabic. In Alan Kaye (Eds.), Semitic 
Studies in Honor of Wolf Leslau (pp. 209-224). 
Caubet, Dominique (1991b). Modalite et Modalisation:  Rapport. In C. Russier,H. Stoffel, 
& D. Veornique (Eds.), Modalisations en Langue Etrangere (pp. 9-15). Publcations d 
lÕUniversite de Provence.
Caubet, Dominique (1992a). Deixis, aspect et modalite:  les particules ha- et ra en arabe 
Marocain. La Deixis, Juin 1990, 139-149.
Caubet, Dominque (1992b). Pour une approche transctegorielle:  les emplois de la particule 
gae en arabe marocain. La Theorie dÕAntoine Culioli, Ouvertures et incidences, 145-159.
Caubet, Dominique (1993). LÕarabe Marocain.  
Caubet-Caron, Dominique (1992). Deixis, aspect et modalite:  Les Particules ÔhaÕ et ÔraÕ en 
arabe morocain.  Colloque en Sorbonne. In Mary-Annick Morel & Laurent Danon-Boileau 
(Eds.), La Deixis (pp. 139-149). Paris: PU de France.
Chahristan, Kamil (1991) Aspects of Phrases and Clauses in Syrian within the Framework 
of Head-Driven Phrase Structure Grammar. Ph.D., University College of North Wales 
(United Kingdom).
Charette, Monik (1991). Conditions on Phonological Government. Cambridge: Cambridge 
University Press.  
Chemski, Zhor Ben (1985). The Native Language Up Against the Outside:  The Case of 
North African Children. Mediterranean Peoples, 33(Oct-Dec), 127-138.
Chetverukhin, A.S. (1990). The Egyptian realization of two Afro-Asian deictic-relative 
morphemes. Voprosy Yazykoznaniya, 39(2), 91-101.
Chiadmi, D.,Najim, M.,Ouadou, M., & Rajouani, A. (1989). On lexical stress in Arabic, 
LEESA, FacultŽ des Sciences, Rabat, Morocco. Journal Acoustique, 2(2), 171-76.
Chipman, Harold H., & Di Francavilla, Marhgerita Imperiali (1989). His or Hers? How 
Young English and Algerian Arabic-Speaking Children Understand Third Person 
Possessive Pronouns in Object Positions. Folia Linguistica, 23(1-2), 157-180.
Cho, Young-mee Yu (1989). On the principle of similarity in consonantal assimilation. 
Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society, 25(1), 14-26.
Choukroun, Georgette B. (1992). Du comportement des parasynthemes en judeo-arabe de 
Fes. La Linguistique:  Revue de la Societe Inernationale de Linguistique Fonctionnelle, 
28(no. 1, 1992), 101-120.
Choumet, Michel (1986). Interrogeons le Coran a propos de la priere rituelle ÔAs-Slat. 
Revue des Etudes Islamiques, 54, 77-84.
Churchyard, Henry (1993). Early Arabic siin  and siin in Light of the Proto-Semitic 
Fricative-lateral Hypothesis. In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics, V (pp. 313-342). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Cifoletti, Guido (1979a). Influssi DellÕitaliano nei Dialetti Arabi Orientali. Atti del Sodalizio 
Glottologico Milanese (ASGM), 21, 71-73.
Cifoletti, Guido (1979b). The Word Fantasia in Mediterranean Languages. Incontri 
Linguistici, 5, 139-145.
Cifoletti, Guido (1992). Un esempio di applicazione della quarta regola di Trubeckoj. 
Incontri Linguistici, 15, 137-139.
Clark, Mark A.,Losoff, Ann,McCracken, Margaret Dickenson, & Still, JoAnn (1981). 
Gender Perception in Arabic and English. Language Learning, 31(1), 159-169.
Clarke, Mark A.,Losoff, Ann,McCracken, Margaret Dickenson, & Rood, David S. 
(1984). Linguistic Relativity and Sex/Gender Studies:  Epistemological and Methodological 
Consideration. Language Learning, 34(2), 47-67.
Cohen, David (1981). Historical and sociolinguistic observations on the Arab speech of 
Jews in the Maghreb. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 30, 91-105.
Cole, Clifford (1986). The singuist. The Linguist, 25(1), 22-23.
Colomer, Gilbert (1982). Lexique francais-arabe: Contenant le vocabulaire des mots les 
plus usuels employes dans la conversation courante au Maghreb: Precede de lÕexpose des 
regles elementaires de la grammaire. Niort: Ed. du Terroire.  
Comrie , Bernard (1982). Syntactic-morphological discrepancies in Maltese sentence 
structure. Communication and Cognition, 15(3-4), 281-306.
Comrie, Bernard (1980). The Sun Letters in Maltese: Between Morphophonemics and 
Phonetics. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 23-37.
Comrie, Bernard (1983). Syntactic-Morphological Discrepancies in Maltese Sentence 
Structure. In Liliane Tasmowski & Dominique Willems (Eds.), Problems in Syntax (pp. 3-
28). New York: Ghent: Plenum.
Comrie, Bernard (1986a). The Maltese Pharyngeal. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und  Kommunikationsforschung, 39(2), 12-18.
Comrie, Bernard (1986b). The possessive predicate in North African vernacular Arabic. In 
The Fergusonian Impact (pp. 197-210). 
Comrie, Bernard (1991). On the Importance of Arabic for General Linguistic Theory.  
Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira 
Eid (Eds.), Perpsectives on Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 3-30). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Comrie, Bernard, & Eid, Mushira (Ed.). (1991).  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics III. 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia:   John Benjamins.
Cook, Vivian J. (1975). Strategies in the comprehension of relative clause. Language and 
Speech, 18(3), 204-212.
Cooke, Miriam (1983). Ibn Khaldun and language:from linguistic habit to philological 
craft. Journal of Asian and African Studies, 18(3-4), 179-88.
Cooper, Robert L. (1979). The Acquisition of Complex English Structures by Adult Native 
Speakers of Arabic and Hebrew. Language Learning, 29(2), 255-275.
Corriente, Federico (1980a). Notas de lexicologia hispanoarabe. Vox Romanica: Annales 
Helvetici Explorandis Linguis Romanicis Destinati, 39, 183-210.
Corriente, Federico (1980b). Notes on Hispano-Arabic Lexicology. Vox Romanica, 39, 
183-210.
Corriente, F. (1981). Notas de lexicologia hispano-arabe. Awraq (Madrid), 4, 5-30.
Corriente, Federico (1983). The Mozarabic-Hispano-Arabic series adalah, adaqal, adass, . 
. . and the Castilian preposition hasta. Zeitschrift fur romanische Philologie, 99(1-2), 29-
32.
Corriente, Federico (1985). Apostillas de lexicografia hispano-arabe. In Actas de las II 
Jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica (1980) (pp. 119-162). Madrid: Inst. Hispano-Arabe de 
Cultura.
Corriente, Federico (1994). Current State of Research in the Field of Andalusi Arabic: 
Achievements and prospects. In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic 
Linguistics (pp. 7-16). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Corvetto, Intes Loi (1982). The Intonation of Syrian Arabic. Lingua E Stile, 17(3), 371-
393.
Coulmas, Florian (1989). Language Adaptation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.  
Cowan , William (1981). Arabic grammatical terminology in Pedro de Alcala. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 357-63.
Cowan, William (1981). On the origin of -s- in Spanish hasta. The Canadian Journal of 
Linguistics, 26(2), 223-6.
Craddock, Jerry R. (1988). The Diphthong /ay/ - /ey/ in Toledan Mozarabic. Vox 
Romanica, 47, 175-179.
Crevatin, Franco (1984). ÔScrittura sulla sabbiaÕ in Somalia. Incontri Linguistici, 9, 167-
176.
Cukor-Avila, Patricia (1988). The Effect of Accent on Speech and Personality Judgements. 
PALM, 3(2), 1-20.
Cunningham, Donald J., & Tel, Shadia A. (1984). The Independence/Interdependence of 
Knowledge in the Bilingual Memory. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 
3.1, 1-17.
Cuq, Jean-Pierre (1986). LÕExpression de lÕhypothese: Enquete en milieu scolaire 
marocain. Presence Francophone: Revue Internationale de Langue et de Litterature, 28, 
119-129.
Cuq, Jean-Pierre (1988). ÔInterferenceÕ? Diagonales, 8, 32-33.
Cuq, Jean-Pierre (1991). Exprimer lÕhypothese en francais: Un Changement de perspective 
linguistique pour les eleves marocains. LÕ Information Grammaticale, 51, 47-49.
Daher, Nazih Y. (1983). Goals, objectives, and testing in Arabic: where do we go from 
here? Al-ÔArabiyya, 16(1-2), 97-107.
Daher, Nazih Y. (1987a). Al-JuraniÕs ÔRegentsÕ and TodayÕs Linguistic Analysis. 
International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 4.2, 49-62.
Daher, N.Y. (1987b). Arabic sociolinguistics:  state of the art. Al-ÔArabiyya, 20(1-2), 125-
160.
Daher, Nazih Y. (1988). What is happening to a Lebanese dialect in Cleveland, Ohio: 
language attrition in progress. Al-ÔArabiyya, 21(1-2), 3-18.
Daher, Nazih Y. (1992). A Lebanese Dialect in Cleveland:  Language Attrition in Progress. 
In Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 25-35). Detroit: Wayne 
State University Press.
Dahiyat, Eid (1988). The Philistine Deity Dagon:  The Semitic Origin and Two Possible 
Derivations. Studia Anglica Posnaniensia, 20, 213-216.
Dahl, Osten, & Talmoudi, Fathi (1979). Qad and Laqad: Tense/Aspect and Pragmatics in 
Arabic. In Fifth Scandinavian Conference of Linguistics,  (pp. 51-68). Frostavallen: 
Almqvist and Wiksell.
Dana, Joseph (1983). Some Spelling Mistakes in Hebrew Compositions by Arabic-
Speaking Non-Jews in Israel Today. Jewish Language Review, 3, 47-49.
Dana, J. (1988). Recent Problems in Hebrew-Arabic and Arabic-Hebrew Lexicography. A 
Journal for the Study of the Hebrew  Language and Cognate Subjects, 52, 94-105.
Danchev, Andrei (1983). Contrastive linguistics in Bulgaria. Jyvaskla Cross-Language 
Studies, 9, 39-63.
Danecki, Janusz (1990a). Al-MubarradÕs Place in the History of Arabic Grammar. In 
Hans-Josef Niederehe & Konrad Koerner (Eds.), History and Historiography of 
Linguistics:  Papers from the Fourth International Conference on the History of the 
Language Sciences (pp. 135-146). Amsterdam: BEnjamins.
Danecki, Janusz (1990b). The Phonetical Theory of Mubarrad. Proc. of 2nd Symposium 
on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & 
Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 91-99). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Daoud, Mohamed (1991) The Processing of EST Discourse: Arabic and French Native 
SpeakersÕ Recognition of Rhetorical Relationships in Engineering Texts. Ph.D., University 
of California, Los Angeles.
Darke, Diana (1985). Arabic:  unifying factor of the Islamic world. Language Monthly, 25, 
16-17.
Davies, Eirlys E. (1987). A constrastive approach to the analysis of politeness formulas. 
Applied Linguistics, 8(1), 75-88.
Davies, Eirlys E., & Bentahila, Abdelali (1989). Familiar and Less Familiar Metaphors:  
An Analysis of Interpretations in Two Languages. Language and Communication, 9(1), 
49-68.
Davies, Humphrey Taman (1981) Seventeenth-Century Egyptian Arabic: A Profile of the 
Colloquial Material in Yusuf al-SirbiniÕs Hazz al-Quhuf fi. Ph.D., University of California, 
Berkeley.
Davis, Laurence M. (1984a). The pharyngeals in Hebrew: linguistic change in apparent 
time. Folia Linguistics Historica, 5(1), 25-32.
Davis, Stuart (1984b). Some implication of onset-coda constraints for syllable phonology. 
Papers form the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society, 20, 46-51.
Davis, Stuart (1988). Syllable onsets as a factor in stress rules. Phonology, 5, 1-19.
Davis, Stuart (1990). An Argument for the Underspecification of [Coronal] in English. 
Linguistic Inquiry, 21(2), 301-306.
Davis, Stuart (1991). On the phonological analysis of emphasis in two modern Arabic 
dialects. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 8.2, 1-20.
Davis, Stuart (1992). Pharyngealization in Palestinian Arabic:  Implications for feature 
theory. In West Coast Conference of Formal Linguistics 11,  . 
Davis, Stuart (1993). Arabic Pharyngealization and Phonological Features. In Mushira Eid 
& Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V (pp. 149-162). Amsterdam & 
Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Davison, Alice (1980). Peculiar Passives. Language, 56(1), 42-66.
De Bot, Kees, & Van Montfort, Rene (1988). ÒCue-ValidityÓ in Dutch as a First and 
Second Language. Interdisciplinair Tijdschrift voor Taal- & Tekstwetenschap, 8(2), 111-
120.
De Boysson-Bardies, Benedicte (1982). Do babies babble in their maternal language? La 
Recherche, 13(129), 102-4.
De Francis, John (1984). Digraphia. Word, 35(1), 59-66.
De Gorog, Ralph (1981). The application of onomasiology to synonymy, word formation, 
and etymology. Word, 32(2), 99-108.
De Marco, Barabara (1988). The Sounds of Change:  Arabic Linguistic Influences in 
Sicily. Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics, 94-101.
Decsy, Gyula (Ed.). (1986).  List of the languages of the world in decreasing order of the 
speaker numbers with phyletic and geographic identificationa. Bloomington, IN:   
Eurolingua.
Deloche, Gerard, & Seron, Xavier (1985). Syntactical Knowledge in a Case of 
Agrammatism:  Evidence from Transcoding Roman and Arabic Numerals. Brain and 
Language, 25(2), 234-245.
DeMarco, Barbara (1988). The sounds of change:  Arabic linguistic influences in Sicily. 
Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics, 94-101.
Demidova, G.M., & RedÕkin, O.I. (1989). Modification of Vocal Phonemes in Semitic 
Languages as a Result of Interaction of Vowels and Gutteral Consonants. Vestnik 
Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazkoznanie-literaturoveden, 44(3(2)), 60-68.
DeMiller, A.L. (1988). Syntax and semantics of the Form II Modern Standard Arabic verb. 
Al-ÔArabiyya, 21(1-2), 19-50.
Deprez, Viviane and Vinet, Marie-Therese (1992). Une Structure predicative sans copule. 
Revue Quebecoise de Linguistique, 22(1), 11-44.
Derbal, Mongi, & Tamine, Jean Pierre (1984). French Acquisition by Adults in a Bilingual 
Environment. Le Francais dans le Monde, 24(189), 46-49.
Deulofeu, Jose (1986). Sur quelques procedes de hierarchisation de lÕinformation dans des 
recits dÕapprenants marocains en milieu naturel: Pour une conception souple des rapports 
entre phenomenes de micro et de macro thematisation. In Alain Giacomi & Daniel 
Veronique (Eds.), Acquisition dÕune langue etrangere: Perspectives et recherches (pp. 262-
283). Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Deulofeu, Jose, & Veronique, Daniel (1986). Genese des interlangues et etude du francais 
parle: A propos de lÕacquisition du francais par des adultes marocains. In Travaux, IV: 
Genese des langues et du langage (pp. 101-130). Aix-en-Provence:  Univ. de Provence.
Devenyi, Kinga (1990a). Incongruity in Coordination:  The 177th Aya of Surat al-Baqara. 
Act Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae (AOASH), 44(3), 381-388.
Devenyi, Kinga (1990b). On FarraÕs Linguistic Methods in His Work MaÔani al-QurÕan. 
Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In 
Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar 
(pp. 101-110). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Diab, Turki (1990). Pedagogical Lexicography: A Case Study of Arab Nurses as 
Dictionary Users. Tubingen: Niemeyer.  
Diaz Garcia, Amador (1981). Estudio filologico de una carta en arabe dialectal hispanico. 
In Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica: 1978. (pp. 613-617). Madrid: Inst. 
Hispano-Arabe de Cultura.
Dichy, Joseph (1990). Grammatologie de lÕarabe, I: Les Sens du mot harf ou le labyrinthe 
dÕune evidence. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. ofArabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 
Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History 
of Arabic Grammar (pp. 111-128). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Dickins, James (1989) Extended Axiomatic Functionalism: A Contrastive Assessment with 
Application to Aspects of Arabic. Ph.D., Heriot-Watt University (United Kingdom).
Diem, Werner (1971). Uber eine Einfuhrung in die Europaische Sprachwissenschaft auf 
Arabisch. Die Welt des Islams, 13(1971), 11-19.
Diem, Werner (1980). Die genealogische Stellung des Arabischen in den semitischen 
Sprachen: Ein ungelostes Problem der Semitistik. Anton Spitaler zum siebzigsten 
Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. In Werner Diem & Stefan Wild (Eds.), Studien 
aus Arabistik und Semitistik (pp. 65-85). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Diem, Werner (1981). Secondary literature on Native Arabic grammar works. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 431-86.
Diem, Werner (1985). Die monophthongisierumg der diphthonge ay und aw im fruhen 
neuarabisch. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 14, 76-8.
Diem, Werner (1987a). A controversial passage: APHM 47  (Eine umstrittene Stelle:  
APHM 47). Zeitschrift fur arabische Linguistik, 16, 120-2.
Diem, Werner (1987b). On the historical ordering of the inner passive in contemporary 
arabic dialects. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 17, 91-2.
Diem, Werner, & Wild, Stephan (1980). Studien aus Arabisitk und Semitistik. Wiesbaden: 
Harrassowitz.  
Ditters, E. (1984). Extended affix grammars and modern Arabic syntax. CCE: Compte-
rendu, 42-44, I-V.
Ditters, Everhard (1985). The structure of the masdar-noun phrase according to Abu 
Hayyan alÕAndalusi. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 15, 67-79.
Ditters, Everhard (1986). An Extended Affix Grammar for the Noun Phrase in Modern 
Standard Arabic. In Jan Aarts & Willem Meijs (Eds.), Corpus Linguistics, II:  New 
Studies in the Analysis and Exploration of Computer Corpora (pp. 47-78). Amsterdam: 
Rodopi.
Ditters, E. (1987). ASCAMSA: a system for the automated syntactic analysis of modern 
standard Arabic. In Workshop on Arabic Morphology, Linguistic Institute, July 15/22/29 . 
Stanford University: 
Ditters, E. (1989). ASCAMSA - a system for the automated syntactic analysis of modern 
standard Arabic. In A. Farghali & J. McCarthy (Eds.), Arabic Morphology 
Ditters, Everhard (1990a). Arabic Corpus Linguistics in Past and Present.  Proc. of 2nd 
Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar. In Kees Versteegh & Michael Carter (Eds.), 
Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, II (pp. 129-141). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Ditters, E. (1990b). Current bibliography on computer applications and Arabic. Processing 
Arabic, Report 5, 1-109.
Ditters, E. (1990c). Descriptive tools for the automated syntactic processing of natural 
langauge: the case of Arabic Paper. In 2nd International Conference of the Linguistic 
Society of Morocco,  . Rabat, Oct. 11-14: 
Ditters, E. (1991a). Arabic. In I Lancashire (Eds.), Humanities Computing Yearbook 
1989-90 (pp. 285-91). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Ditters, E. (1991b). A modern standard Arabic sentence grammar. Bulletin dÕƒtudes 
Orientales XLIII, Damas: IFEAD, 197-236.
Ditters, E. (1992). A Formal Approach to Arabic Syntax: the Noun Phrase and the Verb 
Phrase. Amsterdam: Rodopi.  
Ditters, E., & Oostdijk, N. (1987). Processing Arabic. In TCMO, Nijmegen University, 
PO Box 9103, HD Nijmegen, Holland: Ditters and Oostdijk.
Djite, Paulin G. (1992). The Arabization of Algeria: Linguistic and Sociopolitical 
Motivations. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 98, 15-28.
Dobrisan, Nicolae (1984). Equivalents of Privative Prefixes in Arabic. Revue Roumaine de 
Linguistique, 29(5), 427-437.
Dobrisan, Nicolae (1985). Tendencies in the Verbal System of Contemporary Standard 
Arabic. Revue Roumaine de Linguistique, 30(3), 281-191.
Donald, G. C. W. (1979). Arabic Words in English. TESOL Newsletter, 13(5), 31.
Doniach, N. S. (1982). The Concise Oxford English-Arabic Dictionary of Current Usage. 
New York: Oxford UP.  
Donner, Fred M. (1984). Some early Arabic inscriptions from al-Hanakiyya, Saudi Arabia. 
Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 43(3), 181-208.
Doss, Madiha (1979). The position of the demonstrative da, di in Egyptian Arabic:  A 
diachronic inquiry. Annales Islamologiques, 15, 349-357.
Doss, Madiha (1985). La Norme linguistigue en Egypte: Pratiques et orientations. In 
Seminaire CEDEJ-Institut,  . Cairo, Egypt: 
Doss, Madiha (1987). Further remarks on the use of b-imperfect in spoken Literary Arabic. 
Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 17, 93-5.
Dotan, Aron (1987). From the Beginning of Medieval Hebrew-Arabic Lexicography.  
Proc. of Third International Conf. on History of Language Sciences. In Hans 
Aarsleff,Louis G. Kelly, & Hans-Josef Niederehe (Eds.), Papers in the History of 
Linguistics (pp. 77-84). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Douglas, Dan (1986). From school to university: language policy and performance at the 
University of Khartoum. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 61, 89-112.
Doushaq, Mufeeq H. (1986). An investigation into stylistic errors of Arab students 
learning English for academic purposes. English for Specific Purposes, 5(1), 27-39.
Dridi, Houssine (1984). LÕExpression dialectale arabe au Maghreb. Franzosisch Heute, 
15(2), 197-204.
Driessen, Geert (1992). First and Second Language Proficiency: Prospects for Turkish and 
Moroccan Children in the Netherlands. Language, Culture, and Curriculum, 5(1), 23-40.
Drozdik, Ladislav (1981). Semantic Aspects of Lexical Borrowing in Arabic. Asian & Afr. 
Studies (Bratislava)., 17, 187-197.
Drozdik, Ladislav (1983). Descriptive Terms in the Lexicographical Treatment of Modern 
Written Arabic. Graecolatina et Orientalia, 15-16, 97-114.
Drozdik, Ladislav (1985). Structural and Lexical Variation of Descriptive Terms in the 
Lexicon of Modern Written Arabic. GeO, 27-28, 89-107.
Ducatez, Guy, & Ducatez, J. (1980). Formation of color and luminosity denominations in 
Classical and Pre-classical Arabic:  A periodization attempt according to a linguistic and 
anthropological approach. Mediterranean Peoples, 10, 139-72.
Duchesne-Guillemin, Jacques (1986). Zwei Corrigenda. In Rudiger Schmitt & Prods 
Oktor Skjaervo (Eds.), Studia Grammatica Iranica: Festschrift fur Helmut Humbach (pp. 
45-46). Munich: R.Kitzinger.
Durst, R. K. (1981). Power and Solidarity - Attitudes of Western Pennsylvanians Toward 
Arabic-Accented and Spanish-Accented Speech. TESOL Quarterly, 15(4), 477.
Dweik, Bader S. (1992). Lebanese Christians in Buffalo:  Language Maintenance and 
Language Shift. In Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 100-
118). Detroit: Wayne State University Press.
Ebert, Gerlinde, & Ebert, Hans-Georg (1987). Zu einigen Aspekten der Sprachsituation 
und politik in der SLAVJ (Libyen) unter besonderer Berucksichtigung des Italienischen. 
Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Serachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 40(3), 381-
390.
Edwards, Malcolm (1987). The AUX Hypothesis and Egyptian Arabic. Polyglot, 8(1), 
F1-G7.
Ehmedov, Meherrem (1989). Stable Verbal Compositions and Their Classification 
According to the Nominal ComponentÕs Origin. Izvestiya Akademii Nauk 
Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, Yazyk i Iskusstvo, 3, 40-43.
Eid, Mushira (1982). The non-randomness of diglossic variation in Arabic. Glossa: An 
International Journal of Linguistics, 16, 54-84.
Eid, Mushira (1983a). The copula function of pronouns. Lingua: International Review of 
General Linguistics, 59(2-3), 197-207.
Eid, Mushira (1983b). On the communicative function of subject pronouns in Arabic. 
Journal of Linguistics, 19(2), 287-303.
Eid, Mushira (1984a). The Favored Interpretation of Missing Subjects in Arabic. In 
Linguistic Society of America Meeting,  . 
Eid, Mushira (1984b). Syntactic Aspects of Arabic-English Code-Switching. Paper 
presented at MESA Meeting, San Francisco.
Eid, Mushira (1985a). Linguistic Typology and the Study of Arabic Dialects. Paper 
presented at MESA Meeting, New Orleans.
Eid, Mushira (1985b). On the function of pronouns in Egyptian Arabic. In Jessica R. 
Wirth (Eds.), Beyond the Sentence: Discourse and Sentential Form (pp. 31-44). Ann 
Arbor, MI: Karoma Publications.
Eid, Mushira (1987a). Arabic Linguistics: The Current Scene. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 3-38). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Eid, Mushira (1987b). Arabic theoretical linguistics: the seventies and beyond. Al-
ÔArabiyya, 20(1-2), 161-198.
Eid, Mushira (1988). Principles for Code-Switching between Standard and Egyptian 
Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 21, 51-80.
Eid, Mushira (1990a). Arabic Linguistics:  The Current Scene.  Papers from First Annual 
Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics, I (pp. 3-37). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Eid, Mushira (Ed.). (1990b).  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics I. Amsterdam & 
Philadelphia:   John Benjamins.
Eid, Mushira (1991). Verbless Sentences in Arabic and Hebrew.  Papers from 3rd Annual 
Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives 
on Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 31-61). Amsterdam: BEnjamins.
Eid, Mushira (1992a). Directionality in Arabic-English Code-Switching. In Aleya Rouchdy 
(Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 50-71). Detroit: Wayne State University 
Press.
Eid, Mushira (1992b). Pronounces, Questions, and Agreement. In E. Broselow,Mushira 
Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives  on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 107-142). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Eid, Mushira,Cantarino, Vincente, & Walters, Keith (Ed.). (1994).  Perspectives on 
Arabic Lingusitics VI : Papers from the sixth annual symposium on Arabic Lingusitics. 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia:   John Benjamins.
Eid, Mushira, & McCarthy, John (Ed.). (1990a).  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics II. 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia:   John Benjamins.
Eid, Mushira, & McCarthy, John (Ed.). (1990b).  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II.  
Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics (series no:  72 ed.). 
Amsterdam:   Benjamins.
Eisele, John (1988) The Syntax and Semantics of Tense, Aspect and Time Reference in 
Cairene Colloquial Arabic. Ph.D., University of Chicago.
Eisele, John (1990a). Aspectual Classification of Verbs in Cairene Arabic. In Mushira Eid 
& John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 192-233). Amsterdam: 
John Benjamins.
Eisele, J. (1990b). Time reference and formal aspect in Cairene Arabic. In Mushira Eid 
(Eds.), New Perspective in Arabic Linguistics Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Eisele, John (1992). Cairene Arabic Auxiliaries and the Category AUX. In E. 
Broselow,Mushira Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV 
(pp. 143-164). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Eisele, J.C. (1987). Arabic dialectology:  a review of recent literature. Al-ÔArabiyya, 20(1-
2), 199-270.
Eisele, John C. (1990). Time Reference, Tense, and Formal Aspect in Cairene Arabic. 
Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives 
on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 173-212). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Eksell Harning, Kerstin (1980). The Analytic Genitive in the Modern Arabic Dialects. 
Goteborg: Acta Univ. Gothoburgensis.  
Eksell, Kerstin (1984). On the development of d-particles as genitive exponents in Arabic 
dialects. Acta Orientalia (Societates Orientales Danica, Fennica, Norvegica, Svecica), 45, 
21-42.
El-Amrani, Hafida (1991). Analyse syntaxique des Ôarrets et retoursÕ an arabe marocain. 
Langues et Linguistique, 17, 39-67.
El-Attar, Soliman (1985). El bilinguismo en Al-Andaluz (Espana musulmana) y sus huellas 
en el castellano: Una vision sociolinguistica. Nueva Revista del Pacifico, 27-28, 23-44.
El-Badry, Nawal (1986). The Development of the Bilingual English-Arabic Dictionary 
from the Middle of the Nineteenth Century to the Present. In R. R. K. Hartmann (Eds.), 
The History of Lexicography: Papers from The Dictionary Research Centre Seminar at 
Exeter, March1986 (pp. 57-63). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
El-Badry, Nawal (1990). Arabic Lexicography in Northern Africa, with Special Reference 
to Egypt.  Progress Reports from Dictionary Research Centre Workshop Exeter. In 
Richard R. K. Hartmann (Eds.), Lexicography in Africa (pp. 36-43). Exeter: U of Exeter 
Press.
El-Bakry, Fathia Abdu (1990) Active Participle in Colloquial Egyptian Arabic: A 
Functional Analysis. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
El-Barouki, Foazi Youssef (1985) A culturally based analysis of selected idiomatic 
expressions in Syriac Arabic. Ph.D., University of San Francisco.
El-Bawab, M. (1989). Arabic morpho-syntax for computer. ProcKuw2, 24-46.
El-Dalee, Mohamed Saleh (1984) The Feature of Retraction in Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana 
University.
El-Ezabi, Yehia A. (1967). The Sectors of Written Arabic. In Edward L. Jr. Blansitt 
(Eds.), Report of the Eighteenth Annual Round Table Meeting on Linguistics and 
Language Studies (pp. 175-1809). Washngton, DC: Georgetown UP.
El-Halees, Yousef (1985). The role of F1 in the place-of-articulation distinction in Arabic. 
Journal of Phonetics, 13(3), 287-298.
El-Halees, Y. (1989). Experimental-Study of the Phonetic Feature of Emphasis in Arabic. 
Folia Phoniatrica, 41(4-5), 165-166.
El-Halees, Yousef A. (1987). F2 and Back Articulations in Arabic. Journal of the College 
of Arts, King Saud University, 14(1), 21-44.
El-Hassan, Shahir (1988). The Intonation of Questions in English and Arabic. Papers and 
Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 22, 97-108.
El-Hassan, Shahir A. (1987). Aspectual distinctions in English and written Arabic. 
International Review of Applied Linguistics in Language Teaching, 25(2), 131-8.
El-Khafaifi, Hussein Mabrok (1985) The role of the Cairo Academy in coining Arabic 
scientific terminology:  an historical and linguistic evaluation. Ph.D., University of Utah.
El-Mouloudi, Aziz Bensmaali (1986) Arabic Language Planning:  The Case of Lexical 
Modernization. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
El-Nekishbendy, Abdullatif Muhammed Ali (1990) Language Factors That May Cause 
Difficulties for American Adults Learning Arabic. Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh.
El-Noory, Atteya Yussif (1985). Egyptian Arabic and English:  nativization process. 
Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9, 100-4.
El-Sayed, Ali M. (1989). Politeness Formulas in English and Arabic: a Contrastive Study. 
Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics, 15(2), 96-113.
El-Sayed, Dawood H. (1984). Notes on the Arabization of the terminology of modern 
linguistics. LEXeter Ô83, 333-8.
El-Sayegh, S. (1989). A new connectionist computational approach as applied to Arabic 
linguistics. ProcKuw2, 578-595.
El-Shiyab, Said (1992) The Structure of Argumentation in Arabic:  Editorials as a Case 
Study. Ph.D., Heriot-Watt University.
El-Solami-Mewis, Catherine (1987). Zur Rolle und Behandlung arabischer Fremdworter 
im Somali. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 
40(5), 676-683.
El-Tikaina, Ibrahim H. (1982) A Lexical Approach to the Arabic Verb Conjugations. 
Ph.D., University of Washington.
El-Yasin, Mohammed (1982) Voice Phenomena in Jordanian Arabic. Ph.D., Cornell 
University.
El-Yasin, Mohammed (1985). Basic word order in Classical Arabic and Jordanian Arabic. 
Lingua, 65, 107-122.
Elamrani-Jamal, A. (1982). Grammaire et logique dÕapres le philosophe arabe chretien 
Yahya ibn ÔAdi. , 29(1), 1-15.
Elamrani-Jamal, Abdelali (1985). The question of name and named [al-ism wa-l-
musamma] in dialectics and grammar:  On a text of Al-Batalyusi. Journal of Arabic 
Lingusitics, 15, 80-93.
Elamrani-Jamal, Abdelali (1990a). Le Patrimoine linguistique arabe ancien: Problemes de 
relecture. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 
May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic 
Grammar (pp. 143-149). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Elamrani-Jamal, Abdelali (1990b). Verbe, copule, nom derive (fiÕl, kalima, ism mustaqq) 
dans les commentaires arabes du Peri Hermeneias dÕAristote: Avec un texte inedit dÕIbn 
Rusd. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 
1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic 
Grammar (pp. 151-164). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Elbaz, Simone (1981). La Subordination en arabe dÕOujda. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes 
Arabes, 28(June-Sept.), 333-344.
Elbiad, Mohamed (1985) A Sociolinguistics Study of the Arabization Process and Its 
Conditioning Factors in Morroco. Ph.D., State University of New York at Buffalo.
Elbiad, Mohamed (1991). The Role of Some Population Sectors in the Progress of 
Arabization in Morocco. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 87, 27-44.
Eldar, I. (1981). Hidayat Al-Qari:  The Longer Arabic Version:  A Specimen Text. 
Leshonenu, 45(3-4, 1981 April-July), 233-259.
Elgadi, Abdalla Salem (1986) Tripolitanean Arabic Phonology and Morphology:  A 
Generative Approach. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Elgibali, Alaa (1993). Stability and Language Variation in Arabic:  Cairene and Kuwaiti 
Dialects. In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V (pp. 
75-96). Philadelphia & Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Elgibali, Alaa Abdelmoneim (1985) Towards a Sociolinguistic Analysis of Language 
Variation in Arabic: Cairene and Kuwaiti dialects. Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh.
Elimam, Abdou (1986a). Choice of development model and glottopolitics  (Choix de 
modele de developpement et glottopolitique). Languages, 21(83), 75-85.
Elimam, Abdou (1986b). Choix de modeles de developpement et glottopolitique. 
Langages, 83, 75-85.
Eliman, A. (1988). A Contrastive Approach to Interlanguage: Study of the Particle ka in 
Creole and Moroccan Arabic. Contrastes, supplement A-8, 175-206.
Elliott, Marietta NasrÕs (1986). NasrÕs development as a writer in his second language:  the 
first six months. Australian Review of Applied Linguistics, 9(2), 120-153.
Elshershabi, Muhammad Attia Hasan (1988) Substitution and Lexical Cohesion in the 
Editorial Argumentative Discourse of Arabic and American English. Ph.D., University of 
South Carolina.
Elter, Istvan (1981). Nehany megjegyzes Ibn Hayyannak a magyarlok 942. evi 
spanyolorszagi kalandozasarol szolo tudositasahoz. Magyar Nyelv, 4, 413-419.
Emery, Peter G. (1987). Aspects of English-Arabic translation:  a contrastive study. The 
Linguist, 26(2), 62-4.
Emery, Peter G. (1988a) Body-Part Collocations and Idioms in Arabic and English: A 
Contrastive Study. Ph.D., University of Manchester (United Kingdom).
Emery, Peter G. (1988b). Collocation-A Problem in Arabic/English Translation. 
Quinquerime, 11(2), 178-184.
Emery, Peter G. (1988c). Compound Words in Modern Standard Arabic. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics, 19, 32-43.
Emery, Peter G. (1989). Legal Arabic Texts:  Implications for Translation. School Modern 
Languages, 35(1), 1-11.
Emery, Peter G. (1991). Lexical Incongruence in Arabic-English Translation. Babel: 
Revue Internationale de la Traduction, 37, 129-137.
Emordi, Fred I. (1990). The current linguistic situtation in Nigeria:  the place and status of 
the French language. Cahiers de lÕInstitut de Linguistique de Louvain, 16(2-4), 59-76.
Ennaji, Moha (1988). Language Planning in Morocco and Changes in Arabic. International 
Journal of the Sociology of Language, 74, 9-39.
Er-Rayyan, Mohammad Rashad Hamd-Allah (1986) Toward the construction of a temporal 
system for natural language in the light of the data of the Arabic and English languages. 
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Esarey, Gary R. (1987) Factors Affecting the Listening Comprehension and Attitude of 
Native Listeners to the Speech of Arabic Learners of English. Ph.D., University of 
Pittsburgh.
Ewan, William G. (1979). Laryngeal Behavior in Speech. Report of the Phonology 
Laboratory, 3(April), 1-93.
Fabri, Ray (1993). Kongruenz und die Grammatik des Maltesischen. Tubingen: Niemeyer.  
Faitelson-Weiser, Silvia, & Blouin, Martine (1986). -i:  Ending and Suffix of Spanish 
Adjectives. Langues et Linguistique, 12, 27-57.
Fakhri, Ahmed (1984). The use of communicative strategies in narrative discourse:  a case 
study of a learner of Moroccan Arabic as a second language. Language Learning, 34(3), 
15-37.
Fanjul Garcia, Serafin (1981). El ÔhawfiÕ de Tremecen: Aproximacion morfologica y 
tematica. In Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica: 1978. (pp. 661-673). Madrid: 
Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura.
Fanton, M. (1989). Computer analysis of Arabic words. In A. Farghali & J. McCarthy 
(Eds.), Arabic Morphology 
Fareh, Shehdeh Ismail (1988) Paragraph Structure in Arabic and English Expository 
Discourse. Ph.D., University of Kansas.
Farghal, Muhammad (1986). Wh-movement in Arabic. International Journal of Islamic and 
Arabic Studies, 3.2, 69-121.
Farghal, Mohammed (1992). Colloquial Jordanian Arabic Tautologies. Journal of 
Pragmatics:  An Interdisciplinary Monthly of Language Studies, 17(no. 3, March 1992), 
223-240.
Farghal, Mohammed Ali (1986) The Syntax of WH-Questions and Related Matters in 
Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Farghali, Ali (1981) Topics in the Syntax of Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., University of Texas-
Austin.
Farhat, Haytham (1991) Empty Categories in Syrian Arabic. Ph.D., University College of 
North Wales, Bangor (United Kingdom).
Farhat, M. (1989). A framework for modelling Arabic syntax. ProcKuw2, 295 (1-15).
Farley, Anne (1987). The ÔdoubledÕ verb of standard Arabic. In Anna Bosch,Barbara 
Need, & Eric Schiller (Eds.), Parasession on Autosegmental and Metrical Phonology 
Chicago: Chicago Linguistics Society.
Farwaneh, Samira (1988). Well-formed associations in Arabic:  rule or condition. In 
Mushira Eid & John J. McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 120-
142). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Farwaneh, Samira (1990). Well-Formed Associations in Arabic: Rule or Condition?. 
Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid & John 
McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 120-142). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Fayez, Essam Abdel Aziz (1990) SiibawaihÕs Linguistic Analysis of the Diminutive in 
Classical Arabic and Its Subsequent Developments. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Feghali, H. (1990). Arabic Adeni Reader. Wheaton, MD: Dunwoody Press.  
Feghali, H. (1991). Arabic Adeni Textbook. Wheaton, MD: Dunwoody Press.  
FŽghali, Michel, & Cuny, Albert (1924). Du genre grammatical en sŽmitique. Paris: Paul 
Geuthner.  
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1975a). Comparatives and Free Relatives in Arabic. In 
Recherches Linguistique Vincennes::  Publications of Paris-VIII.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1975b). Some Complement Phenomena in Arabic, Lexical 
Grammar, The Complementizer Phrase Hypothesis and the Non-Accessibility Condition. 
In Analyses/Theorie Vincennes:  Publications of Paris VIII.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1981). Theorie lexicale-fonctionnelle: Controle et accord en arabe 
moderne. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(June-Sept.), 299-332.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1984a). Agreement in Arabic, binding and coherence. In M. 
Barlow & C.A. Ferguson (Eds.), Agreement in Natural Language:  Approaches, Theories, 
Descriptions (pp. 107-158). Stanford: Center for the Study of Language and Information.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1984b). Note a propos de la ÔdislocationÕ accusative en arabe 
classique: Une Analyse et un point de methode. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 13, 7-
15.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1985). allis:niyya:t wa llugha al arabiyya. Casablanca, Morocco: 
Toboqal Publishing Hs.  
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1987). Anti-Causatives in Arabic, Causativity and Affectedness. 
In Lexicon Project Working Papers Cambridge: MIT Center for Cognitive Science.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1988). Agreement in Arabic, binding and coherence. In Michael 
Barlow & Charles A. Ferguson (Eds.), Agreement in natural language:  approaches, 
theories, descriptions (pp. 107-158). Stanford: Stanford University Center for the Study of 
Language and Information.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1992). Sous-specification, accord et pronoms en arabe. Revue 
Quebecoise de Linguistique, 22(1), 117-144.
Fehri, Abdelkader Fassi (1993). Issues in the Structure of Arabic Clauses and Words;. 
Dordrecht: Kluwer Academic Publishers.  
Fell, Barry (1979). Tamacheq, a Living Dialect of Ancient Libyan. The Epigraphic Society 
Occasional Papers, 6(1), 31-34.
Fellman, Jack (1982a). Maltese: A unique Arabic dialect. Anthropos: International Review 
of Ethnology and Linguistics 77/5-6, 896-7.
Fellman, Jack (1982b). Sociolinguistic similarities between two modern Semitic languages; 
Hebrew and Maltese. Anthropos: International Review of Ethnology and Linguistics, 77(5-
6), 895-6.
Fenk, August, & Fenk, Gertraud (1980). Constancy in short-term memory-Constancy in 
the flow of linguistic information? Zeitschrift fur Experimentelle und Angewandte 
Psychologie, 27(3), 400-14.
Ferguson, Charles (1989). Grammatical agreement in Classical Arabic and the modern 
dialects:  a response to VersteeghÕs pidginization hypothesis. Al-ÔArabiyya, 22(1-2), 5-18.
Ferguson, Charles A. (1983). God-wishes in Syrian Arabic. Mediterranean Language 
Review, 1, 65-83.
Ferguson, Charles A. (1988). Standardization as a Form of Language Spread. Georgetown 
University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics, 119-132.
Ferguson, Charles A. (1990). ÔCome Forth with a Surah Like ItÕ:  Arabic as a Measure of 
Arab Society. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I (pp. 39-51). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Ferrando, Antoni (1989). Les interrelacions linguistiques en la Valencia doscentista: 
Comentaris a les aportacions de Robert I. Burns. Zeitschrift fur Katalanistik: Revista 
dÕEstudis Catalans, 2, 115-129.
Finch, Roger (1984). The ÔEmphaticÕ Consonants in the Semitic Languages. Sophia 
Linguistica, 17, 26-46.
Finch, Roger (1986). Prosodic templates for the sound triliteral verb of Arabic. Sophia 
Linguistica, 20-21, 179-200.
Fiorini, Stanley (1989). A Note on Evidence for ll-dd in Maltese Onomastics. Journal of 
Maltese Studies, 19-20, 24-26.
Fischer, Wolfdietrich (1980a). Der Beitrag der Araber zur Ortsnamengebung im Vorderen 
Orient. In Rudolf Schutzeichel & Franz Tichy (Eds.), Erlanger Ortsnamen-Kolloquium: 
Ortsnamen als Ausdruck von Kultur und Herrschaft (pp. 27-32). Heidelberg: Winter.
Fischer, Wolfdietrich (1980b). Die arabische Pluralbildung. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 5, 70-88.
Fischer, Wolfdietrich (1982). Grundriss der arabischen Philologie, I: Sprachwissenschaft. 
Wiesbaden: Reichert.  
Fischer, Wolfdietrich (1985). The chapter on grammar in the Kitab Mafatih al-culum. 
Zeitschrift fur arabische Linguistik, 15, 94-103.
Fischer, Wolfdietrich, & Jastrow, Otto (Ed.). (1980).  Handbuch der arabischen Dialekte. 
Wiesbaden:   Harrassowitz.
Fishman, Joshua A., & others (Ed.). (1986).  From Phonology to Society. Berlin, 
Germany:   Mouton de Gruyter.
Flege, James Emil (1980). Phonetic approximation in second language acquisition. 
Language Learning 30/1, 117-34.
Flege, James Emil (1987). The instrumental study of L2 speech production:  some 
methodological considerations. Language Learning, 37(2), 285-296.
Flege, James Emil, & Port, Robert (1981). CrossÐlanguage phonetic interference:  Arabic 
to English. Language and Speech, 24(1), 125-146.
Fodor, Istvan, & Hageg, Claude (Ed.). (1983).  Language Reform:  History and Future. 
Hamburg, Germany:   Helmut Buske Verlag Hamburg.
Fokes, Joann,Bond, Z. S., & Steinberg, Marcy (1985). Acquisition of the English Voicing 
Contrast by Arab Children. Language and Speech, 28(1), 81-92.
Forkel, Fritz (1980). Die sprachliche Situation im heutigen Marokko: Eine 
soziolinguistische Untersuchung. Hamburg: no publisher.  
Forneas Besteiro, Jose Maria (1981). Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica. In 
(pp. 45-107). Madrid: Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura.
Forstner, M. (1984). Problemes de traduction de la terminologie juridique de lÕarabe 
moderne. CGE: Compte-rendu, 87.
Fourakis, Marios, & Iverson, Gregory K. (1985). On the acquisition of second language 
timing patterns. Language Learning, 35(4), 431-442.
Fox, Samuel Ethan (1979). Organizational and Creative Rules in Arabic. Papers from the 
Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society, 15, 121-125.
Fox, Samuel Ethan (1982). Autosegmental phonology and Semitic. Papers from the 
Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society, 18, 131-9.
Fradkin, Robert A. (1986) Markedness Theory and the Verb Systems of Russian and 
Arabic: Aspect, Tense, and Mood. Ph.D., Indiana State University.
Fradkin, Robert A. (1991). Marking, Markedness, Person-Gender-Number Patterning in 
the Arabic Tenses and Moods. Folia Linguistica:  Acta Societatis Lingisticae Europaeae, 
(FoLi), 25(3-4), 609-664.
Frantz-Murphy, Gladys (1981a). A comparison of the Arabic and earlier Egyptian contract 
formularies, part I:  the Arabic contracts from Egypt (3rd/9th-5th/11th centuries). Journal 
of Near Eastern Studies, 40(3), 203-25.
Frantz-Murphy, Gladys (1981b). Corrigendum. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 40(4), 
355-6.
Frantz-Murphy, Gladys (1988a). A Comparison of Arabic and Earlier Egyptian Contract 
Formularies, Part III:  The Idiom of Satisfaction. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 47(2), 
105-112.
Frantz-Murphy, Gladys (1988b). A Comparison of Arabic and Earlier Egyptian Contract 
Formularies, Part IV:  Quittance Formulas. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 47(4), 269-
280.
Frantz-Murphy, Gladys (1989). A Comparison of Arabic and Earlier Egyptian Contract 
Formularies, Part V:  Formulaic Evidence. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 48(2), 97-107.
Fraser, Bruce (1982). On the status of speech act strategies. Centrum, 2(1), 5-26.
Frazier, W. (1976) A demonstration of a computer technique for investigating Arabic 
morphology. Ph.D., Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Fre Woldu, Kiros (1984). Evidence of Auditory Similarity between Tigrinya Ejective /t/ 
and Arabic Emphatic /t/. Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 123-138.
Freund, Wolfgang Slim (1988). The German Language in Tunisia.  Myth or Reality? 
IBLA, Revue de lÕInstitut des Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis, 51(1 (161)), 151-162.
Frolova, O. B. (1981a). Ob izuchenii frazeologicheskikh neologizmov v arabskoi presse, 
voznikshikh pod vliianiem perovoda trudov V. I. Lenina. Vestnik Leningradskogo 
Universiteta, 20(Oct.), 50-53.
Frolova, O.B. (1981b). On the study of phraseological neologisms in Arabic press whose 
appearance shows the influence of the translations of LeninÕs works. Vestnik 
Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazyk-literatura, 36(4(20)), 50-3.
Fromm, Wolf-Dietrich (1989). On the Frequency Structure of Arabic. Linguistische 
Studien, 189, 113-124.
Fujihara, Koyo (1989). The Differences Between Processings for Letters and Numerals. 
The Japanese Journal of Psychology, 60(2), 76-82.
Fulei-Szanto, Endre (1989). Az igei predikatum es kategoriai. Nyelvtudomanyi 
Kozlemenyek, 33(2), 181-185.
Fuller, Judith W., & Gundel, Jeanette (1987). TopicÐprominence in interlanguage. 
Language Learning, 37(1), 1-18.


Gaballa, Hassan El-Banna (1986) Case-marking and classical Arabic; a semantic and 
historiographic study. Ph.D., University of Delaware.
Gabr, Rokeya (1986). La Designation de lÕhomme et de la femme dans le Coran: Etude 
statistique. In Methodes quantitatives et informatiques dans lÕetude des textes/Computers in 
Literary and Linguistic Research: En hommage a Charles Muller (pp. 421-431). Geneva: 
Slatkine.
Gai, Amikam (1981). Two Points of Arabic Grammar. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 
28(1981 June-Sept.), 293-298.
Gai, Amikam (1983). The Substantival-Adjectival Plurals of Participles in Arabic. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 10, 79-85.
Galinski, J. (1989). The human reading process in Arabic: toward an experimental 
investigation. Processing Arabic, Report 4, 13-21.
Gallagher, Eugene B. (1985). Medical education in Saudi Arabia: a sociological perspective 
on modernization and language. Journal of Asian and African Studies, 20(1-2), 1-12.
Galmes de Fuentes, Alvaro (1981). The Language and Style of Aljamid-Moorish 
Literature. Neuva Revista de Filologia Hispanica, 30(2), 420-440.
Galmes de Fuentes, Alvaro (1991). Hispanizacion de terminos tecnicos de la poesia 
arabigoandaluza relacionada con la romanica. Boletin de la Real Academia Espanola, 71, 
455-460.
Gamzatov, R.E. (1980). Linguistic development in Daghestan under conditions of far-
advance socialist society. Voprosy yazkoznaniya, 29(3), 123-8.
Garding, Eva,Lindau, Mona,Norlin, Kjell, & Svantesson, Jan-Olof (1986). Final Report: 
Phonetic Analyses of Some Non-European Languages (LUCLA). Working Papers, 29, 
115-138.
Garnica, Olga K., & Herbert, Robert K. (1979). Some Phonological Errors in Second 
Language Learning:  Interference DoesnÕt Tell It All. International Journal of 
Psycholinguistics, 6(2(14)), 5-19.
Garr, W. Randall (1985). Dialect Geography of Syria-Palestine, 1000-586 B.C.E. 
Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.  
Gatje, Helmut (1979). Probleme semantischer Identitat und Diversitat in der arabischen 
Nationalgrammatik. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 3(1979), 7-27.
Gatje, Helmut (1985). Arabische Lexicographie:  Ein Historischer Uberblick. 
Historiographia Linguistica:  International Journal for the History of the Language 
Sciences, 12(1-2), 105-147.
Gatzlaff, Margot (1986a). On the Cultural-Historical Stratification of the Hindi Vocabulary. 
Linguistische Studien, 148, 66-79.
Gatzlaff, Margot (1986b). Zur kulturhistorischen Stratifikation des Hindi-Wortschatzes. 
Linguistischen Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte, 148, 66-79.
Gazagnadou, Didier (1986). Une Precision sur lÕorigine du mot arabe funduq. Studia 
Islamica, 64, 165-167.
Gegov, Khristo (1981). Observations of Bulgarian and Arabic vocalism. Supstavitelno 
Exikoznanie/Contrastive Linguistics, 6(6), 25-9.
Gegov, Khristo (1989). The Bulgarian Velar Consonant /x/ and Three Arabic Fricative 
Consonants. Contrastive Linguistics, 14(2), 21-24.
Gegov, Khristo (1992). Bulgarskata pregradna suglasna /k/ i arabskite pregradni suglasni 
/k/ i /q/. Supostavitelno Ezikoznanie/SopostavitelÕnoe Jazykoznanie/Contrastive 
Linguistics, 17(4), 19-21.
Gehman, Henry Snyder (1982). Arabic Syntax of the Relative Pronoun in Poema de mio 
Cid and Don Quijote. Hispanic Review, 50, 53-60.
Gelder, Geert Jan van (1991). Musawir al-Warraq and the Beginnings of Arabic 
Gastronomic Poetry. Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS), 36(no. 2), 309-327.
Ghaladant, Shaykhu Ahmad SaÕid (1982). Harakat al-lughah al-Õarabiyah wa-adabiha fi 
Nayjiriyah min sanat 1804 ila sanat 1966. Cairo: Dar al-MaÕarif.  
Ghali, M. M. (1983). Pharyngeal Articulation (Especially in Arabic and English). Bulletin 
of the School of Oriental and African Studies-University of London, 46(3), 432.
Ghazali, S. (1983). Elements of Arabic phonetics. Arab School of Sciences and 
Technology: Proceedings, 43-50.
Ghazeli, Salem (1981). La Coarticulation de lÕemphase en arabe. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes 
Arabes, 28(June-Sept.), 251-277.
Ghobrial, Atef Naguib (1993) Discourse Markers in Colloquial Egyptian Arabic: A 
Pragmatic Perspective. Ph.D., Boston University.
Ghowail, Thanaa Ibrahim (1987) The acoustic phonetic study of the two pharyngeals /h;?/ 
and the two laryngeals /?,h/ in Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Ghrib, Esma Maamouri (1983). The introduction of Arabic as a medium of instruction in 
the Tunisian educational system. Al-ÔArabiyya, 16(1-2), 109-130.
Giacomi, Alain (1986). Processus de structuration de lÕenonce en acquisition et interaction. 
In Alain Giacomi & Daniel Veronique (Eds.), Acquisition dÕune Langue Etrangere: 
Perspectives et Recherches (pp. 285-303). Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Giacomi, Alain, & Vion, Robert (1986). Metadiscursive Processes in the Acquisition of a 
Second Language. Studies in Second Lang. Acquisition, 8(3), 355-368.
Giannetti, George, & Hodes, Phyllis (1980). A cooperative bilingual effort in Michigan. 
Foreign Language Annals, 13(2), 93-8.
Giannini, Antonella (1982). The Emphatic Consonants in Arabic. Naples: Istituto Univ. 
Orientale, Seminario di Studi dellÕEuropa Orientale, Laboratorio di Fonetica Sperimentale.  
Gilyanova, L. V. (1988). Perception and Identification of Russian Vowels Produced by 
Arab Speakers. Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazyk-literatura, 43(1 (2)), 
99-101.
Ginesy, Michel, & Lipcey, Andre (1990). Systemes de fautes de lÕetudiant dÕanglais. 
Sigma: Revue de Centre dÕEtudes Linguistiques dÕAix, 14, 193-220.
Givon, T. (1980). The binding hierarchy and the typology of complements. Studies in 
Language, 4(3), 333-77.
Glass, Dagmar (1989). Watan, autan:  Word-Concept-Text. Linquistische Studien, 189, 
99-112.
Glinert, Lewis (1989). A Note on the Morphology of Sequential Counting Forms: The 
Case of Modern Hebrew. Journal of Semitic Studies, 34(1), 179-181.
Glover, Bonnie Carol (1988) The Morphophonology of Muscat Arabic. Ph.D., University 
of California, Los Angelos.
Goetz, Manfred (1980). Bemerkungen zu den Tempora des Althocharabischen. In W. 
Diem & S. Wild (Eds.), Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik (pp. 86-98). 
Goldmann, Ingelore (1989). Interference-Conditioned Errors in Arabic Instruction:  
Presented on a Corpus of Translations of the German Prepostion an into Arabic. 
Linguistische Studien, 189, 141-151.
Goldziher, Ingaz (1994). On the History of Grammer Among the Arabs (Kinga Divinyi 
Tamas Ivanyi, Trans.). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.  
Gordon, David C. (1985). The Arabic Language and National Identity: The Cases of 
Algeria and of Lebanon. In William R. Beer & James E. Jacob (Eds.), Language Policy 
and National Unity (pp. 134-150). Totowa, NJ: Rowman & Allanheld.
Gorska, Elzbieta (1985). Arabic Dictionaries in Anagrammatical Arrangement. Folia 
Orientalia, 23, 161-173.
Gorska, Elzbieta (1990a). The Character of the Heads of Multiattributive Nominal Groups 
and Their Frequency in Modern Newspaper Arabic. Folia Orientalia, 27, 161-171.
Gorska, Elzbieta (1990b). The Process of Compound Lexical Items Formation in Modern 
Written Arabic. Folia Orientalia, 27, 173-184.
Gotz, Manfred (1980). Bemerkungen zu den Tempora des Althocharabischen. Anton 
Spitaler zum siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. In Werner Diem & 
Stefan Wild (Eds.), Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik (pp. 86-98). Wiesbaden: 
Harrassowitz.
GrandÕHenry, Jacques (1981). Les Niveaux de Langue dans la Posie Populaire Arabe du 
Maghreb. In Yoel Arbeitman & Allan R. Bomhard (Eds.), Bono Homini Donum (pp. 651-
658). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
GrandÕHenry, J. (1990). The GrammariansÕ taltala and the Speech of Al-Andalus. Journal 
of Arabic Linguistics, 21, 40-46.
GrandÕHenry, Jacques (1991). Les Variantes de flexion dans les verbes gemines en arabe. 
Folia Orientalia, 28, 99-114.
Grandguillaume, Gilbert (1982a). Language and community in the Maghreb. 
Mediterranean Peoples, 18, 49-58.
Grandguillaume, Gilbert (1982b). Languages and dialects:  The linguistic situation in the 
Maghreb. Les Langues Modernes, 76(3), 288-92.
Grandguillaume, Gilbert (1985). A subverted father and a forbidden language. 
Mediterranean Peoples, 33, 163-82.
Grandguillaume, Gilbert (1991). Arabisation et langues maternelles dans le contexte 
national au Maghreb. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 87, 45-54.
Gravel, Louis-Andre (1972) A Sociolinguistic Investigation of Multilingualism in 
Morocco. Ph.D., Columbia University Teachers College.
Greenberg, Joseph H. (1991). The logical bases of linguistic prescriptivism:  A parallel 
between Classical grammarians and Moslem legal theorists. In Mary E. McGroarty & 
Christian J. Faltis (Eds.), Languages in school and society:  Policy and pedagogy Berlin: 
Mouton de Gruyter.
Gregory, Standford W., Jr., & Wehba, Kessem M. Shafie (1986). The contexts of 
Inshaallah in Alexandria Egypt. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 95-105.
Greppin, John A.C. (1986). Arabic pharmaceutical terms in Middle Armenian. Annual of 
Armenian Linguistics, 7, 65-71.
Greppin, John A.C. (1987a). The fate of Arabic botanical loanwords in modern Armenian. 
The Mankind Quarterly, 27(3), 283-94.
Greppin, John A.C. (1987b). Some early botanical loan words shared by Armenian and 
Semitic. Annual of Armenian Linguistics, 8, 73-82.
Greppin, John A.C. (1988). The Etymology of Pastrami. Journal of English Linguistics, 
21(2), 125-126.
GrigorÕeva, Zh. V. (1985). Types of Agental Complement in Passive Participle 
Constructions in Modern Arabic. Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriay-yazyk-
literatura, 40(1(2)), 108-110.
Grotzfeld, Heinz (1980). Ein falsch(verstanden)er Elativ: Gleichzeitig ein kleiner Beitrag 
zur kontrastiven Grammatik. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 5, 89-92.
Grotzfeldt, Heinz (1983). Hans Wehr (1909-1981). Zeitschrift der Deutschen 
Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, 133(1), 5-10.
Grozdanova, L. A. (1989). Negation in English and Maltese:  Common Rules and 
Typological Differences. Journal of Maltese Studies, 19-20(1989-1990), 95-99.
Grozdanova, Liliana Al. (1991). Otritsanie v angliiskiia, bulgarskiia i maltiiskiia ezik - 
obshti pravila i tipologichni razlichiia. Supostavitelno Ezikoznanie, 16(2), 5-9.
Gruber-Miller, Ann M. (1990). Loss of Nominal Case Endings in the Modern Arabic 
Sedentary Dialects:  Evidence from Southern Palestinian Christian Middle Arabic Texts. In 
Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I (pp. 235-253). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Gruber-Miller, Ann Marie (1992) Internal Developments in the Loss of Arabic Case 
Endings. Ph.D., Ohio State University.
Guerti, M. (1983) Contribution a la synthese de la parole par diphones en Arab Standard. 
MS, University of Algiers.
Guespin, Louis, & Laroussi, Foued (1989). Glottopolitique et standardisation 
terminologique. Banque des Mots, supp, 5-21.
Guillaume, Jean-Patrick (1981). Le Statut des Representations sous-Jacentes en 
Morphonologies dÕApres Ibn Ginni. Arabic, 28(2-3), 222-241.
Guillaume, Jean-Patrick (1986). Sibawayhi and enunciation:  A proposed reading  
(Sibawayhi et lÕenonciation: une proposition de lecture). Histoire Epistemologie Langage, 
8(2), 53-62.
Guillaume, Jean-Patrick (1988). ÔLe Discours tout entier est nom, verbe et particuleÕ:  
Elaboration et constitution de la theorie des parties du discours dans la tradition 
grammaticale arabe. Languages, 92(Dec 1988), 25-36.
Guindy, Anna-Karin (1988). On the Stress in the ÒMadrasaÓ Word Structure in Cairene 
Colloquial Arabic. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 18, 33-58.
Gully, Adrian John (1992) Aspects of Semantics, Grammatical Categories and Other 
Liguistic Considerations in Ibn-HishamÕs ÒMughni al-LabibÕ. Ph.D., University of Exeter.
Gully, Adrian John (1993). The Changing Face of Modern Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 26, 19-
59.
Gwynne, Rosalind (1989). Qiyas al-Qiyas fi Kitab Sibawayh. Al-ÔArabiyya, 22(1-2), 55-
56.
Gwynne, Rosalind (1990). The A Fortiori Argument in Fiqh, Nahw, and Kalam. Proc. of 
2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees 
Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 
165-177). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Haarmann, Ulrich (1981). An Eleventh Century Precis of Arabic Orthography. Festschrift 
for Ihsan ÔAbbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. In Wadad Al-Qadi (Eds.), Studia Arabica et 
Islamica. (pp. 165-182). Beirut: American Univ. of Beirut.
Haarmann, U (1988). Arabic in Speech, Turkish in Lineage, Mamluks and Their Sons in 
the Intellectual Life of 14th-Century Egypt and Syria. Journal of Semitic Studies, 33(1), 
81-114.
Habeeb, Rakan Abdulkareem (1985) The role of the Saudi broadcasting system in the 
utilization of the classical form of the Arabic language in preserving culture. Ph.D., Wayne 
State University.
Haddad, Adnan (1981). Linguistics and religions.  The case of Arabic:   Sacred language 
of Islam. Africanistique, 10, 1-15.
Haddad, Ghassan (1984) Problems and Issues in the Phonology of Lebanese Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Illinois-Urbana.
Haddad, Ghassan, & Kenstowicz, Michael (1980). A note on the parallels between the 
definite article and the relative clause marker in Arabic. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 
10(2), 141-7.
Haddad, Ghassan F. (1984). Epenthesis and Sonority in Lebanese Arabic. Studies in the 
Linguistic Sciences, 14(1), 57-88.
Hadeli, Othman M. (1971) A Descriptive Constrative Analysis of English and Arabic 
Verbs. Ph.D., New York University.
Haeri, Nilofaar (1987). Male/Female Differences in Speech: An Alternative Interpretation. 
In Symposium on Language and Gender,  . Salt Lake City:  University of Utah: 
Haeri, Niloofar (1991) Sociolinguistic Variation in Cairene Arabic: Palatalization and the 
Qaf in the Speech of Men and Women. Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Haeri, Niloofar (1992). How Different are Men and Women:   Palatalization in Cairo. In E. 
Broselow,Mushira Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV 
(pp. 165-180). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Hafez, Om (1991). Turn-Taking in Egyptian Arabic - Spontaneous Speech vs Drama 
Dialog. Journal of Pragmatics, 15(1), 59-81.
Haile, Alemayehu, & Mtenje, Al (1988). In Defense of the Autosegmental Treatment of 
Nonconcatenative Morphology. Journal of Linguistics, 24(2), 433-455.
Hakim, Kawther Noori (1986) Arabic Negation:  A Functional Analysis. Ph.D., 
University of San Francisco.
Halila, Hafedh (1985). Some syllable structure based rules of Tunisian Arabic. Studies in 
African Linguistics,, supplement 9, 135-40.
Halila, Hafedh (1992) Subject Specificity Effects in Tunisian Arabic. dissertation abstract, 
U of Southern California.
Halimah, Ahmad Mustafa (1992) EST Writing:  Rhetorically Processed and Produced:  A 
Case Study of Kuwaiti Learners. Ph.D., University of Essex.
Hamad, Abdullah Hamed (1986) Diglossia in the phonology of second language. Ph.D., 
University of Nebraska-Lincoln.
Hamad, Bushra Jarir (1992) Wad Dayf Allah as a Historian:  Analytical, Literary and 
Linguistic Study of ÔKitab at-TabaqatÕ. Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Hameed, Jumah K. (1985). Level-Ordered Morphology and Phonology of Iraqi Arabic. 
Cahiers Linguistiques dÕOttawa, 13(May), 63-75.
Hameen-Anttila, Jaakko (1987). Arabic muzn- and the Common Semitic Root *znm 
ÔRainÕ. Acta Orientalia, 48, 15-17.
Hameen-Anttila, Jaakko (1992). An Early Arabic Loan from Persian: Yada (d-dahr) - 
Parthian Yad o. Acta Orientalia (Societates Orientales Danica, Fennica, Norvegica, 
Svecica), 53, 21-27.
Hamid, Abdul Halim (1984) A Descriptive Analysis of Sudanese Colloquial Arabic 
Phonology. Ph.D., University of Illinois-Urbana.
Hammond, Michael (1985). Metrical Structure in Lenakel and the Directionality-Dominance 
Hypothesis. Minnesota Papers in Linguistics and Philosophy of Language, 10(Apr), 66-
79.
Hammond, Michael (1988). Templatic Transfer in Arabic Broken Plurals. Natural 
Language and Lingustic Theory, 6, 147-270.
Hamze, H. (1989). La Coordination a un pronom ÔconjointÕ dans la tradition grammaticale 
arabe. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 36(3), 249-271.
Handhal, Falih (1987) A Glossary of the Dialect of the United Arab Emirates Transcribed 
and Arranged According to the English Alphabet. Ph.D., University of Exeter (U.K.).
Hannaoui, Abdelkhalek (1987) Diglossia, Medial Arabic, and Language Policy in 
Morocco. Ph.D., State University of New York at Stony Brook.
Hansford, Keir, & Hansford, Gillian (1989). Borrowed Words in Chumburung. African 
Languages and Culture, 2(1), 39-50.
Harkat, M. (1985). Analysis of Arabic poetry pattern by computer. Workshop Papers 
Kuwait, 2.
Harms, Robert T. (1981). A backwards metrical approach of Cairo Arabic stress. 
Linguistic Analysis, 7(4), 429-450.
Harning, Kerstin Eksell (1980). The Analytic Genitive in the Modern Arabic Dialects. In 
Orientalia Gothoburgensia Gštenborg: Acta Universitatis Gothoburgensis.
Harris, B. (1969). Echantillon de Transcodage Arabe-Anglais au Niveau du Morpheme. 
Montreal: University of Montreal.  
Hartmann, Regina (1982). Reflections of the Arabic version of asterix:  A translation 
comparison. Linguistische Berichte, 81, 1-31.
Hary, B (1989). Middle Arabic: proposals for new terminology. Al-ÔArabiyya, 22(1-2), 
19-36.
Hary, Benyamin H. (1987) Judeo-Arabic, Written and Spoken in Egypt in the Sixteenth 
and Seventeenth Centuries. Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley.
Hashim, Kamal M. Z. (1980) Sentential Complements in Egyptian Colloquial Arabic. 
Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Hass, W. (Ed.). (1982).  Standard Languages:  Spoken and Written. Manchester:   
Manchester University Press.
Hassan, El Tayeb El Mansour El (1988). Right-to-Left/Left-to-Right Thinking Revisited. 
ESPMENA Bulletin, 25(Jan), 17-33.
Hassan, Hassan M. (1990) A Contrastive Study of Tense and Aspect in English and Arabic 
with Special Reference to Translation. Ph.D., University of Bath (United Kingdom).
Hassanain, Khalid Said Ahmed (1988) A Sociolinguistic Study: Address Rule System in 
the Western Region of Saudi Arabia. Ph.D., 
Hassoun, Jacques (1982). The Truchement. Meta, 27(1), 199-24.
Hatim, Basil (1984). A text-typological approach to syllabus design in translator training. 
The Incorporated Linguist, 23(3), 146-9.
Hatim, Basil (1987a). Discourse Texture in Translation: Towards a Text-Typological 
Redefinition of Theme and Rheme.  Proc. of Conf. Held at Heriot-Watt Univ., Edinburgh, 
5-7 Jan. 1986. In Hugh Keith & Ian Mason (Eds.), Translation in the Modern  Language 
Degree (pp. 52-62). London: RegentÕs College.
Hatim, Basil (1987b). A Text Linguist Model for the Analysis of Discourse Errors:  
Contributions from Arabic Linguistics. In Grammar in the Construction of Texts (pp. 102-
13). London:: Pinter.
Hatim, Basil (1989). Text Linguistics in the Didactics of Translation:  The Case of the 
Verbal and Nominal Clause Types in Arabic. Dept Languages Heriot-Watt U, 27(2), 137-
144.
Hawas, Hamid M. (1989). The Articles in English and Arabic:  A Contrastive Study. 
Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics, 15(2), 23-51.
Hawkins, Peter (1983). Diglossia Revisited. Language and Communication, 3(3), 219-32.
Haydar, Y., & Mrayati, M. (1985). A Study of Intonation, and the Melodic Curve of 
Phrases in Standard Arabic. Travaux de lÕInstitut de Phonetique de Strasbourg, 17, 75-
118.
Hayes, Bruce (1986). Inalterability in CV phonology. Language, 62(2), 321-51.
Hayes, Bruce (1987). Compensatory lengthening in Moraic phonology. In 13th Ann. 
Minn. Conference on Lang. and Ling.,  . 
Hayward, R. J.,Hayward, K. M., & Al-Tabuki, Salim Bakhit (1988). Vowels in Jibali 
Verbs. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 51(3), 240-250.
Haywood, John A. (1986). The Entry in Medieval Arabic Monolingual Dictionaries: Some 
Aspects of Arrangement and Content. In R. R. K. Hartmann (Eds.), The History of 
Lexicography: Papers from The Dictionary Research Centre Seminar at Exeter, March1986 
(pp. 107-113). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Hazout, Ilan (1991) Verbal Nouns: Theta Theoretic Studies in Hebrew and Arabic. Ph.D., 
University of Massachesetts.
Heath, Jeffrey (1982). A Judeo-Arabic Dialect of Tafilalt (Southeastern Morocco). 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik,  9, 32-78.
Heath, Jeffrey (1986). Hasta la mujerra! and other instances of playful language mixing in 
Morocco. Mediterranean Language Review2, 113-116.
Heath, J. (1987a). Ablaut and Ambiguity in Morrocan Arabic. Albany: SUNY Press.  
Heath, Jeffrey (1987b). Ablaut and Ambiguity:  Phonology of a Moroccan Arabic Dialect. 
New York: State University of New York Press.  
Heath, Jeffrey, & Ingham, Bruce (1989). From Code-Switching to Borrowing: Foreign 
and Diglossic Mixing in Moroccan Arabic. London: Kegan Paul International.  
Heddad, Ghassan, & Kenstowicz, Michael (1980). A Note on the Parallels between the 
Definite Article and the Relative Clause Marker in Arabic. Studies in the Linguistic 
Sciences, 10(2), 141-147.
Heger, Klaus (1989). On Pluricentric Language Culture. Zeitschrift fur Germanistische 
Linguistik, 17(2), 226-228.
Hegyi, Ottmar (1981). Reflections of medieval multiculturalism:  The three alphabets for 
Iberian romance. Neuva Revista de Filologia Hispanica, 30(1), 92-103.
Heine, Peter (1982). Verzeichnis der Schriften von Hans Wehr. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 8, 7-11.
Heliel, Mohamed H. (1982). Stress timing in Modern Literary Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 15(1-
2), 90-107.
Heliel, Mohamed H. (1984). The Rhythmic Unit in Modern Literary Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 
17(1-2), 5-24.
Heliel, Mohamed H. (1987). Definitions of Linguistic Terms in an English-Arabic 
Dictionary. Dictionaries: Journal of the Dictionary Society of North America, 9, 133-148.
Henkin, Roni (1992). The Three Faces of the Arabic Participle in Negev Bedouin Dialects: 
Continuous, Resultative, and Evidential. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African 
Studies, 55(3), 433-444.
Henkin, Roni (1993). ÔTo BeÕ (or Not) in the Bedouin Arabic Dialect of the Ahaywat 
(Sinai). Mediterranean Language Review, 6-7, 173-197.
Herbolich, James B. (1979a). Attitudes of Egyptians Toward Various Arabic Vernaculars. 
Lingua, 47(4), 301-321.
Herbolich, James B. (1979b). The Development of Semantic Differential Scales in Arabic. 
Al-ÔArabiyya, 12(1-2), 20-43.
Hermans, Ben (1991). Eliminating Destressing Rules. In Frank Drijkoningen & Ans Van 
Kemenade (Eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands (pp. 51-60). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Herzallah, Rukayyah S. (1990). Aspects of Palestinian Arabic Phonology:  A Nonlinear 
Approach. Ithaca: Dept. of Modern Languages and Linguistics at Cornell University.  
Hinds, Martin, & Badawi, El-Said (1986). Dictionary of Egyptian Arabic. Beirut: Librairie 
du Liban.  
Hlal, Y. (1985a). Morphological analysis of Arabic speech. Workshop Papers 
Kuwait/Proceedings Kuwait89, section 13, 273-94.
Hlal, Y. (1985b). Morphology and syntax of the Arabic language. Arab School of Sciences 
and Technology: Informatics, 4C, 1-8.
Hlal, Yahya (1990). Morphology and Syntax of the Arabic Language. In Pierre A. 
MacKay (Eds.), Computers and the Arabic Language (pp. 201-207). New York: 
Hemisphere.
Hoberman, Robert (1988). Local and long-distance spreading in semitic morphology. 
Natural Language and Linguistic Theory, 6, 541-550.
Hoberman, Robert D. (1989). Parameters of Emphasis: Autosegmental Analyses of 
Pharyngealization in Four Languages. Journal of Afroasiatic Languages, 2(1), 73-97.
Hofman, John E., & Habib, Allah Mohammed (1982). The cloze technique in Arabic: 
words or semantic units? Journal of Psycholinguistic Research, 11(4), 275-82.
Hofner, Maria (1983). Zur Funktion von Infinitiv und Demonstrativen im 
Altsudarabischen. In Stanislav Segert,Andras J. E. Bodrogligeti,Monica S. 
Devens,Maxine Rodinson, & Berhane Mariam Sahle Sellasie (Eds.), Ethiopian Studies: 
Dedicated to Wolf Leslau on the Occasion of His Seventy-Fifth Birthday, November 14th, 
1981 by Friends and Colleagues (pp. 232-235). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Holes, Clive (1980). Phonological Variation in Bahraini Arabic: The (j) and (y) Allophones 
of /j/. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 4, 72-89.
Holes, Clive (1983a). Bahraini dialects: sectarian differences and the sedentary/nomadic 
split. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 10, 7-38.
Holes, Clive (1983b). Patterns of Communal Language Variation in Bahrain. Language in 
Society, 12(4), 433-457.
Holes, Clive (1984). Bahraini dialects: sectarian differences exemplified through texts. 
Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 13, 27-67.
Holes, Clive (1986a). Communicative Function and Pronominal Variation in Bahraini 
Arabic. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 10-30.
Holes, Clive (1986b). The social motivation for phonological convergence in three Arabic 
dialects. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 61, 33-51.
Holes, Clive (1986c). Variation in the morphophonolgy of Arabic dialects. Transactions of 
the Philological Society, 167-90.
Holes, Clive (1989). Towards a Dialect Geography of Oman. Bulletin of the School of 
Oriental and African Studies, 52(3), 446-462.
Holes, Clive (1993). The Uses of Variation:  A Study of the Political Speeches of Gamal 
Abdal al-Nasir. In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V 
(pp. 13-46). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Holes, Clive, & Ingham, Bruce (1987). Language Variation and Change in a Modernising 
Arab State: The Case of Bahrain. London: Kegan Paul International.  
Holmberg, Bo (1989). The Public Debate as a Literary Genre in Arabic Literature. 
Orientalia Suecana (OS), 38-39(1989-1990), 45-53.
Homeidi, Moheiddin A. (1988) Modality in Government and Binding:  Evidence from 
Arabic and English. University of Essex (U.K.).
Hopkins, Simon (1984). Studies in the grammar of Early Arabic. Oxford: Oxford 
University Press.  
Houdaifa, Et-Tayeb (1986). Quelques aspects de la grammaire des verbes et, en particulier, 
des verbes de mouvement dans un corpus de migrant. In Alain Giacomi & Daniel 
Veronique (Eds.), Acquisition dÕune langue etrangere: Perspectives et recherches (pp. 447-
473). Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Howell, Mortimer Sloper (1986). A Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language (1986 
reprinting ed.). Delhi: Gian Publishing House.  
Hudson, Grover (1985). The Arabic doubled verb conspiracy and morpheme invariance. 
Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9, 141-5.
Hudson, Grover (1986). Arabic root and pattern morphology without tiers. Journal of 
Linguistics, 22, 85-122.
Hudson, Grover (1991). On a Defence of Autosegmentalism. Journal of Linguistics, 
27(1), 163-177.
Hull, Geoffrey (1989). The Origin of the Name ÔKirkopÕ. Journal of Maltese Studies, 19-
20(1989-1990), 58-61.
Humbert, Genevieve (1990). Remarques sur les editions du Kitab de Sibawayhi et leur 
base manuscrite. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 
Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History 
of Arabic Grammar (pp. 179-194). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Hussain, A (1987) An experimental investigation of some aspects of the sound system of 
the Gulf Arabic dialect with special reference to duration. Ph.D., University of Essex 
(U.K.).
Hussein, Ali Ahmed (1989). The Use of Cloze Procedure in Assessing the Impact of Non-
Verbal Information on Native/Non-Native English SpeakersÕ Comprehension. ESPMENA 
Bulletin, 26, 10-23.
Hussein, Lutfi (1990a). Serial Verbs in Colloquial Arabic. Working Papers in Linguistics, 
39, 340-354.
Hussein, Lutfi (1990b). VCV Coarticulation in Arabic. Working Papers in Linguistics, 38, 
88-104.
Hussein, R. (1980) The case of triglossia in Arabic(with special emphasis on Jordan). 
Ph.D., State University of New York-Buffalo.
Hussein, Riyad F., & El-Ali, Nasser (1989). Subjective Reactions of Rural University 
Students toward Different Varieties of Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 22(1-2), 37-54.
Hussein, Riyad Fayez, & Zughoul, Muhammad Raji (1993). Lexical Interference in 
Journalistic Arabic in Jordan. Language Sciences, 15(3), 239-254.
Hussein, Riad Fayez Issa (1980) The Case of Triglossia in Arabic: With Special Emphasis 
on Jordan. Ph.D., State University of New York at Buffalo.
Huxley, Frederick C. (1986). Contrasting semantic structures in English and Arabic:  
problem and promise in second-language learning. Anthropology and Education Quarterly, 
17(2), 67-99.
Huybregts, Riny (1991). Allosteric Agreement in VSO Languages. In Frank Drijkoningen 
& Ans van Kemenade (Eds.), Linguistics in the Netherlands 1991 (pp. 81-90). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Ibrahim, Amr Helmy (1979). Etude comparee des systemes verbaux de lÕarabe egyptien, 
de lÕarabe moderne et du francais. Lingvisticae Investigationes: Revue Internationale de 
Linguistique Francaise et de Linguistique Generale, 3, 166-170.
Ibrahim, Amr Helmy (1982). Risks and obstacles of translation of belonging:  From 
French to Arabic through English, Italian, German and Dutch. Le Francias dans le Monde, 
22(170), 39-46.
Ibrahim, Amr Helmy (1984). Sur le statut de quelques ÔaccidentsÕ syntactico-semantiques. 
Actes du Colloque de Rennes, Univ. de Haute-Bretagne. In Pierre Attal & Claude Muller 
(Eds.), De la syntaxe a la pragmatique (pp. 241-259). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Ibrahim, Muhammad H. (1982a). On the Contrast between (ae) and (a) in Modern Arabic. 
In Shiro Hattori,Kazuko Inoue,Tadao Shimomiya, & Yoshio Nagashima (Ed.), The XIIIth 
International Congress of Linguists,  (pp. 625-628). Tokyo: Tokyo Press.
Ibrahim, Muhammad H. (1982b). Radical Reduplication in Arabic. Zeitschrift fur 
Arabische Linguistik,  9, 82-87.
Ibrahim, Muhammad H. (1983). Linguistic distance and literacy in Arabic. Journal of 
Pragmatics, 7(5), 507-15.
Ibrahim, Muhammad H. (1986). Standard and prestige language: a problem in Arabic 
sociolinguistics. Anthropological linguistics, 28(1), 115-26.
Ibrahim, Muhammad H. (1989). Communicating in Arabic: Problems and Prospects. In 
Florian Coulmas (Eds.), Language Adaptation (pp. 39-59). Cambridge: Cambridge 
University Press.
Idrissi-Bouyahyaoui, Bouchaib (1987) Metalinguistic Awareness in Literate and Illiterate 
Children and Adults:  A Psycholinguistic Study. Ph.D., University of Edenburgh (U.K.).
Ineichen, Gustav (1979). La descrizione della relativa: Un problema di grammatica 
contrastiva. AN 80-3-149,, 517-524.
Ingham, Bruce (1982). North East Arabian Dialects. London: Kegan Paul Internat.  
Ingham, Bruce (1984). In Memoriam T. M. Johnstone. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 12, 7-8.
Ingham, Bruce (1986). Notes of the Dialect of the Al Murra of Eastern and Southern 
Arabia. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 49(2), 271-291.
Ingham, B. (1991). Subordinate Clauses of Time and Condition in Bedouin Dialects. 
Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 54(1), 42-62.
Ioup, Georgette (1984). Is there a structural foreign accent? A comparison of syntactic and 
phonological errors in second language acquisition. Language Learning, 34(2), 1-17.
Irsheid, Omar Musleh, & Kenstowicz, Michael (1984). Some phonological rules of Bani-
Hassan Arabic: a Bedouin dialect. Studies in the Linguistics Sciences, 14(1), 109-47.
Irshied, Omar (1984) The Phonology of Arabic:  Bani HassanÑA Bedouin Jordanian 
Dialect. Ph.D., University of Illinois-Urbana.
Isaev, M. I., & Tenishev, E. R. (1990). Ossetica - Turcica. Voprosy Iazykoznaniia, 6, 
140-143.
Isaksson, Bo (1991). The Personal Markers in the Modern Arabic Dialects of the Arabian 
Peninsula. Orientalia Suecana (OS), 40, 117-145.
Isteitiya, Samir Sharif (1984) The Phonetics and Phonology of Classical Arabic As 
Described by Al-JurjaniÕs Al-Muqtasad. Ph.D., The University of Michigan.
Itkonen, Esa (1989). Havaintoja Arabian kielitieteesta. Virittaja: Journal de Kotikielen 
Seura, 93(3), 466-479.
Izhar, Nilofar (1990). Patient Origins and Usage of a Unani Clinic in Aligarh Town, India. 
Social Science & Medicine, 30(10), 1139.
Jabeur, Mohamed (1987) A Sociolinguistic Study in Tunisia: Rades. Ph.D., University of 
Reading (United Kingdom).
Jackson, Michael (1987). The migration of a name: reflections on Alexander in Africa. 
Cultural Anthropology, 2(2), 235-54.
Jacquemond, Ricahrd (1992). Translation and Cultural Hegemony:  The Case of French-
Arab Translation. In Lawrence Venuti (Eds.), Rethinking Translation:  Discourse, 
Subjectivity, Ideology (pp. 139-158). London: Routledge.
Jaeggli, Osvaldo, & Safir, Kenneth J. (Ed.). (1989).  The Null Subject Parameter. 
Dordrecht:   Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Jankowski, Henryk (1989). Word Order in Iraqi Arabic. Lingua Posnaniensis: 
Czasopismo Poswiecone Jezykoznawstwu Poronownawczemu i Ogolnemu, 32-33, 109-
112.
Jankowsky, Kurt R. (Ed.). (1985).  Scientific and Humanistic Dimensions of Language. 
Festschrift for Robert Lado. Amsterdam:   John Benjamins.
Jarrar, Walid Sadeq Said (1992) The Grammatical Concept of Causality in Arabic:  A study 
and an Annotated Translationof al-ZajjajiÕs Book Ôal-Idah Ôllal al-NahwÕ (On Explaining 
Grammatical Causes). Ph.D., Indiana University.
Jassem, Ali Zaidan (1993). Impact of the Arab-Israeli Wars on Language and Social 
Change in the Arab World: The Case of Syrian Arabic. Kuala Lumpur, Malasia: Pustaka 
Antara.  
Jassem, Zaidan Ali (1988) Phonological Variation and Change in Immigrant Speech: A 
Sociolinguistic Study of a 1967 Arab-Israeli War Immigrant Speech Community in 
Damascus, Syria. Ph.D., 
Jassem, Zaidan Ali (1994a). Lectures in English and Arabic Sociolinguistics. Kuala 
Lumpur: Pustaka Antara.  
Jassem, Zaidan Ali (1994b). Lectures in English and Arabic Sociolinguistics. Kuala 
Lumpur: Pustaka Antara.  
Jastrow, Otto (1980). Das mesopotamische Arabisch. In Wolfdietrich Fischer & Otto 
Jastrow (Eds.), Handbuch der arabischen Dialekte (pp. 140-154). Wiesbaden:  Otto 
Harrassowitz.
Jastrow, Otto (1981). Die mesopotamisch-arabischen qeltu-Dialekte, Band II: 
Volkskundliche Texte in elf Dialekten.  
Jastrow, Otto (1982). Lexikalische Nachtrage zu Behzani. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 9, 81-82.
Jastrow, Otto (1983). Beobachtungen zum arabischen Dialect von Adana (Turkei). 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 11, 72-79.
Jastrow, Otto (1988). On the Arabic Dialect of the Jews from Arbil. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 19, 50-59.
Jastrow, Otto, & Kazzarah, Salah (1980). Erinnerungen an die Osmanenzeit: Aleppinische 
Texte, I. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 5, 93-117.
Jaworski, Adam (1985). A ÔMacro ScaleÕAttitudes to the foreignerÕs language. Papers and 
Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 20, 135-40.
Jelinek, E. (1981). Person-subject marking in AUX in Egyptian Arabic. In R. Heny & B. 
Richards (Eds.), Linguistic Categories (pp. 21-46). University of Arizona.
Jelinek, Eloise (1983). Person-Subject Marking in AUX in Egyptian Arabic. In Frank 
Heny & Barry Richards (Eds.), Linguistic Categories: Auxiliaries and Related Puzzles, I: 
Categories; II: The Scope, Order, and Distribution of English Auxiliary  Verbs (pp. 21-46). 
Dordrecht: Reidel.
Jelinek, Mary Eloise (1981) On Defining Categories :  Aux and Predicate in Colloquial 
Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., University of Arizona.
Jernudd, Bjorn H. (1986). Language Mentions in Jordanian Newspapers (The English-
Language Press). In Joshua A. Fishman,Andree Tabouret-Keller,Michael Clyne,Bh. 
Krishnamurti, & Mohamed Abdulaziz (Eds.), The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of 
Charles A. Ferguson on the Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; 
II: Sociolinguistics and the Sociology of Language (pp. 253-269). Berlin: Mouton de 
Gruyter.
Jernudd, Bjorn H., & Geoffrey M., White (1983). The concept of basic color terms: 
variability in Arabic. Anthropological Linguistics, 25(1), 61-81.
Jernudd, Bjorn H., & Ibrahim, Muhammad H. (1986). Issues in Arabic sociolinguistics. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1).
Jernudd, Bjorn H., & Shapiro, Michael J. (Ed.). (1989).  The Politics of Language 
Purism. Berlin:   Mouton de Gruyter.
Jibril, Munzali (1987). Language in Nigerian Education. Indian Journal of Applied 
Linguistics, 13(1), 37-51.
Jobling, William J (1990). New North Arabian Epigraphic Evidence for the History of the 
Decipherment of the Alphabet. In Hans-Josef Niederehe & Konrad Koerner (Eds.), 
History and Historiography of Linguistics:  Papers from the Fourth International 
Conference on the History of the Language Sciences (pp. 125-134). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Johnson, C. Douglas (1982). Vowel-consonant metathesis in a Palestinian dialect. Acta 
Linguistica Hafniensia, 17(1), 61-77.
Johnson, C. Douglas (1988a). Levantine Cyclogenesis. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy 
(Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 143-66). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Johnson, C. Douglas (1988b). Preclusteral Shortening in Levantine Arabic. Journal of 
Afroasiatic Languages, 1(1), 1-25.
Johnson, C. Douglas (1990). Levantine Cyclogenesis. Papers from Second Annual 
Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on 
Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 143-166). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Johnson, Douglas (1979). Opaque stress in Palestinian. Lingua, 49, 153-67.
Johnstone, Barbara (1987). Parataxis in Arabic: modification as a model for persuasion. 
Studies in Language, 11(1), 85-98.
Johnstone, Barbara (1990). ÔOralityÕ and Discourse Structure in Modern Standard Arabic.  
Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I. (pp. 215-233). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Johnstone, Barbara (1991). Repetition in Arabic Discourse: Paradigms, Syntagms, and the 
Ecology of Language. Amsterdam: Benjamins.  
Johnstone, T. M. (1980). Gemination in the Jibbali Language of Dhofar. Zeitschrift fur 
Arabische Linguistik, 4, 61-71.
Johnstone, T. M. (1983). The System of Enumeration in the South Arabian Languages.  
Arts. Presented to R. B. Serjeant on the Occasion of His Retirement from Sir Thomas 
AdamsÕs Chair of Arabic at the Univ. of Cambridge. In R. L. Bidwell & G. R. Smith 
(Eds.), Arabian and Islamic Studies (pp. 225-228). London: Longman.
Johnstone, Thomas M. (1984). New Sibilant Phonemes in the Modern South Arabian 
Languages of Dhofar.  Papers from 3rd International Hamito-Semitic Cong. In James 
Bynon (Eds.), Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics (pp. 389-390). Amsterdam:  
Benjamins.
Jones, Sidney (1983). Arabic instruction and literacy in Javanese Muslim schools. 
International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 42, 83-94.
Joseph, John Earl (1985). Superposed languages and standardization. Studi italiani di 
linguistica teorica e applicata, 14(1-3), 35-52.
JumÕah, Khalid ÔAbd al-Karim (1980). Shawahid al-shiÕr fi Kitab Sibawayh. Kuwait: 
Maktabat Dar al-ÕUrubah.  
Justice, David (1987). The Semantics of Form in Arabic in the Mirror of European 
Languages. Amsterdam: Benjamins.  
Justice, David Bruce (1981) The Semantics of Form in Arabic, in the Mirror of European 
Languages. Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley.
Kahl, Oliver (1988). Ibn al-HanbaliÕs Treatise on the Etymology of Arabic Insan. 
Orientalia Lovaniensia Periodica, 19, 197-208.
Kahl, Oliver (1989). Eine jemenitische Drogenliste aus der zweiten Halfte des 19. 
Jahrhunderts. Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American 
Studies, 57(3), 228-232.
Kahlil, Aziz (1989). A Study of Cohesion and Coherence in Arab EFL College Students 
Writing. DEpt English Bethlehem U, West Bank Jordan System, 17(3), 359-371.
Kalmar, Ivan, & Agius, Dionisius (1983). Verb-Subject Order and Communicative 
Dynamism in Maltese. Zeitschrift fur Dialektologie und Linguistik, 50(3), 335-354.
Kamel, Gehan Wahid (1989) Argumentative Writing by Arab Learners of English as a 
Foreign and Second Language: An Empirical Investigation of Contrastive Rhetoric. Ph.D., 
Indiana University of Pennsylvania.
Kamprath, C., & Sorenson, M. (1988). Computational analysis of Arabic morphology. In 
2nd International Conference of the Linguistic Society of Morocco,  . Rabat: 
Kanakri, Mahmoud Ali (1988) Style and Style Shifting in Educated Spoken Arabic of 
Jordan. Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-Madison.
Kapeliuk, Olga (1988). Abstract Nouns as Transformation of Copula Sentences - Teh Case 
of Amharic. Grazer Linguistische Studien, 30(fall), 69-77.
Kaplan, Tamar (1993). Arabic Genitives:  A Problematic Structure for the Binding Theory. 
In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V (pp. 195-
208). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Karara, O. , & Sherbini, L. (1987). Sentence length as a random variable for some Arabic 
writers. In 1987 Annual Conference of the Institute of Statistical Studies and Research,  . 
Cairo University: 
Kardestuncer, Aino Evelin (1982). On the Role of Transition Duration in the 
Discrimination of Velar Stop Consonants in Turkish. Word, 33(3), 243-252.
Karp, Lisa Ann (1992) Sahl b. Harun:  The Man and His Contribution to Adab. 
dissertation abstract, Harvard University.
Kasem, Christine (1987). Die Bildung des internen Plurals im Agyptisch-Arabischen als 
Teilaspekt des Spracherwerbs. Vienna: Diplomarbeit, Universitat Wien.  
Kastner, Hartmut (1981). Phonetik und Phonologie des modernen Hocharabisch. Leipzig: 
Enzyklopadie.  
Kastner, Hartmut (1987). Die gepressten Konsonanten des Hocharabischen und ihre 
phonologische Interpretation. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und 
Kommunikationsforschung, 40(6), 814-817.
Kastner, Hartmut (1989). A Contrastive Comparison of Consonantal Phonemes of New 
High German and Modern High Arabic. Linguistische Studien, 189, 125-130.
Kay, M. (1989). Two level morphology for Arabic. In A. Farghali & J. McCarthy (Eds.), 
Arabic Morphology 
Kaye, Alan S. (1975a). A Comparative Study of the Arabic Dialects Spoken in Nigeria. In 
American Philosophical Society Yearbook, 1974 (pp. 628-29). Philadelphia: 
Kaye, Alan S. (1975b). Linguistics Comments on the Papers from the 1970 London 
Colloquium on Hamito-Semitic Comparitive Linguistics. In J. Bynon & T. Bynon (Eds.), 
Hamito Semitica (pp. 100-01, 131, 159, 246, 331, 486, 491, 518). The Hague and Paris: 
Mouton and Co.
Kaye, Alan s. (1975c). Nigerian Arabic and Diachronic Linguistics. In H. Sharifi (Ed.), 
Ninth Mid-America Linguistics Conference: From Meaning to Sound,  (pp. 314-22). Univ. 
of Nebraska Press.
Kaye, Alan S. (1977a). The Arabic Dialects of East Africa. In American Philosophical 
Society Yearbook, 1976 (pp. 363). Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society.
Kaye, Alan S. (1977b). The Consonantal System of the Semitic Languages. In Dept. of 
Linguistics Seminar Papers Series (pp. vi, 75). Fullerton: California State University.
Kaye, Alan S. (1982a). A Dictionary of Nigerian Arabic. Malibu, CA: Undena 
Publications.  
Kaye, Alan S. (1982b). The Pressure of Syntactic Change on Morphology: a study of 
Semitic linguistics. In J. Kalir (Eds.), Festschrift in Honor of Morton C. Fierman (pp. 63-
94). Fullerton: Dept. of Religious Studies, California State U.
Kaye, Alan S. (1985a). Comments on Arabic Language Structure. Language Monthly, 34, 
5.
Kaye, Alan S. (1985b). Hebrew tiro(w)s = Òpsychoactive drug/opium; juice; sauceÓ A 
study in Worter & Sachen. Diachronica, 2(2), 267-73.
Kaye, Alan S. (1985c). On the Importance of Pidgins and Creoles for Historical 
Linguistics. Diachronica:  International Journal for Historical Linguistics, 2(2), 201-230.
Kaye, Alan S. (1985d). Some Notes on Arabic Dialectology and its Works. In Alan S. 
Kaye (Eds.), Studies in the Humanities: A Festschrift in Honor of Joseph Kalir (pp. 75-
83). Fullerton: California State University.
Kaye, Alan S. (1986a). The Diversity of Arabic Language with Remarks on Ki-Nubi 
Arabic Grammar and Vocabulary. Forum, 4(5), 20-21.
Kaye, Alan S. (1986b). The etymology of ÒcoffeeÓ: the dark brew. Journal of the 
American Oriental Society, 106(3), 557-58.
Kaye, Alan S. (1986c). Nigerian Arabic-English Dictionary. Malibu, California: Undena 
Publications.  
Kaye, Alan S. (1986d). Some remarks on proto-Semitic phonology. Language Sciences, 
8(1(63)), 37-48.
Kaye, Alan S. (1986e). A study of aspect in Maltese. Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 139-45.
Kaye, Alan S. (1986f). The Verb ÔSeeÕ in Arabic dialects. In J. Fishman & others (Eds.), 
The Fergusonian Impact: From Phonology to Society (pp. 211-21). Berlin, New York, 
Amersterdam: Mouton de Gruyter.
Kaye, Alan S. (1987a). Arabic. In Bernard Comrie (Eds.), The WorldÕs Major Languages 
(pp. 664-85). Oxford, London: Oxford University Press, Croom Helm, Ltd.
Kaye, Alan S. (1987b). Comments on Arabic. Verbatim, 13(3), 14.
Kaye, Alan S. (1987c). Ki-Nubi Etymologies. Journal of African Languages and 
Linguistics, 9(2), 157-159.
Kaye, Alan S. (1989a). Arabic and Pima. Occasional Publications of the Epigraphic 
Society, 18, 16-17.
Kaye, Alan S. (1989b). Arabic grammatical theory in the Middle Ages. Historiographia 
Linguistica, 16(3), 351-360.
Kaye, Alan S. (1989c). A Comparative Etymological Dictionary of Three African Arabic 
Dialects on Computer. In Second Conference on Arabic Computational Linguistics,  . 
Kuwait: Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research.
Kaye, Alan S. (1990a). The Arabic Language with Particular Reference to Saudi Arabian 
Dialects. London: Croom Helm, Ltd.
Kegan Paul International.  
Kaye, Alan S. (1990b). Arabic Phonology. In T. Griffen & F. Peng (Eds.), Hindi-Urdu 
Phonology London: Cole T. Whurr, Ltd.
Kaye, Alan S. (1990c). Introduction to Arabic of Aden: An Introduction by H. Feghali. In 
Alan s. Kaye (Eds.), Arabic of Aden Wheaton, MD: Dunwoody Press.
Kaye, Alan S. (1990d). Some Historical Remarks on Juba Arabic and Ki-Nubi. In A. 
Wezler (Ed.), XXXII International Congress for Asian and North African Studies,  . in 
press for 1990.
Kaye, Alan S. (1990e). Topics in Arabic Pidginistics and Creolistics. Journal of the 
American Oriental Society Essay Series.
Kaye, Alan S. (1991a). Does Ugaritic Go with Arabic in Semitic Genealogical Sub-
Classification? Folia Orientalia, 28, 115-128.
Kaye, Alan S. (1991b). The hamzat al-wasl in contemporary Modern Standard Arabic. 
Journal of the American Oriental Society, 111(3), 572-573.
Kaye, Alan S. (1992). Orthographic Variation in Arabic Loan Words. English Today: The 
International Review of the English Language, 8(2), 32-41.
Kaye, Jonathan (1990). ÔCodaÕ Licensing. Phonology, 7(2), 301-330.
Kaye, Jonathan,Echchaldi, Malika, & El Ayachi, Souad (1986a). The Verbal Forms of 
Moroccan Arabic. Revue quebecoise de linguistique, 16(1), 61-99.
Kaye, Jonathan,Echchaldi, Malika, & El-ayachi, Souad (1986b). Les formes verbales de lÕ 
arabe marocain. Revue quebecoise de linguistique, 16(1), 61-99.
Kayed, Isam M. H. (1985) The Influence of Arabic Grammar on Edited and Non-Edited 
English Used by Arabs. Ph.D., University of Missouri-Columbia.
Kechaou, Salah (1982). Adjectives and Related Forms. IBLA, Revue de lÕInstitut des 
Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis, 45(1(149)), 149-157.
Kechaou, Salah (1984). The Boundaries between nouns and verbs. Revue de lÕInstitut des 
Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis, 47 (1984)(1(153)), 125-37.
Kechrida, Hadi M. (1984). De la radicale R dans les racines triliteres arabes. Orientalia 
Suecana, 33-35, 215-230.
Keegan, John M. (1984). Geminate Clusters and Moroccan Syllable Structure. 
CUNYForum: Papers in Linguistics, 10, 44-69.
Keegan, John Michael (1986a) The phonology and morphology of Moroccan Arabic. 
Ph.D., City University of New York.
Keegan, John M (1986b). The Role of Syllabic Structure in the Phonology of Moroccan 
Arabic. In Gerrit J. Dimmendaal (Eds.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, III 
(pp. 209-226). Dordrecht: Foris.
Keith, Robert W. (1987). The effect of linguistic background on staggered spondaic work 
and dichotic consonant vowel scores. British Journal of Audiology, 21(1), 21-6.
KenÔaan, Siham Abkul Ridha (1989). Word Stress in English and Arabic. Indian Journal 
of Applied Linguistics, 15(2), 1-22.
Kenny, Dallas (1992). Arab-Ameicans Learning Arabic:  Motivation and Attitudes. In 
Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 119-161). Detroit: Wayne 
State University press.
Kenstowicz , Michael, & Kidda, M. (1987). The Obligatory Contour Principle and Tengale 
Phonology. In David Odden (Eds.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics IV (pp. 
223-38). Dordrecht: Foris.
Kenstowicz, Michael (1980a). Notes on Cairene Arabic syncope. Studies in the Linguistic 
Sciences, 10(2), 39-54.
Kenstowicz, Michael (Ed.). (1980b).  Studies in Arabic Linguistics. Urbana:   University 
of Illinois.
Kenstowicz, Michael (1981a). A Note on Cyclic Stress in Levantine Arabic. In Theoretical 
Issues in the Grammar of Semitic Languages (pp. 21-31). Cambridge, MA: MIT Dept. of 
Lingusitics.
Kenstowicz, Michael (1981b). Vowel harmony in Palestinian Arabic: a suprasegmental 
analysis. Linguistics, 19(5-6(243-244)), 449-65.
Kenstowicz, Michael (1983a). Parametric variation and accent in the Arabic dialects. 
Papers from the Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society, 19, 205-13.
Kenstowicz, M. (1983b). Wh-In-Situ Constructions in Egyptian Arabic. In Jonathan 
Kaye,Hilda Koopman, & Andre Dugas (Eds.), Current Approaches to African Lingusitics 
(pp. 261-281). Dordrecht: Foris.
Kenstowicz, M. (1984). The null-subject parameter in modern Arabic dialects. In Charles 
Jones & Peter Sells (Ed.), In: Proceedings of N(orth) E(astern) L(inguistic) S(ociety),  
XIV (pp. 207-19). Amherst: Graduate Linguistics Student Assoc. U. of Massachusetts.
Kenstowicz, Michael (1985). On core syllables in modern Arabic dialects. Studies in 
African Linguistics, supplement 9, 168-72.
Kenstowicz, Michael (1986). Notes on syllable structure in three Arabic dialects. Revue 
quebecoise de linguistique, 16(1), 101-108.
Kenstowicz, M. (1989). Null subject in Modern Arabic dialects. In O. Jaeggli & K. Safir 
(Eds.), The Null Subject Parameter (pp. 263-275). 
Kenstowicz, Michael, & Abdul-Karim, Kamal (1980a). Cyclic Stress in Levantine Arabic. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 55-76.
Kenstowicz, Michael, & Abdul-Karim, Kamal (1980b). Cyclic Stress in Levantine Arabic. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 55-76.
Kenstowicz, Michael, & Wahba, Wafaa (1980). Clitics and double object construction in 
Cairene Arabic. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 149-63.
Key, Alan S. (1982). A Dictionary of Nigerian Arabic. Malibu, CA: Undena.  
Khafagy, M. T. (1979). Efforts at Unifying Arabic Terminology. Lebende Sprachen: 
Zeitschrift fur Fremde Sprachen in Wissenschaft und Praxis, 24, 131.
Khafian, U. (1986). Nepriamoi vopros v aspekte russkogo i arabskogo rechevogo 
povedeniia. Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom, 4, 58-61.
Khaldieh, Salim Ahmad (1990) The Role of Phonological Encoding (Speech Recoding) 
and Visual Processes in Word Recognition of American Learners of Arabic  as a Foreign 
Language. Ph.D., The Ohio State University.
Khalifa, R. (1988).  Computer analysis of the Quran text. In BRISMES: 1988 International 
Conference on Middle Eastern Studies,  (pp. 111-17). Leeds: 
Khalil, Aziz (1985a). Communicative error evaluation:  native speakersÕ evaluation and 
interpretation of written errors of Arab EFL learnners. TESOL Quarterly, 19(2), 335-51.
Khalil, Esam N. (1985b). News discourse:  a strategy of recasting. Journal of Pragmatics, 
9(5), 621-43.
Khan, Geoffrey (1989). The Pronunciation of mh- before dages in the Medieval Tiberian 
Hebrew Reading Tradition. Journal of Semitic Studies, 34(2), 433-441.
Khan, Geoffrey (1990). The Historical Development of the Structure of Medieval Arabic 
Petitions. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 53(1), 8-30.
Kharma, Nayef (1983a). A contrastive analysis of the use of verb forms in English and 
Arabic. Studies in Descriptive Linguistics 10, 103-137.
Kharma, Nayef N. (1983b). Contextualization and the Bilingual LearnerÕs Dictionary. In 
Reinhard R. K. Hartmann (Ed.), International Conference on Lexicography,  (pp. 199-
206). Exeter: Niemeyer.
Khawam, Rene R. (1988). The Thousand and One Nights and the Creative Aspect of 
Language. Le Langage et lÕHomme, 23(1 (66)), 66-70.
Kheshaifaty, Hamza M. J. (1989) The Grammatical Relations of Concord in the Makkan 
Dialect of Arabic: A Sociolinguistic Study. Ph.D., University of Reading (United 
Kingdom).
Khisham, Abu-Sharar (1990). OfitsialÕnye obrashcheniia v russkom i arabskom iazykakh. 
Russkii Iazyk za Rubezhom, 4, 76-79.
Khrisat, Abdulhafeth (1991). A note on English borrowings from Arabic. International 
Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 8.2, 21-28.
Khuri, Fuad I. (1981). Classification, Meaning, and Usage of Arabic Status and Kinship 
Terms. Festschrift for Ihsan ÔAbbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. In Wadad Al-Qadi (Eds.), 
Studia Arabica et Islamica. (pp. 277-292). Beirut: American University of Beirut.
Kilani-Schoch, Marianne (1984). The Lexical Base in Classic and Tunesian Arabic. 
Bulletin de la Section de Linguistique de la Faculte des Lettres de Lausanne, 6, 147-161.
Kilani-Schoch, Marianne (1988a). Discontinuite ou continuite de la base morphologique en 
arabe classique et en arabe tunisien? Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 19, 81-92.
Kilani-Schoch, Marianne (1988b). Discontinuity or Continuity of the Morphological Basis 
in Classical Arabic and in Tunisian Arabic? Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 19, 81-92.
Kilani-Schoch, Marianne, & Dressler, Wolfgang (1986a). Metathese im arabischen Dialekt 
von Tunis. In Dieter Kastovsky & Aleksander Szwedek (Eds.), Linguistics across 
Historical and Geographical Boundarids:  In Honour of Jacek Fisiak on the Occasion of 
His Fiftieth Birthday, I:  Linguistic Theory and Historical Linguistics; II:  Descriptive, 
Contrastive and Applied Linguistics (pp. 947-961). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Kilani-Schoch, Marianne, & Dressler, Wolfgang U. (1986b). Metathese et conversion 
morphologiques en arabe tunisien. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und 
Kommunikationsforschun, 39(1), 61-75.
Killean, Carolyn G. (1970). Classical Arabic. In Thomas A. Sebeok & others (Eds.), 
Current Trends in Linguistics, VI:  Linguistics in So. West Asia and No. Africa (pp. 413-
438). The Hague: Mouton.
Killean, Carolyn G. (1980). Demonstrative variation in oral media Arabic in Egypt. Studies 
in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 165-78.
Killean, Carolyn G. (1984). The Development of Western Grammars in Arabic. Journal of 
Near Eastern Studies, 43(3), 223-230.
Kinberg , Naphtali (1987). The Concepts of Elevation and Depression in Medieval Arabic 
Phonetic Theory. Zeitschrift fur ARabische Linguistik, 17(1987), 7-20.
Kinberg, Naphtali (1988). Some Temporal, Aspectual, and Modal Features of the Arabic 
Structure la-qad + Prefix Tense Verb. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 108(2), 
291-295.
Kinberg, Naphtali, & Abu-Khadra, Fahid (1987). Causal and Adversative Meanings of the 
Particle lakin in Arabic. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 107(4), 761-765.
Kirk, George (1979). Communication in Classical Islam. In Harold Dwight 
Lasswell,Daniel Lerner, & Hans Speier (Eds.), Propaganda and Communication in World 
History (pp. 348-380). Honolulu: UP of Honolulu.
Kmetova, Tanya and Sciriha, Lydia (1992). Why Bother About Those Tenses? Contrastive 
Linguistics, 17(3), 45-57.
Knauf, Ernst Axel (1984). Zum Vordringen des Arabischen im Libanon vor dem Islam. 
Die Welt des Orients: Wissenschaftliche Beitrage zur Kunde des Morgenlandes, 15, 119-
122.
Knecht, Pierre (1987). Toward Good Usage of Creolization. Etudes Creoles, 10(2), 159-
166.
Koch, Barbara Johnstone (1981) Repetition in Discourse: Cohesion and Persuasion in 
Arabic Argumentative Prose. Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Koch, Barbara J. (1983a). Arabic lexical couplets and the evolution of synonymy. General 
Linguistics, 23(1), 51-61.
Koch, Barbara Johnstone (1983b). Presentation as proof:  the language of Arabic rhetoric. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 25(1), 47-60.
Koch, Barbara J. (1984). Rhetorical Style in Arabic:  an addendum to ÒThe least you 
should know about ArabicÓ. TESOL Quarterly, 18(3), 542-45.
Koch, Barbara J.,Thomas-Ruzic, Maria, & Thompson-Panos, Karyn (1984). Comments 
on Karyn Thompson-Panos and Maria Thomas-RuzicÕs ÔThe Least You Should Know 
about Arabic: Implications for the ESL Writing InstructorÕ: A Reader Reacts. TESOL 
Quarterly, 18(3), 542-547.
Koda, Keiko (1986) Cognitive processes in second language reading. Ph.D., University of 
Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
Koda, Keiko (1988). Cognitive Process in Second Language Reading:  Transfer of L1 
Reading Skills and Strategies. Second Language Research, 4(2), 133-156.
Koda, Keiko (1989). Effects of L1 Orthographic Representation on L2 Phonological 
Coding Strategies. Journal of Psycholinguistic Research, 18(2), 201-222.
Kontzi, Reinhold (1981). Gibt es reines Maltesisch? In Wolfgang Pockl (Eds.), 
Europaische Mehrsprachigkeit: Festschrift zum 70. Geburtstag von Mario Wandruszka. 
(pp. 63-71). Tubingen: Niemeyer.
Kontzi, Reinhold (1982). Maltesisch: Sprachgeschichtliche und areallinguistische Aspekte. 
In P. Sture Ureland (Eds.), Die Leistung der Strataforschung und der Kreolistik: 
Typologische Aspekte der Sprachkontakte. (pp. 63-87). Tubingen: Niemeyer.
Koplewitz, Immanuel (1990). The Use and Integration of Hebrew Lexemes in Israeli 
Spoken Arabic. In Durk Gorter,Jarich F. Hoekstra,Lammert G. Jansma, & Jehannes 
Ytsma (Eds.), Fourth International Conference on Minority Languages (pp. 181-195). 
Clevedon, UK: Multilingual Matters.
Koplewitz, Immanuel (1992). Arabic in Israel: The Sociolinguistic Situation of IsraelÕs 
Arab Minority. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 98, 29-66.
Kormos, Charles,Lawson, Edwin D., & Ben Brit, Joseph (1992). Most Common 
Surnames in Israel: Arabic and Jewish, I. Onomastica Canadiana, 74(1), 23-38.
Kouloughli, D. (1988). LÕordre des mots dans le syntagme nominal. Relpred: Etudes sur 
lÕordre des mots, Collection ERA 642 (UA 04 1028) UniversitŽ de Paris, 7, 129-162.
Kouloughli, Djamel-Eddine (1982). Traitement formel de lÕarabe: Contributions a lÕetude 
de la phrase nominale en arabe classique. T. A. Informations: Revue Internationale du 
Traitement Automatique du Langage, 23, 3-39.
Kouloughli, D. E. (1986a). On the Internal Structure of ÒHeavyÓ Syllables in Classical 
Arabic. Revue quebecoise de linguistique, 16(1), 129-155.
Kouloughli, D. E. (1986b). Sur la structure interne des syllabes ÔlourdesÕ en arabe 
classique. Revue Quebecoise de Linguistique, 16(1), 129-155.
Kouloughli, D. E. (1987). Vers un traitement automatique de la predication verbale en 
arabe standard moderne. T. A. Informations: Revue Internationale du Traitement 
Automatique du Langage, 28(1), 23-45.
Kraemer, Roberta, & Olshtain, Elite (1989). Perceived ethnolinguistic vitality and language 
attitutes: the Israeli setting. Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, 10(3), 
197-212.
Krahl, Gunther (1986). Arabic equivalents of german adjectival compositions  (Die 
arabischen Aquivalente deutscher Adjektivkomposita). Linguistiche Studien, Reihe A: 
Arbeitsberichte, 148, 135-45.
Krasovitskaya, T. Yu. (1979). ÒThe First Task Is LiteracyÓ. Voprosy istorii, 53(5), 107-
120.
Krieg, Laurence John (1980) Phonetic classification:  the acoustic structure of strident 
fricatives. Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Krier, Fernande (1990). Sprachen im arealen Kontakt. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 43(6), 797-804.
Kronholm, Trygve (1989). Dedication and Devotion:  The Introduction fo the Kitab al-Jalis 
a-Salih wa-lanis an-nasih, Ascribed to Sibt ibn al-Jawzi. Orientalia Suecana (OS), 38-
39(1989-1990), 81-91.
Kropfitsch, Lorenz (1980). Semantische Tendenzen im Neuhocharabischen. Zeitschrift fur 
Arabische Linguistik, 5, 118-136.
Kropfitsch, Lorenz (1981). F. Corriente: Diccionario espanol-arabe. 1970; Diccionario 
arabe-espanol. 1977. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 6, 75-80.
Krotkoff, George (1989). Majhura/Mahmusa Revisited. Al-ÔArabiyya, 22(1-2), 217-218.
Kugelmass, S., & Lieblich, A. (1979). Impact of Learning to Read on Directionality in 
Perception:  A Further Cross-Cultural Analysis. Human Development, 22(6), 406-415.
Kuiryagawa, Fukuko,Sawashima, Masayuki,Niimi, Seiji, & Hirose, Hajime (1986). An 
Electromygraphic Study of the Emphatic Consonants in Standard Jordanian Arabic. Annual 
Bulletin, Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics, 20, 23-31.
Kunitzsch, Paul (1987). Namenkundliche Anmerkungen zu P. Bancourt, Les 
MusulmansÉ. Zeitschrift fur Romanische Philologie, 103(3-4), 257-70.
Kuriyagawa, Fukuko (1983). Tables of Arabic Words for Experimental Phonetics. Annual 
Bulletin, Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics, 17, 1-12.
Kuriyagawa, Fukuko (1984). The Features of /k/ and /q/ in Cairo Standard Arabic. Annual 
Bulletin, Research Institute of Logopedics and Phoniatrics, 18, 65-73.
Kuriyagawa, Fukuko,Sawashima, Masayuki,Niimi, Seiji, & Hirose, Hajime (1988). 
Electromyographic Study of Emphatic Consonants in Standard Jordanian Arabic. Folia 
Phoniatrica: International Journal of Phoniatrics, Speech Therapy and Communication 
Pathology, 40(3), 117-122.
Kusterer, Hermann (1990). Hellfire Pass or the Desire to Find. Lebende Sprachen, 35(1), 
9-10.
Kyamilev, S. Kh. (1979). The Overlapping Means for Expressing Noun Declension and 
Verbal Mood in Arabic. Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 28(1), 82-90.
Kyamilev, S. Kh, & MelÕnikov, G. P. (1983). The Problem of Minimal Sense-Distinctive 
and Significative Units in Semitic Languages. Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 32(5), 87-96.
Labadi, Ayatollah (1990) A Contrastive Study of Gender in English and Arabic: 
Pedagogical and Sociolinguistic Implications. Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin.
Labarta, Ana (1985). Algunos aspectos del dialecto arabe valenciano en el s.XVI a la luz 
del fondo de documentos del AHN. In Actas de las II Jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica 
(pp. 281-315). Madrid: Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura.
Lahlou, Moncef (1991) A Morpho-Syntactic Study of Code-Switching between Moroccan 
Arabic and French. Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Lakhdar-Barka, Ferida (1980). The Gemination of the Causative Verb in Algerian Arabic. 
Rev. des Langues, 3, 89-103.
Lakshmanan, Usha (1986). The role of parametric variation in adult second language 
acquisition:  a study of the Òpro-dropÓ parameter. Publications of the Modern Language 
Association, 2(1), 97-118.
Landau, Jacob M. (1987). Hebrew and Arabic in the state of Israel: political aspects of the 
language issue. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 67, 117-33.
Langer, Michael (1989a). Anmerkungen zur Anaphorik und Kataphorik der Partikel haitu 
im modernen Hocharabisch. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und 
Kommunikationsforschung, 42(6), 816-823.
Langer, Michael (1989b). On Causal Constructions in the Strict Sense of the Term in 
Modern High Arabic. Liguistische Studien, 189, 40-53.
Langhade, Jacques (1981). Grammar, Logic, Linguistic Studies of al-Farabi. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 365-77.
Langhade, Jacques (1985). Mentalite Grammairienne et Mentalite Logicienne au IVe Siecle. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 15, 104-117.
Larcher, Peirre (1985). You Have Said ÒDelocutiveÓ? Languages, 20(80), 99-124.
Larcher, Pierre (1990). Elements pragmatiques dans la theorie grammaticale arabe post-
classique. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 
May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic 
Grammar (pp. 195-214). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Larcher, Pierre (1991). Quand, en arabe, on parlait de lÕarabe . . ., II: Essai sur la categorie 
de ÔinsaÕ (vs habar). Arabica: Journal of Arabic and Islamic Studies, 38(2), 246-273.
Larcher, Pierre (1992). La Particule lakinna vue par un grammairien arabe due XIIIe siecle:  
Ou comment une description de detail sÕinscrit dans une Ôtheorie pragmatiqueÕ. 
International Journal for the History of the Language Sciences, 19(no. 1 1992), 1-24.
Larcher, Pierre (1993). Les Arabisants et la categorie de ÔinsaÕ: Histoire dÕune 
ÔoccultationÕ. International Journal for the History of the Language Sciences, 20(2-3), 259-
282.
Larcher, Pierre, & Girod, Alain (1990). Passif grammatical, passif periphrastique et 
categorie dÕauxiliaire en arabe classique moderne. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 37(2), 
137-150.
Larcher, Pierre, & Plancade, Michele (1992). La ÔcoteÕ nÕest pas ÔfacileÕ...ou, les ecueils 
ÔphonographiquesÕ dÕun apprentissage de lÕarabe ÔclassiqueÕ. Les Langues Modernes 
(LanM), 86(no. 3 1992), 41-48.
Lardiere, Donna (1992). On the Linguistic Shaping of Thought: Another Response to 
Alfred Bloom. Language in Society, 21(2), 231-251.
Laroui, RÕKia (1984). The relationship between native and foreign languages in Morocco. 
Les sciences de lÕeducation pour lÕere nouvelle(1-2), 173-82.
Latham, J. Derek (1982). New light on the scansion of an old Andalusian muwassah. 
Journal of Semitic Studies, 27(1), 61-75.
Latham, J. Derek , & Bloomfield, Barry Cambray (1980). Loanwords from the Arabic in 
the Latin translation of the Calendrier de Cordoue. In Middle East Studies and Libraries: A 
Felicitation Volume for Prof. J.D. Pearson (pp. 103-13). London: Mansell.
Laufer, Asher, & Baer, Thomas (1988). The Emphatic and Pharyngeal Sounds in Hebrew 
and in Arabic. Language and Speech, 31(2), 181-205.
Law, Vivien (1990). Indian Influence on Early Arab Phonetics-or Coincidence? In Kees 
Versteegh & Michael Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar, II (pp. 215-
227). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Le Clezio, Yves (1990). The Phonetic Impact of Arabic on Shilluk. Speech, Hearing and 
Language, 4, 257-271.
Lederman, Shlomo (1982). Problems in a prosodic analysis of Hebrew morphology. 
Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 12(1), 141-63.
Leemhuis, F. (1982). QurÕanic siggil and Aramaic sgyl. Journal of Semitic Studies, 27(1), 
47-56.
Lentzner, Karin R. (1981). Semantic Motivation for Arabic Dative-Movement. Al-
ÔArabiyya, 14, 19-23.
LeTourneau, Mark S. (1993). Case-Making and Binding of Subject Clitics in Arabic 
Complement Clauses. In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics, V (pp. 261-292). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamis.
Levin, Aryeh (1985). The Distinction between Nominal and Verbal Sentences According to 
the Arab Grammarians. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 15, 118-127.
Levin, Aryeh (1987). The particle la as a object marker in some Arabic dialects of the 
Galilee. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 17, 31-40.
Levtzion, Nehemia, & Hopkins, J.F.P. (1980). Arabic Reference and Grammar: Corpus 
of Arabic Sources for West African History. New York: Cambrige Univ. Press.  
Lewis, Bernard (1980). Translation from Arabic. Proceedings of the American 
Philosophical Society, 124(1), 41-47.
Li, Charles, & Thompson, Sandra (1977). Mechanisms for the development of copula 
morphemes. In Charles Li (Eds.), Mechanisms for Syntactic Change (pp. 419-444). 
Austin: University of Texas Press.
Liebman, JoAnne D. (1992). Toward a New Contrastive Rhetoric:  Differences between 
Arabic and Japanese Rhetorical Instruction. Journal of Second Language Writing, 1(no. 2), 
141-165.
Lindau, Mona,Norlin, Kjell, & Svantesson, Jan-Olof (1985). Cross-Linguistic Differences 
in Diphthongs. UCLA Working Papers in Phonetics, 61, 40-44.
Lindau, Mona,Norlin, Kjell, & Svantesson, Jan-Olof (1990). Some Cross-Linguistic 
Differences in Diphthongs. Journal of the International Phonetic Association, 20(1), 10-14.
Lindemann, Margarete (1987). The Description of Spanish Words in the First Spanish-
Latin Dictionary. Zeitschrift fur romanische Philogie, 103(5-6), 500-506.
List, Harald (1987). Notes on the designation of tent, clothing, and cooking utensils for 
Near East bedouins  (Notizen zu den Bezeichnungen von Zelt, Kleidung und Kochgeschirr 
bei nahostlichen Beduinen). Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 17, 69-90.
Lodhi, Abdulaziz Y. (1984). The Status of Arabic in East Africa. Orientalia Suecana, 33-
35, 257-262.
Loi Corvetto, Ines (1982). LÕintonazione nellÕarabo siriano. Lingua e Stile: Trimestrale di 
Linguistica e Critica Letteraria, 17.
Lokkegaard, Frede (1984). ÔAsre ha-Õis: A Morphological and Etymological Essay. 
Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 263-268.
Lokkegaard, Frede (1987). Sectio as a Transitory Loanword in Arabic Administration. 
Acta Orientalia, 48, 7-14.
Lope Blanch, Juan M. (1984). Depronominalization of the Relatives. Hispanic Linguistics, 
1(2), 257-272.
Lopez-Morilla, Consuelo (1994). Aljamiado and the MoriscosÕ Islamicization of Spanish. 
In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 17-23). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Lorch, Marjorie Perlman, & Meara, Paul (1989). How people listen to languages they 
donÕt know. Language Sciences, 11(4), 343-353.
Lori, Ali Abdulrehman (1990) Self-Concept, Tolerance of Ambiguity, English 
Achievement, Arabic Achievement and Overall School Achievement as Factors 
Contributing to Bahraini High School SeniorsÕ Attitudes toward Learning English as a 
Foreign Language. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Lory, P. (1988). A Few Remarks on the Expression of Time, Space, and the Human Body 
in Literary Arabic. Revue de Phonetique Appliquee, 87-89, 173-176.
Lundin, A. G. (1980). Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives in Semitic Languages. 
Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 29(3), 118-122.
MÕBarek, Mohamed Nait, & Sankoff, David (1988a). Arabic/French Mixed Discourse:  
Borrowing or Code-Switching? The Canadian Journal of Linguistics, 33(2), 143-154.
MÕBarek, Mohamed Nait, & Sankoff, David (1988b). Le Discours mixte arabe/francais: 
Emprunts ou alternances de langue? Canadian Journal of Linguistics, 33(2), 143-154.
MaÕayergi, Hassan A. (1986). History of translations of the meanings of the Holy QuÕran 
into the Polish language. Journal-Institute of Muslim Minority Affairs, 7(2), 538-46.
Macdonald, M. C. (1992). On the Placing of S in the Maghribi Abjad and the Khirbet al-
SamraÕ ABC. Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS), 37(no. 2), 155-166.
Macdonald, M. C. A. (1991). HU 501 and the Use of s3 in Taymanite. Journal of Semitic 
Studies (JSS), 36(1), 11-36.
Machozi, Tshopo (1989). Le Parler kiswahili de Kisangani. Annales Aequatoria, 10, 141-
152.
Macmillan, Ewen Graham (1985a) Priorities Underlying the Evolution of an Arabic Short 
Vowel System: CantineauÕs Rweli Idiolects as Exponents of the Chronological Ordering of 
Linguistic Shifts. Ph.D., Princeton University.
Macmillan, Ewen Graham (1985b) Priorities underlying the evolution of an Arabic short 
vowel system: CantineauÕs Rweli idiolects as exponents of the chronological ordering of 
linguistic shifts. Ph.D., Princeton University.
Mahadin, Radwan Salim (1982) The Morphophonemics of the Standard Arabic 
Triconsonantal Verbs. Ph.D, University of Pennsylvania.
Mahadin, Radwan S. (1989). Doublets in Arabic:  Notes towards a Diachronic 
Phonological Study. Language Sciences, 11(1), 1-25.
Maher, Moustafa (1979a). Administrative and Business Languages of the World. Lebende 
Sprachen, 24(3), 126-131.
Maher, Moustafa (1979b). Das moderne Arabisch. Lebende Sprachen: Zeitschrift fur 
Fremde Sprachen in Wissenschaft und Praxis, 24, 126-131.
Mahmoud, Abdelgawad T. (1986a). Passivization:  Lexical vs Syntactic Treatment. In 
Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL) (pp. 369-379). 
Columbus: Ohio State University.
Mahmoud, Abelgawad T. (1986b). Passivization: Lexical vs. Syntactic Treatment. In Fred 
Marshall,Ann M. Miller,Zheng-sheng Zhang, & Richmond H. Thomason (Ed.), The Third 
Eastern States Conference on Linguistics,  (pp. 369-379). University of Pittsburgh, 
Pittsburgh, PA: Ohio State University Press.
Mahmoud, Abdelgawad Tawfik (1989) A Comparative Study of Middle and Inchoative 
Alternations in Arabic and English. Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh.
Mahmoud, Abdelgawad T. (1991). A Contrastive Study of Middle and Unaccusative 
Constructions in Arabic and English. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid (Eds.), 
Perspective son Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 119-134). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Mahmoud, N.C. (1985). Landmarks in Arabic. Verbatim, 12(2), 2.
Mahmoud, Samir Moustafa (1980) Terms of status in colloquial Cairene Arabic: a study in 
educational linguistics. Ph.D., University of Illinois at urbana-Champaign.
Mahmoud, Youssef (1979) The Arabic Writing System and the Sociolinguistics of 
Orthographic Reform. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Mahmoud, Youssef (1980). On the Reform of the Arabic Writing System. Journal of 
Reading, 23(8), 727-729.
Mahmoud, Youssef (1981). The Arabic Writing System and Deliberate Orthographic 
Change. Al-ÔArabiyya, 14, 79-84.
Mahmoud, Youssef (1982). Towards a functional Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 15(1-2), 82-89.
Mahmoud, Youssef (1986). Arabic after Diglossia. In Joshua A. Fishman,Andree 
Tabouret-Keller,Michael Clyne,Bh. Krishnamurti, & Mohamed Abdulaziz (Eds.), The 
Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the Occasion of His 65th 
Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the Sociology of 
Language (pp. 239-251). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Mahmud, Ushari (1982). Language Spread as a wavelike Diffusion Process:  Arabic in the 
Southern Sudan. In Richard Cooper (Eds.), Language Spread:  Studies in Diffusio and 
Social Change (pp. 158-183). Bloomington, IN: Indiana UP, Center for Applied 
Linguistics.
Mahmud, Ushari Ahmad (1979) Variation and change in the aspectual system of Juba 
Arabic. Unpublished Ph.D. Georgetown University.
Mahmud, Ushari A. (1980) Linguistic Change and Variation in the Aspectual System of 
Juba Arabic. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Mairi, Lies (1983). The number marking system of Algiers Arabic. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 11, 48-71.
Mairi, Lies (1987). A Bibliography of Algerian Arabic Linguistics. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 17, 96-107.
Majdi, Basim (1990). Word Order and Proper Government in Classical Arabic.  Papers 
from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives 
on Arabic Linguistics, I. (pp. 127-153). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Majdi, Basim, & Winston, Millicent (1993). Gemination and Antigemination in Iraqi. In 
Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V (pp. 163-194). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Majdi, Basim, & Winston, Millicent (1994). Rules of Phonology: Pre- or Post-Syllable 
Structure? In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on 
Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 185-
214). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Majdi, Basim Badi (1988) Iraqi Arabic Morphophonemics. Ph.D., University of 
Connecticut.
Makki, Elrabih Massoud (1983) The Lebanese dialect of Arabic: Southern Region. Ph.D., 
Georgetown University.
Malina, Renate (1987). Zum schriftlichen Gebrauch des kairinischen Dialekts anhand 
ausgewŠhlter Texte von Sacdaddiin Wahba. In Berlin: Klaus Schwarz Verlag.
Malkiel, Yakov (1983). Some Second and Third Thoughts on Luso-Hispanic 
almuerzo/almoco ÔLunchÕ, with Special Attention to Older Sp. yantar/Ptg. jantar ÔDinnerÕ. 
Romance Philology, 36(3), 393-403.
Mangion, Giovanni (1985). 25: Malta. Rivista Italiana di Dialettologia: Lingue Dialetti 
Societa, 9, 369-381.
Mangion, Giovanni (1990). 25: Malta. Rivista Italiana di Dialettologia: Lingue Dialetti 
Societa, 4, 257-266.
Mansour, Jacob (1985). The particle baqa in the Judaeo-Arabic dialect of Baghdad. Journal 
of Arabic Linguistics, 14, 62-75.
Mansour, Jacob (1988). Vowel Distribution in the Judaeo-Arabic Dialect of Baghdad. 
Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 19, 60-73.
Marcos-Marin, Francisco (1981). Glosas romanicas a una gramatica del haz dialectal 
hispano-arabe. In Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica (pp. 109-113). Madrid: 
Inst. Hispano-Arabe de Cultura.
Marlow, Louise (1986). A translation from the Hilyat al-AwliyaÕ Wa-Tabaqat al-Asfiya by 
Abu NuÔaym al-Isfahani:  the life of Hatim al-Asamm. Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 29-46.
Marshad, Hassan A., & Suleiman, Saleh M. (1991). A Comparative Study of Swahili ni 
and Arabic kana as Copulative Elements. Language Sciences, 13(1), 21-37.
Martin, Charles B. (1987). New International Names on the Campus. Names, 35(2), 86-
94.
Martin, David (1983). An account of Ruwayn B. Ahmad from Al-SulamiÕs Tabaqat Al-
Sufiyya. Al-ÔArabiyya, 16(1-2), 27-55.
Martine, Vanhove,Caubet, Dominique, & Simeone-Senelle, Marie-claude (1989). Genre et 
Accord dans Quelques Dialectes Arabes. In Eliane Koskas & Danielle Leeman (Eds.), 
Genre et Language (pp. 39-66). Paris: 
Martinez Ruiz, Juan (1990). Los laqab de oficio en la Granada morisca y en la tradicion 
andalusi. Al- Qantara: Revista de Estudios Arabes, 11(2), 343-365.
Martins, Manoel Dias (1989). Catalan, a romanistic problem. Alfa, 33, 171-178.
Masson, Michel (1980). Borrowing and ideology in Modern Hebrew. Cahiers de lÕInstitut 
de Linguistique de Louvain, 6(1-2), 77-91.
Masson, Michel (1986). KUBOS:  A Greek word of Semitic origin?  (Kubos: un mot grec 
dÕorigine semitique?). La Linguistique, 22(2), 143-8.
Mattar, Hameed Ebrahim (1989) A Cross-Sectional Error Analysis Study of the Common 
Writing Errors Made by Adult Arabic-Speaking EFL Learners in Bahrain. Ph.D., 
University of East Anglia (U.K.).
Maury-Rouan, Claire (1980). Les Langues du Monde:  Diversite et Ressemblances. In 
Frederic Francois (Eds.), Linguistique (pp. 363-420). Paris: PU de France.
May, Janet (1980a) The Perception of Egyptian Fricatives. Ph.D., University of 
Connecticut.
May, Janet G. (1980b). Acoustic factors that may contribute to categorical perception. 
Haskins Laboratories Status Report on Speech Research, 63-64, 333-347.
May, Janet G. (1981). Acoustic factors that may contribute to categorical perception. 
Language and Speech, 24(3), 273-284.
McCarthy, John (1979a) Formal Problems in Semitic Phonology and Morphology. Ph.D., 
MIT.
McCarthy, John (1979b). On Stress and Syllabification. Linguistic Inquiry, 10(3), 443-
465.
McCarthy, John (1981). A prosodic theory of nonconcatenative morphology. Linguistic 
Inquiry, 12(3), 373-418.
McCarthy, John (1982). Prosodic templates, morphemic templates and morphemic tiers. In 
H. van der Hulst & N. Smith (Eds.), The Structure of Phonological Representations (pp. 
191-223). 
McCarthy, John (1983). A Prosodic Account of Arabic Broken Plurals. In I.R. Dihoff 
(Eds.), Current Trends in African Linguistics Dordrecht: Foris.
McCarthy, John (1986). OCP Effects:  Gemination and Antigemination. Linguistic 
Inquiry, 17(2), 207-263.
McCarthy, J. (1989). Gutteral Phonolgoy. .
McCarthy, John (1990). Prosodic Morphology and Templatic Morphology. Papers from 
Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 1-54). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
McCarthy, John, & Prince, Alan (1988a). Prosodic morphology and templatic 
morphology. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics 
(pp. 1-54). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
McCarthy, John, & Prince, Alan (1988b). The Prosodic Morphology of Arabic Broken 
Plurals. .
McCarthy, John J. (1980). A note on the accentuation of Damascene Arabic. Studies in the 
Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 77-98.
McCarthy, John J. (1983). A Prosodic Account of Arabic Broken Plurals. Selection of 
Papers Read at 11th Annual Conf. on Afr. Ling., Apr. 10-12,1980, Boston University. In 
Ivan R. Dihoff (Eds.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, I (pp. 289-320). 
Dordrecht: Foris.
McCarthy, John J. (1990). Foot and Word in Prosodic Morphology:  The Arabic Broken 
Plural. Natural Language & Linguistic Theory, 8(2), 209-283.
McCarthy, John J. (1991). Semitic Gutturals and Distinctive Feature Theory. In Bernard 
Comrie & Mushira EId (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 63-91). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
McCarus, E., & Rammuny, Raji (1968). Word Count of Elementary Modern Literary 
Arabic Textbooks. Studies in Language and Language Behavior, 7(1968), 2-180.
McCarus, Ernest N. (1983). Identifying the meters of Arabic poetry. Al-ÔArabiyya, 16(1-
2), 57-83.
McCarus, Ernest N. (1987). The Study of Arabic in the United States: A History of Its 
Development. Al-ÔArabiyya, 20(1-2), 13-27.
McClellan, John (1981). Two interpreters. Word ways, 14(1), 26-8.
Mdibeh, Abdelaziz (1987). Fertilisation ou integration. Meta, 32(3), 278-84.
Mehdi, Mohamed Farhat (1981) The Interference of Arabic in the Use of English 
Prepositions. Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin.
Meiseles, Gustav (1980). Educated spoken Arabic and the Arabic language continuum. 
Archivum Linguisticum, 11(2), 118-48.
Meiseles, Gustav (1981). Hybrid versus symbiotic construction: a case study of 
comtemporary Arabic. Linguistics, 19, 11-12(249-250) 1077-93.
Melouk, Mohammed (1989) The Acquisition of Modal Auxiliaries in English as a Foreign 
Language: The Case of Moroccan Learners. Ph.D., University of Lancaster (United 
Kingdom).
Memmedova, Sh. (1984). Nouns Used Only in Plural in Modern Literary Arabic. Izvestiya 
Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i iskusstvo, 1, 102-105.
Memmedova, Sh. E. (1986). Dual Plural of Nouns in Contemporary Literary Arabic. 
Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i isskusstvo, 4, 70-72.
Menacere, Mohammed (1992). Arabic Metaphor and Idiom in Translation. Meta:  Journal 
des TRaducteurs/TranslatorsÕ Journal, 37(no. 3, 1992 Sept.), 567-572.
Menocal, Maria Rosa (1982). The etymology of old Provencal trobar, trobador: a return to 
the ÒThird SolutionÓ. Romance Philology, 36(2), 137-53.
Meshadijev, Gh. (1982). Etymological analysis of some Azerbaijani paleotoponyms. 
Izvestiya Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk  i iskusstov, 1, 72-6.
Messiha, Girgis Z. (1985). Some phonological problems that face Arab learners of 
English. Studies in African Linguistics(supplement 9), 224-7.
Meyer-Hermann, Reinhard (1988). ?Se debe la posposicion del sujeto en el espanol a una 
influencia arabe? Revista de Filologia Espanola, 68(1-2), 67-96.
Mezei, Regina (1989). Somali Language and Literacy. Language Problems and Language 
Planning, 13(3), 211-223.
Meziani, Ahmed (1989). A Pedagogical Sketch of Tense Usage in Moroccan Arabic. 
Faculte Sciences Education, 27(3), 240-244.
Michel, Andrew John (1988) A Case Study of the Composing Processes of Advanced 
Spanish, Chinese, and Arabic ESL Writers. Ph.D., University of Kansas.
Michel, Xavier (1984). LÕArabe au sud du Sahara. Franzosisch Heute, 15(2), 143-162.
Mikdadi, Mohammad Fakhri Ahmad (1985) An investigation of oral reading miscues 
generated by bilingual college students reading expository materials in Arabic and English. 
Ph.D., Indiana University.
Mikhailova, Stoika (1980a). Article use in Bulgarian and Arabic-A contrastive study. 
Contrastive Linguistics, 5(2), 30-5.
Mikhailova, Stoika (1980b). Chlenuvaneto v bulgarskiia i arabskiia ezik: Niakoi osobenosti 
i supostavki. Sapostavitelno Ezikoznanie/SopostavitelÕnoe Jazykoznanie/Contrastive 
Linguistics, 5(2), 30-35.
Mikitenko, E.O. (1981). Problems of Arab syntax in A. Yu. KrimsÕkiiÕs research. 
Movoznavstvo, 15(5(89)), 80-3.
Miled, Mohamed (1987). Evaluation of an Evolution. Le Francais dans le Monde, 
27(supplement 2), 46-8.
Miller, Ann M. (1986a). Loss of nominal case endings in the modern Arabic sedentary 
dialects. Ohio State University Working Papers in Linguistics, 34, 56-83.
Miller, Ann M. (1986b). The origin of the modern Arabic sedentary dialects:  an evaluation 
of several theories. Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 47-74.
Miller, Ann M. (1987a). Morphological Idiosyncrasies in Classical Arabic:  Evidence 
Favoring Lexical Representations Over Rules. In Fred Marshall,Ann M. Miller, & Zheng-
Sheng Zhang (Eds.), Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL) 
(pp. 393-404). Columbus: Ohio State University Press.
Miller, Ann M. (1987b). Phonetic Characteristics of Levantine Arabic Geminates with 
Differing Morpheme and Syllable Structures. Ohio State University Working Papers in 
Linguistics, 36, 120-140.
Miller, Catherine (1985). The Stakes in the Arabization of Southern Sudan. Mediterranean 
Peoples, 33(Oct-Dec), 43-53.
Miller, Catherine (1987). Analyse des usages de lÕarabe dans une communaute non 
arabophone: Le Cas du tribunal coutumier de Juba. Actes du VIe Colloque internat. 
ÒAcquisition dÕune langue etrangere: Perspective et recherchesÓ. In Hoda Blanc,Michele Le 
Douaron, & Daniel Veronique (Eds.), SÕapproprier une langue etrangere (pp. 295-306). 
Paris: Didier.
Miller, M. (1984). On the Perception of Rhythm. Journal of Phonetics, 12(1), 75-83.
Miller, Max Eugene (1981) Interlanguage Simplification and Metropolitanization. Ph.D., 
The University of Texas at Austin.
Mir Alam, Y. (1983). The Arabic Lexicon: Statistical Study of the Role of the Consonants 
in Arabic Roots. Damascus: University.  
Mir Alam, Y. (1988). Morphological analysis of the Arabic langauge system. Institut 
RŽgional des Sciences de lÕInformatique et des TŽlŽcommunications: Proceedings, 2, 12-
53.
Mitchell, Timothy (1981). The Phonology of Weak Verbs: A Simple Diagram of Rules. Al-
ÔArabiyya, 14, 11-18.
Mitchell, T.F. (1980). Dimensions of style in a grammar of educated spoken Arabic. 
Archivum Linguisticum, 11(2), 89-106.
Mitchell, T.F. (1982). More than a matter of Òwriting with the learned, pronouncing with 
the vulgarÓ some preliminary observations on the Arabic Koine. In Standard Languages: 
Spoken and Written (pp. 123-55). Manchester, Totowa: X: Manchester University Press; 
Barnes & Noble.
Mitchell, Terence Frederick (1984). Soziolinguistische und stilistische Aspekte des 
gesprochenen  Arabisch der Gebildeten (Educated Spoken Arabic) in Agypten und der 
Levante. Berlin: Akademie.  
Mitchell, T.F. (1985). Sociolinguistic and stylistic dimensions of the educated spoken 
Arabic of Egypt and the Levant. In Language Standards and Their Codification: Process 
and Application (pp. 42-57). Exeter: University of Exeter.
Mitchell, T.F. (1986). What is educated spoken Arabic? International Journal of the 
Sociology of Language, 61, 7-32.
Mitchell, T. F., & El-Hassan, Shahir (1994). Modality, Mood and Aspect in Spoken 
Arabic: With Special Reference to Egypt and the Levant. New York: Kegan Paul 
International.  
Mitleb, Fares (1985). Intelligibility of English ÒvoicingÓ produced by Arabs. Journal of 
Phonetics, 13(2), 117-22.
Mitleb, Fares (1987). The effect of training on the identification of English consonants by 
Arabs. Arab Journal for Humanities, 27(7), 290-300.
Mitleb, Fares (1992). Some Aspects of Arabic Duration. Journal of the International 
Phonetic Association, 22(1-2), 27-34.
Mitleb, Fares Mousa (1981) Segmental and Non-Segmental Structure in Phonetics: 
Evidence from Foreign Accent. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Mitleb, Fares M. (1984a). Voicing effect on vowel duration is not an absolute universal. 
Journal of Phonetics, 12(1), 23-7.
Mitleb, Fares M. (1984b). Vowel length contrast in Arabic and English: a spectrographic 
test. Journal of Phonetics, 12(3), 229-35.
MkrtcÕyan, Nerses (1980). Araberen pÕoxarutÕyunner Hayerenum (naz kÕan arabneri 
arsavankÕe Hayastan). HSS Git. Akademiayi Lraber, Armenian S.S.R., U.S.S.R., 447, 
49-64.
Mobaidin, Hosam Eddin Zakaria (1989) Tense and Aspect Transfer Errors: A New 
Analysis of Transfer Errors in English Compositions of Jordanian University Students. 
Ph.D., 
Moftah, Abdelfattah, & Roach, Peter (1988). Language Recognition from Distorted 
Speech:  Comparison of Techniques. Journal of the International Phonetic Association, 
18(1), 50-52.
Mohamed, AMgad Mahmoud (1992) A Handbook of Phoenician in the Arabic Language. 
Ph.D., New York University.
Mohamed, Fatma Abdel Hamid (1989) Arabic-English Code-Switching in the Speech of an 
Egyptian Child. Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania.
Mohammad , M.A. (1985). Stylistic rules in classical Arabic and the levels of grammar. 
Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9, 228-32.
Mohammad, M.A. (1985). Subject Extraction in Arabic. In Jeffrey  Goldberg,Susannah 
MacKay, & Michael T. Wescoat (Eds.), West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics, 
(pp. 220-227). Stanford: Stanford U. Dept. of Linguistics.
Mohammad, M.A. (1988). Nominative Case, I-Subjects, and Agreement. In Papers from 
the Parasession on Agreement Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society.
Mohammad, M. A. (1990). The Problem of Subject-Verb Agreement in Arabic:  Towards a 
Solution.  Papers from First Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid 
(Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I (pp. 95-125). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Mohammad, Mohammad Abdel-Latif (1989) The Sentential Structure of Arabic. Ph.D., 
University of Southern California.
Mohammad, Mahmoud Dawood (1983) The Semantics of Tense and Aspect in English and 
Modern Standard Arabic. Ph.D., 
Molina Rueda, Beatriz (1988). Contribucion de la Union de Academias Linguisticas Arabes 
a la facilitacion de la gramatica. Miscelanea de Estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II. 
FilologiaHebrea, Biblia y Judaismo, 37(1), 169-181.
Molino, J.,Soublin, F., & Tamine, J. (1979). Presentation: Metaphor Problems. 
Languages, 12(54), 5-40.
Mondejar, Jose (1982). Congrio and Zafio: A chapter on Mediterranean and Atlantic 
ichthyonymy. Vox Romanica, 41, 206-19.
Monroe, James (1994). Elements of Romance Prosody in the Poetry of Ibn Quzman. In 
Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 63-87). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Monroe, James T. (1970). Islam and Arabs in Spanish Scholarship. Leiden: E. J. Brill.  
Moore, John (1979). Arabic Derivational Morphology and Lexical Theory. Papers from the 
Regional Meetings, Chicago Linguistic Society, 15, 228-243.
Moore, John (1987). Word Order and Case Assignment in Modern Standard Arabic. CLS 
23: Papers from 23rd Annual Regional Meeting of Chicago Linguistic Society, 23(1), 283-
294.
Moore, John (1990). Doubled Verbs in Modern Standard Arabic. Papers from Second 
Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 55-93). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Morag, Shelomo (1992). The Structure of Semantic and Associative Fields in Biblical 
Hebrew and Classical Arabic. In Michael Fishbane & Emanuel Tov (Eds.), ÔShaÕarei 
TalmonÕ: Studies in the Bible, Qumran, and the Ancient Near East Presented to 
Shemaryahu Talmon. (pp. 165). Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.
Morales, Antonio (1987). Sobre los pronombres personales, I. Miscelanea de Estudios 
Arabes y Hebraicos: II. Filologia Hebrea, Biblia y Judaismo, 36(1), 349-366.
Morsly, Dalila (1985). National Language:  The Power of Words-Power Through Words. 
Mediterranean Peoples, 33(Oct-Dec), 79-88.
Morsly, Dalila, & Algeria, Multilingualism in (1986). Multilingualism in Algeria. In Joshua 
A. Fishman,Andree Tabouret-Keller,Michael Clyne,Bh. Krishnamurti, & Mohamed 
Abdulaziz (Eds.), The Fergusonian Impact: In Honor of Charles A. Ferguson on the 
Occasion of His 65th Birthday, I: From Phonology to Society; II: Sociolinguistics and the 
Sociology of Language (pp. 253-263). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Mortimer, Mildred (1988). Language and Space in the Fiction of Assia Djebar and Leila 
Sebbar. Research in African Literatures, 19(3), 301-311.
Mostert, Frederick J.A. (1990). A concise history of writing: a Synopsis. Van Taal tot 
Taal, 34(1), 30-42.
Mouakket, Ahmed (1986) Linguistics and Translation: Some Semantic Problems in Arabic-
English Translation. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Mourelle de Lema, Manuel (1982a). El valenciano, lengua autoctona. Thesaurus, 37(2), 
255-67.
Mourelle de Lema, Manuel (1982b). Valencian, an Autochthonous Language. Vox 
Romanica, 41, 206-219.
Moussa, A. (1971). Statistical study of Arabic roots in MuÔjam al-Sehah No. Kuwait 
Unviersity.
Moussa, A. (1972). Statistical study of Arabic roots in MuÔjam Lisan al-Arab No. Kuwait 
University.
Moussa, A. (1985). Occurrence probability of characters and entropy of Arabic language. 
Arab School of Sciences and Technology: Informatics, SP, 30-34.
Moussa, A., & Shaheen, A. (1973). Statistical study of Arabic roots in MuÔjam Taj al-
ÔAraous No. Kuwait University.
Moustafa, Margaret Heiss (1979). Perception Analysis. The Modern Language Journal, 
63(8), 435-441.
Moutaouakil, Ahmed (1984). ÒFocalizationÓ in Arabic: Toward a funtional analysis. 
Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics, 64(2-3), 115-76.
Moutaouakil, Ahmed (1985). Topic in Arabic:  Towards a Functional Anaysis. In M. 
Bolkestein.,C. de Groot, & J.L. Mackenzie (Eds.), Syntax and Pragmatics in Functional 
Grammar Providence, RI: Foris Publications.
Moutaouakil, Ahmed (1987). Pragmatic Functions in Functional Grammar of Arabic. 
Providence, RI: Foris Publications.  
Moutaouakil, Ahmad (1990). La Notcion dÕactes de langage dans la pensee linguistique 
arabe ancienne. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar. In Kees Versteegh 
& Michael Carter (Eds.), STudies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 229-238). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Mrayati, M. (1985). Statistical studies in Arabic linguistics. In Arab School on Science and 
Technology,  . Zabadani, Syria: 
Mrayati, Mohamed (1990). Statistical Studies in Arabic Linguistics. In Pierre A. MacKay 
(Eds.), Computers and the Arabic Language (pp. 190-200). New York: Hemisphere.
Mukattash, Lewis (1981). Problems in Error Analysis. Papers and Studies in Contrastive 
Linguistics, 13, 261-274.
Mukattash, Lewis (1984). Errors Made by Arab University Students in the Use of English 
Prepositions. Glottodidactica: An International Journal of Applied Linguistics, 17, 47-64.
Mukattash, Lewis (1985). Errors made by Arab university students in the use of English 
prepositions. Glottodidactica, 17, 47-64.
Mulder, Jan W.F. (1987). Effective methodology and effective phonological description. 
La Linguistique, 23(2), 19-42.
Muller, Hans (1979). Die modernen Schriftsprachen der westlichen islamischen Welt: 
Arabisch, Persisch und Turkisch.  Die Neueren Sprachen, 78, 181-193.
Muller, Kathrin (1980). ÔDawaligÕ oder ÔdawalihÕ? Anmerkungen zu einem Versfragment. 
Anton Spitaler zum siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. In Werner 
Diem & Stefan Wild (Eds.), Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik (pp. 114-122). 
Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Muller, Walter W. (1981). Some words for Cat in Semitic. Munchener Studien zur 
Sprachwissenschaft, 40, 139-41.
Muller, Walter W. (1983). Athiopische Marginalglossen zum sabaischen Worterbuch. In 
Stanislav Segert,Andras J. E. Bodrogligeti,Monica S. Devens,Maxine Rodinson,Sahle 
Sellasie, & Berhane Mariam (Eds.), Ethiopian Studies: Dedicated to Wolf Leslau on the 
Occasion of His Seventy-Fifth Birthday, November 14th, 1981 by Friends and Colleagues 
(pp. 275-285). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Munro, Murray J. (1992) Perception and Production of English Vowels by Native 
Speakers of Arabic. Ph.D., University of Alberta, Canada.
Munro, Murray J. (1993). Productions of English Vowels by Native Speakers of Arabic: 
Acoustic Measurements and Accentedness Ratings. Language and Speech, 36(1), 39-66.
Munzel, Kurt (1982). Die zusammengesetzte Verbalform kunt iÕmil in Kairener Arabisch: 
Versuch einer Erklarung. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 7, 76-78.
Musa, Monsur (1989). Purism and Correctness in the Bengali Speech Community. In 
Bjorn H. Jernudd & Michael J. Shapiro (Eds.), The Politics of Language Purism (pp. 105-
112). Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.
Mushira, Eid, & Holes, Clive (Ed.). (1993).  Perspecitves on Arabic Linguistics V. 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia:   John Benjamins.
Mustafa, Zahra Ahmad (1987) The Relative Gravity of the Different Types of Lexical 
Errors in Second Language Learning:  An Empirical Study. Ph.D., State University of 
New York at Stony Brook.
Mykytenko, Ie. O. (1981). Pytannia arabsÕkoho syntaksysu v doslidzhenniakh A. Iu. 
KrymsÕkoho. Movoznavstvo: Naukovo-Teoretychnyi Zhurnal Viddilennia Literatury, 
Movy i Mystetstvoznavstva Akademii Nauk Ukr,  5(Sept.-Oct.), 80-83.
Nahhas, Mustafa (1981). Madkhal ila dirasat al-sarf al-Õarabi Ôala dawÕ al-dirasat al-
lughawiyah al-muÕasirah.  
Nahmoud, N. C. (1985). Landmarks in Arabic. Verbatim, 12(2), 2.
Naiki, Ryoichi (1986). The Origins of the Name of God and Basmalah. Area and Culture 
Studies, 36, 45-60.
Naim-Sanbar, Samia (1985). Contacts of Usages and the Strategy of Communication-
Beirut. Mediterranean Peoples, 33(Oct-Dec), 55-63.
Nakshabandi, Anwar Mohammad H. (1981) A Descriptive Study of the Phonology and 
Morphology of the Abha Dialect. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Napitupulu, W.P. (1982). Each one teach ten:  literacy in Indonesia. Prospects, 12(2), 
213-20.
Nasr, Marlene (1982). Analyse par champs semantiques et traductions du vocabulaire 
national: Le Cas du discours nasserien. In Danielle Bonnaud-Lamotte (Eds.), Actes du 2e 
Colloque de lexicologie politique (pp. 783-784). Paris: Klincksieck.
Nassar, Husayn (1981). Dirasat lughawiyah. Beirut: Dar al-RaÕid al-ÕArabi.  
Natsopoulos , Dimitris (1987). Processing implications and presuppositions by 
schoolchildren and adults:  a developmental cross-linguistic comparison. Journal of 
Psycholinguistic Research, 16(2), 133-64.
Nebes, Norbert (1982a). Funktionsanalyse von Ôkaana yafÔalu. Hilesheim: Georg Olms.  
Nebes, Norbert (1982b). In al-muxaffafa und  al-lam al-fariqa. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
LInguistik, 7, 7-22.
Nebes, Norbert (1982c). In al-muxuffafa und al-lam al-fariqa I. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 7, 7-22.
Nebes, Norbert (1985). In al-muxaffafa und al-lam al-fariqa II. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 14, 7-44.
Nebes, Norbert (1987). In al-muxaffafa und al-lam al-fariqa III. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 16, 7-30.
Nelde, Peter Hans (1986). German as a Minority Language-The Comparability of 
Linguistic Contacts. Deutsche Sprache in Europa und Ubersee, 11, 251-273.
Ni Dheirg, Iosold (1988). Gneithe de Phleanail Teanga ins na Tiortha Arabacha. 
Teangeolas, 25, 15-18.
Nir, Raphael (1984). Linguistic and Sociolinguistic Problems in the Translation of 
Imported TV Films in Israel. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 48, 81-
97.
Noor, Hashim H. (1993). The Acquisition of Temporal Conjunctions by Saudi Arabian 
Learners of English. International Journal of Applied Linguistics, 3(1), 101-124.
Norlin, Kjell (1983). Acoustic Analysis of Fricatives in Cairo Arabic. Working Papers, 25, 
113-137.
Norlin, Kjell (1984). Acoustic Analysis of Vowels and Diphthongs in Cairo Arabic. 
Working Papers, 27, 185-208.
Norlin, Kjell (1985a). Acoustic Analysis of Vowels and Diphthongs in Cairo Arabic. 
Studies in African Linguistics, 9(Dec), 238-244.
Norlin, Kjell (1985b). Pharyngalization in Cairo Arabic. Working Papers, 28, 139-150.
Norlin, Kjell (1989). A Preliminary Description of Cairo Arabic Intonation of Statements 
and Questions. Speech Transmission Laboratory Quarterly Progress and Status Report, 
1(Jan-Mar), 47-49.
Nowak, Ulrich (1989). On the Relationship Between Language and Memory in Foreign-
Language Acquisition - An Empirical Study. Deutsch als Fremdsprache, 26(1), 15-20.
Nunez Cedeno, Rafael A. (1989). CV Phonology and Its Impact on Describing American 
Spanish Pronunciation. In Peter C. Bjarkman,Robert M. Hammond, & Humberto Lopez 
Morales (Eds.), American Spanish Pronunciation: Theoretical and Applied Perspectives 
(pp. 170-186). Washington D.C.: Georgetown University Press.
OÕConnor, M. (1986). Arabic loanwords in Nabatean Aramaic. Journal of Near Eastern 
Studies, 45(3), 213-29.
OÕConnor, R. M. (1989). A Simplified Arabic Transliteration. The Linguist, 28(6), 208-
209.
OÕHalloran, George (1979). Indigenous Literacy Among the Mandinko of West Africa. 
Journal of Reading, 22(6), 492-497.
Obeidat, Hussein Ali (1984). Relative Clauses in Standard Arabic Revisited. Studies in the 
Linguistic Sciences, 14(2), 77-96.
Obeidat, Mahmoud Suleiman (1989) Expressionalization in Standard Arabic (A Study in 
the Light of the Historical Development of Arabic Grammar, Rhetoric, Jurisprudence and 
Modern Approaches). Ph.D., University of Exeter (U.K.).
Obler, Loraine K. (1980). Classificatory structuralism in Medieval Arabic grammars: Az-
ZajjaziÕs 10th century ÒThe SentenceÓ. In Konrad Koerner & Robert H. Robins (Eds.), 
Progress in Linguistic Historiography (pp. 345-54). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Odden, David (1990). Phonology and Its Interaction with Syntax and Morphology. Studies 
in the Linguistic Sciences, 30(2), 69-108.
Odisho, Edward Y. (1979). Consonant Clusters and Abutting Consonants in English and 
Arabic Implications and Applications. System, 7(3), 205-210.
Odisho, Edward Y. (1988). SibawayhiÕs Dichotomy of Majhura/Mahmusa Revisited. Al-
ÔArabiyya, 21(1-2), 81-91.
Oglukh, F.I. (1990). The Urum Subdialect of the Village of Staromlynivka of the Donets 
Region. Movoznavstvo, 24(2(140)), 52-61.
Ojeda, Almerindo E. (1992). The Semantics of Number in Arabic. Working Papers in 
Linguistics (WPL), 40(1992 July), 303-325.
OlÕderogge, D.A., & Zhukov, A.A. (1982). African languages and general linguistics 
[From the history of African Studies]. Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 31(4), 121-5.
Omar, Asmah Haji (1984). The development of the national language of Malaysia. 
Phillipine Journal of Lingusitics, 14-15(1-2), 7-23.
Omar, Asmah Haji (1989). The Malay Spelling Reform. Journal of the Simplified Spelling 
Society, 3(2), 9-13.
Omar, Ahmed Mokhtar (1990). Grammatical Studies in Early Muslim Egypt. Proceedigns 
of 2nd Symposium on History of Arabic Grammar. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. 
Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History ofArabic Grammar, II (pp. 239-251). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Omer, Abdel-Hadi Mohamed (1984) Arabic in the Sudanese setting: a sociolinguistic 
study. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Omran, Elsayed M. H. (1983) The Grammar Tradition in Arabic:  Reform Efforts and 
Porposals for Reform. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Oostdijk, Nelleke (1988). Corpus Linguistics in Perspective. Interdisciplinair Tijdschrift 
voor Taal- & Tekstwetenschap, 8(3), 209-224.
Orel, V.E., & Stolbova, O.V. (1990). On the Reconstruction of Proto-Afro-Asian 
Vocalism. Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 39(2), 75-90.
Ormos, Istvan (1986). A Key Factor in AvicennaÕs Theory of Phonation. Acta Orientalia 
Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae, 40(2-3), 283-292.
Ornan, Uzzi (1983). An assumption concerning emphatic consonants in the Semitic 
languages. Hebrew Computational Linguistics, 20, 5-10.
Ortiz Armengol, Pedro (1988). The Spanish Language in the Philippines. Boletin de la 
Academia Hondurena de la Lengua, 28(30), 119-122.
Orudzheva, L. (1984). Nominal Parts of Speech-Names. Izvestiya Akademii Nauk 
Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, yazyk i iskusstvo, 1, 119-123.
Orudzheva, L.M. (1980). On the Problem 0f Forming Verbal Nouns in Arabic. Izvestiya 
Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR,Literatura, yazyk, i iskusstvo, 4, 62-7.
Osman, El-Sayed Ahmed (1988) The Phonological Theory of Sibawaihi; an Eighth 
Century Arab Grammarian. Ph.D., Georgetown University.
Osman, Mirghani El-Sayed (1991) On the Communicative Role of Word Order on Written 
Modern Standard Arabic:  A Contribution to Functional Linguistics. Ph.D., University of 
Salford.
Osman, Mariam H. (1990a). Bound Anaphora in Egyptian Arabic.  Papers from First 
Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics I. (pp. 155-172). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Osman, Mariam Hussein (1990b) The Syntax and Logical Form of Wh-Interrogatives in 
Cairene Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., University of Washington.
Ostler, Shirley E. (1987a). English in Parallels: A Comparison of English and Arabic 
Prose. In Ulla Connor & Robert B. Kaplan (Eds.), Writing across Languages: Analysis of 
L2 Text (pp. 169-185). Reading: Addison-Wesley.
Ostler, Shirley Elaine (1987b) A Study of the Contrastive Rhetoric of Arabic, English, 
Japanese, and Spanish. Ph.D., University of Southern California.
Otake, Takashi (1988). A Temporal Compensation Effect in Arabic and Japanese. The 
Bulletin, The Phonetic Society of Japan, 189(Dec), 19-24.
Ouaouicha, Driss (1986) Contrastive rhetoric and the structure of learner-produced 
argumentative texts in Arabic and English. Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Ouellette, Jean (1980). An Unnoticed Device for Expressing the Future in Middle Hebrew. 
Hebrew Annual Review, 4, 127-130.
Owens, Jonathan (1980a). Monogenesis, the universal and the particular in Creole studies. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 22(3), 97-117.
Owens, J. (1980b). The Syllable as Prosody - A Re-Analysis of Syllabification in Eastern 
Libyan Arabic. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies-University of 
London, 43(2), 277-287.
Owens, Jonathan (1984a). The Noun Phrase in Arabic Grammatical Theory. Al-ÔArabiyya, 
17(1-2), 47-86.
Owens, Jonathan (1984b). Structure, Class and Dependency:  Modern Linguistic Theory 
and the Arabic Grammatical Tradition. Lingua:  International Review of General 
Linguistics, 64(1), 25-62.
Owens, Jonathan (1984c). Structure, class, and dependency:  modern linguistic theory and 
the Arabic grammatical tradition. Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics, 
64(1), 25-62.
Owens, Jonathan (1985a). Arabic dialects of Chad and Nigeria. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 14, 45-61.
Owens, Jonathan (1985b). Origins of East African Nubi. Anthropological Linguistics, 
27(3), 229-71.
Owens, J. (1986). The Comparative Study of Medieval Arabic Grammatical Theory. In 
J.A. Fishman (Eds.), The Fergusonian Impact (pp. 223-237). 
Owens, Jonathan (1988). The Foundations of Grammar: An Introduction to Medieval 
Arabic Grammatical Theory. Amsterdam: Benjamins.  
Owens, Jonathan (1989a). The Syntactic Basis of Arabic Word Classificaiton. Arabica:  
Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 36(no. 2, 1989 July), 211-234.
Owens, Jonathan (1989b). Zur Pidginisierung und Kreolisierung im Arabischen. Afrika 
und Ubersee: Sprachen-Kulturen, 72(1), 91-107.
Owens, Jonathan (1990a). Early Arabic Grammatical Theory:  Heterogeneity and 
Standardization (series no:  53 ed.). Amsterdam: Benjamins.  
Owens, Jonathan (1990b). East African Nubi: Bioprogram vs Inheritance. Diachronica: 
International Journal for Historical Linguistics, 7(2), 217-250.
Owens, Jonathan (1990c). Themes in the Development of Arabic Grammatical Theory.  
Proc. of 2nd Symposium on History of Arabic Grammar. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. 
Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 253-263). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Owens, Jonathan (1991). Models for Interpreting the Development of Medieval Arabic 
Grammatical Theory. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 111(2), 225-238.
Owens, Jonathan, & Bani-Yasin, Raslan (1987). The lexical basis of variation in Jordanian 
Arabic. Linguistics, 25(4(290)), 705-38.

Paled, Yishai (1987). ÒConditional Sentences without a Conditional ParticleÓ in Classical 
Arabic Prose. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 16, 31-43.
Palmer, Edward L. (1979). Linguistic Innovation in the Arabic Adaptation of ÒSesame 
StreetÓ. Georgetown University Round Table on Languages and Linguistics, 287-294.
Palva, Heikki (1982). Patterns of Koineization in Modern Colloquial Arabic. Acta 
Orientalia, 43, 13-32.
Palva, Heikki (1984). Characteristics of the Arabic Dialect of the Hwetat Tribe. Orientalia 
Suecana, 33-35, 295-312.
Palva, Heikki (1989). The Cultural Context of Arabic Epics and North Arabian Bedouin 
Poetry. Orientalia Suecana (OS), 38-39(1989-1990), 112-119.
Palva, Heikki (1991). The -un in the Colloquial Arabic Genitive Exponents haggun, 
tabaÕun and btaÕun. Folia Orientalia, 28, 129-133.
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1981). VSO to SVO in Modern Standard Arabic: A study in 
diglossia syntax. In Brenda Johns & David Strong (Eds.), Syntactic Change (pp. 159-
176). Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Department of Linguistics.
Parkinson, Dilworth Blaine (1982) Terms of Address in Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., The 
University of Michigan.
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1985). Constructing the Social Context of Communication: Terms 
of Address in Egyptian Arabic. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.  
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1986). Constraints on optional pronoun use in spoken Egyptian 
Arabic. In Dilworth B. Parkinson (Ed.), Deseret Language and Linguistics Society,  (pp. 
55-58). 
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1987). Constraints on the presence/absence of ÔoptionalÕ subject 
pronouns in Egyptian Arabic. In Keith M. Denning,Sharon Inkelas,Faye C. McNair-
Knox, & John R. Rickford (Eds.), Variation in Language: NWAV-XV at Stanford (pp. 
348-360). Stanford: Stanford University.
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1988). Egyptian Arabic Abuse. Maledicta: The International 
Journal of Verbal Aggression, 10, 145-161.
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1990). Orthographic variation in Modern Standard Arabic:  The 
case of the hamza. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics (pp. 269-295). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1991). Searching for Modern Fusha: Real Life Formal Arabic. Al-
ÔArabiyya, 24, 31-64.
Parkinson, Dilworth B. (1993). Knowing Standard Arabic:  Testing EgyptiansÕ MSA 
Abilities. In Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V (pp. 
47-74). Phildelphia/Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Parry, Louis D. Buff (1989). Arabic/Islamic Presence in the Americas Before Columbus:  
Indisputable Proof Based upon the Power and Placement of M. The Epigraphic Society 
Occasional Publications, 18, 134-136.
Parzymies, Anna (1979). Noms de personnes en Algerie. Folia Orientalia (FoliaO), 20, 
107-118.
Pasch, Helma, & Thelwall, Robin (1987). Losses and Innovations in Nubi. In Philippe 
Maurer & Thomas Stolz (Eds.), Varia Creolica (pp. 91-165). Bochum: Brockmeyer.
Patterson, William T. (1986). Lexical borrowings in Spanish: function, length, genealogy 
and chronology. The Canadian Modern Language Review, 42(3), 629-34.
Peled, Yishai (1985). On the obligatoriness of fa- in classical Arabic in conditional 
sentences. Journal of Semitic Studies, 30(2), 213-225.
Peled, Yishai (1987). ÔConditional Sentences without a Conditional ParticleÕ in Classical 
Arabic Prose. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 16, 31-43.
Pellegrini, Giovan Battista (1986). On Orientalisms in Ligurian Dialects. Rivista Italiana di 
Dialettologia: Scuola Societa Territorio, 10(1(10)), 219-228.
Pena, Salvador (1988). El corpus de los linguistas musulmanes y la nocion de autoridad. 
Miscelanea de Estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II. Filologia Hebrea, Biblia y Judaismo, 
37(1), 195-209.
Penarroja Torrejon, Leopoldo (1991). El arabe /kanisa/ ÔiglesiaÕ en la toponimia espanola. 
Revista de Filologia Espanola, 71, 347-354.
Perdue, Clive, & Deulofeu, Jose (1986). Structuring of the utterance:  A longitudinal study  
(La structuration de lÕenonce:  etude longitudinale). Languages, 21(84), 43-63.
Perez Botero, Luis (1983). Aspects of Castilian Adjectivization. Yelmo, 58-59(Oct-Mar), 
14-16.
Perry, John R. (1984). Differential Assimilation of Some Arabic Loanwords in Tajik and 
Uzbek. Folia Slavica, 7(1-2), 268-282.
Persson, Andrew,Persson, Janet, & Hussein, Ahmad (1979). Sudanese Colloquial Arabic 
for Beginners. Horsleys Green, High Wycombe, England: Summer Institute of 
Linguistics.  
Peter, Friedl (1985). Noch einmal gamasa. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 14, 78.
Peterson, Philip L. (1985). Event. Linguistic Analysis, 15(1), 3-18.
Petracek, Karel (1981). Le Systeme de lÕarabe dans une perspective diachronique. Arabica: 
Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(1981 June-Sept.), 162-177.
Pfaff, Carol Wollman (1979). Acquisition and Development of Gastarbeiterdeutsch by 
Migrant Workers and Their Children in Germany. International Conference on Historical 
Linguistics.
Pfaff, Carol W. (1981). Sociolinguistic problems of immigrants:   foreign workers and 
their children in Germany (a review article). Language in Society, 10(2), 155-88.
Pfaff, Carol Wollman (Ed.). (1987).  First and Second Language Acquisition Processes. 
Cambridge, MA:    Newbury House Publishers.
Piamenta, Moshe (1981). Selected Syntactic Phenomena of Jerusalem Arabic Narrative 
Style in 1900. In Shelomo Morag (Eds.), Studies in Judaism and Islam Presented to 
Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by HisStudies in Judaism 
and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by 
His (pp. 203-230). Jerusalem: Magnes Press.
Picard, Marc (1979). The Syllable Boundary in Generative Phonology. The Canadian 
Journal of Linguistics, 24(2), 119-131.
Piel, Joseph M. (1980). Beitrage zur Kenntnis der toponymischen Mozarabismen 
Sudportugals. In Hans Dieter Bork,Artur Greive, & Dieter Woll (Eds.), Romanica 
Europaea et Americana Festschrift fur Harri Meier, 8. Januar 1980 (pp. 437-442). Bonn: 
Bouvier.
Pilaszewicz, Stanislaw (1987). Arabic and Hausa: Two Vehicles of the Hausa Literary 
Tradition. Rocznik Orientalistyczny, 45(2), 67-72.
Pilaszewicz, Stanislaw (1989). From Arabic to Hausa: The Case of the Hausa Poet Alhaji 
Umaru. Rocznik Orientalistyczny, 46(1), 97-104.
Piron, Claude (1979). Understanding Among Africans:  Linguistic Isolation and Linguistic 
Communication. Esperanto Documents, 17A, 1-16.
Piron, Claude (1980). Problems of linguistic communication in the United Nations and 
related organizations. Language Problems and Language Planning, 4(3), 224-38.
Plunkett, Bernadette (1993a). The Position of Subjects in Modern Standard Arabic. In 
Mushira Eid & Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V (pp. 231-260). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Plunkett, Bernadette (1993b) Specifiers and Subject Positions. PHD, University of 
Massachusetts.
Pocklington, Robert (1986). El sustrato arabigo-granadino en la formacion de los dialectos 
orientales del Andaluz. Revista de Filologia Espanola, 66(1-2), 75-100.
Poizner, Howard, & Lane, Harlan (1979). Cerebral Asymmetry in the Perception of 
American Sign Language. Brain and Language, 7(2), 210-226.
Port, Robert F. ,Al-Ani, Salman, & Maeda, Shosaku (1980). Temporal compensation and 
universal phonetics. Journal of Phonetica, 37, 235-52.
Port, Robert F. , & Mitleb, Fares Mousa (1983). Segmental features and implementation in 
acquisition of English by Arabic speakers. Journal of Phonetics, 11(3), 219-29.
Posner, Roland (1983). Numbers and their signs. Grazer Linguistische Studien, 19, 141-
58.
Poveda Sanchez, Angel (1980). Introduccion al estudio de la toponimia arabe musulmana 
de Mayurqa segun la documentacion de los archivos de la ciutat de Mallorca (1232-1276). 
Awraq, 3, 75-109.
Powels, Sylvia (1989). On the Etymology of the Word ÒSugarÓ and Its Use by the Hindus, 
Persians and Arabs. Mediterranean Language Review, 4-5, 1-21.
Power, R.J.D., & Dal Martello, M.F. (1990). The Dictation of Italian Numerals. Language 
and Cognitive Processes, 5(3), 237-254.
Prevaes, Math (1990). Maltese: A Language between two cultures. Van Taal tot Taal, 
34(2), 63-73.
Prince, A. (1989). Metrical Forms. In P. Kiparsky (Eds.), Rhythm and Meter (pp. 45-80). 
Prochazka, Theodore, Jr. (1981). The ShiÕi Dialects of Bahrain and Their Relationship to 
the Eastern Arabian Dialect of Muharraq and The Omani Dialect of al-Ristaq. Zeitschrift fur 
Arabische Linguistik, 6, 16-55.
Prochazka, Theodore, Jr. (1987). Remarks on the spoken Arabic of Zabid. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics, 17, 58-68.
Prochazka, Theodore, Jr. (1988a). Gleanings from Southwestern Saudi Arabia. Zeitschrift 
fur Arabische Linguistik, 19, 44-49.
Prochazka, Theodore, Jr. (1988b). Saudi Arabic Dialects (1988 ed.). London: Routledge, 
Chapman & Hall Ltd.  
Prochazka, Theodore, Jr. (1988c). The Spoken Arabic of Abu Thor in Al-Hasa. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics`, 18, 59-76.
Prochazka, Theodore (1990). The Spoken Arabic of Al-Qatif. Journal of Arabic 
Linguistics, 21, 63-70.
Puig-Montada, Josep (1988). Bemerkungen zum Begriff der Determination im Arabischen. 
Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae, 42(2-3), 361-369.
Qasem, Zaidan Ahmad (1986) The development of an Arabic reading inventory for 
Jordanian elementary schools first through fourth grade levels. Ph.D., Michigan State 
University.
Quinsat, Francoise (1991). Emprunts a lÕarabe dÕAfrique du Nord: Mots argotiques, 
grossiers, pejoratifs ou familiers. Le Francais Moderne: Revue de Linguistique Francaise, 
59(2), 164-187.
Rabie, Medhat Sidky (1991) A Sociolinguistic Study of Diglossia of Egyptian Radio 
Arabic: An Ethnographic Approach. Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin.
Racheva, M. (1979). Etymological Problems of Early Semitic Borrowings in Slavic 
Languages. Zeitschrift fur Slawistik, 24(1), 105-114.
Radwan, Mohammad Ali (1988) A Linguistic Analysis of the Grammatical and Lexical 
Errors in the Nominal Group Found in the Written English of Syrian University Students 
(Volumes I-III). Ph.D., University of Nottingham (United Kingdom).
Rajouani, A. (1986). Analysis for synthesis of Arabic pharyngealized sounds. In 11th 
Meeting of the Acoustical Society of America,  (pp. paper S23). Cleveland: 
Rajouani, A.,Najim, M., & Chiadmi, D. (1987). Synthesis of the Pharyngealization 
Feature in Arabic. Speech Communication, 6(3), 261-268.
Rammuny, Faji M. (1989). Instrumental and Auditory Analysis of Colloquial Jordanian 
Arabic.  An Update. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 20, 23-42.
Rammuny, Raji M. (1985). Al-Jurjani:  A Pioneer of Grammatical and Linguistic Studies. 
Historiographia Linguistica:  International Journal for the History of the Language 
Sciences, 12(3), 351-71.
Rammuny, Raji M. (1986). The role of Al-JurjaniÕs concept of TaÕliq in the development 
of Arabic grammatical theory and linguistic analysis. International Journal of Islamic & 
Arabic Studies, 3(1), 27-42.
Raof, Abdul-Hussein F. (1988) Subject, Theme and Agent in Modern Standard Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Leeds (United Kingdom).
Rasmussen, Stig (1980). An Analysis of Colloquial Elements in the Syntax of Hadit Ôusfur 
al-mulaqqab bi-Abi Disah. Acta Orientalia, 41, 39-68.
Rassam, Yasin (1984). Miscelanea de estudios Arabes y Hebraicos: II. Filologia Hebrea, 
Biblia y Judaismo, 32-33(1), 37-54.
Ratcliffe, Robert R. (1988). Arabic Broken Plurals: Arguments for a two-fold classification 
of morphology. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics (pp. 94-119). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Ratcliffe, Robert R. (1990). Arabic Broken Plurals: Arguments for a Two-Fold 
Classification of Morphology. Papers from Second Annual Symposium on Arabic Ling. In 
Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, II (pp. 94-119). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Ratcliffe, Robert Richard (1992) The Broken Plural Problem in Arabic, Semitic, and 
Afroasiatic: A Solution Based on the Diachronic Application of Prosodic Analysis. Ph.D., 
Yale University.
RedÕkin, O. I. (1983). The Varying of the Guttural Explosion [hamza] in the Arabic 
Literary Language. Vestnik Leningradskogo Universiteta, Istoriya-yazyk-literatura, 
38(4(20)), 70-74.
Reguigui, Ali (1986). Borrowing and normalization in the Arabic language  (Emprunt et 
normalisation en langue arabe). Langues et Linguistique, 12, 197-227.
Reguigui, Ali (1992) La Neonymie en Terminologie de Langue Arabe:  Aspects et 
Problemes de la Formation Syntagmatique. Ph.D., University of Laval.
Rehail, Hussein (1992). Equivalence, culture et traduction. Linguistica, 32, 221-225.
Reichel-Baumgartner, Brigitte (1988). Parameter des Idiolekts des Propheten Muhammad 
auf Grundlage des Sahih von al Buhari. Wiener Zeits. fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, 
78, 121-159.
Reichmuth, Stefan (1981). Die Farbebezeichnungen in sudanesisch-arabischen Dialekten. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 6, 56-68.
Reid, Joy Maurine (1988) Quantitative Differences in English Prose Written By Arabic, 
Chinese, Spanish, and English Students. Ph.D., Colorado State University.
Rendsburg, Gary A. (1988). Hebrew sw/yh and Arabic shh. In Yoel L. Arbeitman (Eds.), 
FOCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman (pp. 419-430). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Renfroe, Fred Hilton, II (1989) Arabic and Ugaritic Lexicography. Ph.D., Yale 
University.
Resink, Pieter (1984). Similitudes Syntaxiques en Arabe et Berbere Maghrebins.  Papers 
from 3rd International Hamito-Semito Cong. In James Bynon (Eds.), Current Progress in 
Afro-Asiatic Lingistics. (pp. 324-354). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Retso, Jan (1983). The Finite Passive Voice in Modern Arabic Dialects. Gštenborg: Acta 
Universitatis Gothoburgensis.  
Retso, Jan (1984). State, Determination and Definiteness in Arabic: A Reconsideration. 
Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 341-346.
Retso, Jan (1988). Pronominal Suffixes with -n(n)- in Arabic Dialects and Other Semitic 
Languages. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 18, 77-94.
Reuschel, Wolfgang (1981). Die Kasus im Arabischen. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 34, 152-159.
Reuschel, Wolfgang (1986). ÒOne, Two and More Than TwoÓ from the perspective of 
Arabic grammar  (ÒEins, zwei und mehr als zweiÓ aus der sicht der arabischen Grammatik). 
Linguistische Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte, 148, 194-203.
Rhodes, Janice Deledalle (1979). Charles S. PeirceÕs Arabic Grammar. Ars Semeiotica, 
2(3), 365-368.
Riad, Eva (1984). Wtb Ôto SitÕ and Ôto JumpÕ, qfs Ôto Pull TogetherÕ and Ôto JumpÕ. 
Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 347-353.
Riad, Eva (1989). Deux details de la preface du Kitab Adab Al-Katib dÕIbn. Orientalia 
Suecana (OS), 38-39(1989-1990), 140-148.
Ricks, Stephen David (1982) A Lexicon of Epigraphic Qatabanian. Ph.D, Graduate 
Theological Union.
Riguet, Maurice (1980). Word association:  A comparative study between bilingual 
Tunisians [Arabic-French] and monolingual Tunisians. Revue Internationale de 
Psychologie Appliquee, 29(1-2), 183-204.
Riguet, Maurice (1981). Variations of Opinion According to Language in the Tunisian 
Environment. IBLA, Revue de lÕInstitut des Belles Lettres Arabes a Tunis, 44(3(149)), 57-
86.
Rintell, Ellen M. (1984). But how did you feel about that? The learnerÕs perception of 
emotion in speech. Applied Linguistics, 5(2), 255-64.
Rippin, A (1983). QurÕan 78/24:  A Study in Arabic Lexicography. Journal of Semitic 
Studies, 28(no. 2), 311-320.
Rissanen, Seppo (1991). Der richtige Sinn der Bibel bei Theodor Abu Qurra. In Hans-Olof 
Kvist (Ed.), Fourth Finnish-German TheologistsÕ Conference (Makarios Symposium),  
(pp. 79-90). Turky:  Abo Academy.
Rivarola, Jose-Luis (1985). Albaquia-Baquia-Baquiano:  Notes on the origin of one 
americanism. Zeitschift fur romanische Philologie, 101(1-2), 45-51.
Roberts, John M., & Hayes, Jeffrey C. (1987). Young adult male categorization of fifty 
Arabic proverbs. Anthropological Linguistics, 29(1), 35-48.
Robertson, Charles Darrel (1990) The Effects of Orthographic Variation on Word Latency, 
Pronunciation, Speed and Comprehension of Nonnative Readers of Arabic. Ph.D., The 
University of Texas at Austin.
Robinson, D. (1982). Fulfulde Literature in Arabic Script. History in Africa, 9, 251-261.
Robinson, Timothy Hayne (1986) Evaluating Foreign StudentsÕ Compositions:  The 
effects of rater background and of handwriting, spelling, and grammar. Ph.D. Dissertation, 
University of Texas.
Rockey, Denyse, & Johnstone, Penelope (1979). Medieval Arabic Views on Speech 
Disorders:  Al-Razi (c.865-925). Journal of Communication Disorders, 12(3), 229-243.
Rolland, Jean-Claude (1979). LÕArabe parle au Caire. Cairo: No publisher.  
Rollins, Jack D. (1985). Literary Theory in Africa:  A Rapprochement Between Linguistics 
and Literary History : The Case of the Swahili ÒHadithiÓ. In Kofi Anyidoho,Abioseh 
Porter,Daniel Racine, & Janice Spleth (Eds.), Interdisciplinary Dimensions of African 
Literature (pp. 129-135). Washington, DC: Three Continents Press.
Roman, Andre (1981). De la langue arabe comme un modele general de la formation des 
langues semitiques et de leur evolution. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(June-Sept.), 
127-161.
Roman, Andre (1983a). Etude de la phonologie et de la morphologie de la koine Arabe. 
Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.  
Roman, Andre (1983b). Sur la constitution des unites de la langue arabe. In Les Parties du 
discours (pp. 113-144). Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Roman, Andre (1984). Les Modalites de voix du verbe arabe. In Daniel Bresson (Eds.), Le 
Passif Aix-en-Provence: Pubs. Univ. de Provence.
Roman, Andre (1985). Sur la constitution de la phrase et la phrase arabe. In Travaux, III: 
Les Relations syntaxiques (pp. 105-119). Aix-en-Provence: University de Provence.
Roman, Andre (1987). Recognition of the Arabic Protolanguage as a ÒSystem of systems,Ó 
a basis of neologistic creativity  (La Reconnaissance de la protolangue arabe comme un 
Òsysteme de systemesÓ: base pour la creativity neologique). Meta, 32(2), 170-85.
Roman, Andre (1988). Les Formes infinitives de lÕarabe dans lÕorganisation generalede la 
langue arabe. In Sylvianne Remi-Giraud (Eds.), LÕInfinitif: Une Approche comparative 
(pp. 211-242). Lyon: PU de Lyon.
Roman, Andre (1989). Vers une theorie generale de la production des signifiants 
linguistiques: LÕExemple ÔprobantÕ de lÕarabe. In Marie-Christine Hazael-Massieux (Eds.), 
La Signification (pp. 73-113). Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Roman, Andre (1991). La Traduction de lÕattribut en arabe. In Marie-Madeleine de 
Gaulmyn & Sylvianne Remi-Giraud (Eds.), A la recherche de lÕattribut Lyon: PU de Lyon.
Roman, Andre, & Dichy, Joseph (1989). Aspect in Arabic. Les Langues Modernes, 83(3-
4), 135-141.
Roman, Gilles,Pavard, Bernard, & Asselah, Boualem (1985). Perceptive Analysis of 
Arabic Ambiguous Sentences. Cahiers de Psychologie Cognitive, 5(1), 5-22.
Ronnow, Gretchen (1984). The oral vs. the written: a dialectic of worldviews in Najib 
MahfouzÕs ÒChildren of our AlleyÓ. Al-ÔArabiyya, 17(1-2), 87-118.
Roper, Geoffrey (1988) Arabic Printing in Malta, 1825-1845: Its History and Its Place in 
the Development of Print Culture in the Arab Middle East. Ph.D., University of Durham 
(United Kingdom).
Rosenberg, Arnold L. (1979). The Hardest Natural Languages. Lingvisticae 
Investigationes, 3(2), 323-339.
Rosenhouse, Judith (1978). Circumstantial clauses in some Arabic dialects. Zeitschrift der 
Deutschen MorgenlŠndischen Gesellschaft, 226-237.
Rosenhouse, Judith (1982). Some Features of Some Bedouin Dialects in the North of 
Israel. , 7, 23-47.
Rosenhouse, Judith (1983). Texts in the Dialect of the ÔAramsha Bedouins (Northern 
Israel). Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 10, 39-70.
Rosenhouse, Judith (1984a). The Bedouin Arabic Dialects--General Problems and  a close 
analysis of North Israel Bedouin Dialects. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz Publishers.  
Rosenhouse, Judith (1984b). Towards a Classification of Bedouin Dialects in Israel. 
Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 47(3), 508-522.
Rosenhouse, Judith (1988). Occurrence of the Passive in Different Types of Text in 
English, Hebrew and Arabic. Babel, 34(2), 90-103.
Rosenhouse, Judith (1989). Translation from English into Arabic:  Implications for Text 
Linguistics. Dept General Studies Technion-Israel Instit Technology, 27(2), 125-136.
Rosenhouse, Judith, & Cohen, Ariel Mordecai (1990). The Passive in Arabic, Hebrew and 
English and Machine Translation. Literary and Linguistic Computing: Journal of the 
Association for Literary and Linguistic Computing, 5(1), 9-18.
Rosenthal, Franz (1981). Nastabiqu in Surah 12:17. In Shelomo Morag (Eds.), Studies in 
Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth 
Birthday by His Students, Colleagues, and Friends. Jerusalem: 
Rosenthal, Franz (1989). The History of an Arabic Proverb. Journal of the American 
Oriental Society, 109(3), 349-378.
Rossi, J. P., & Loridant, C. (1986). Graphophonological Coding in the Identification of 
Visual Stimuli. Candadian Journal of Psychology, 40(4), 463-472.
Roth, Norman (1983). Jewish reactions to the ÔArabiyya and the renaissance of Hebrew in 
Spain. Journal of Semitic Studies, 28(1), 63-84.
Rouchdy, Aleya (1980). Languages in contact: Arabic-Nubian. Anthropological 
Linguistics, 22(8), 334-44.
Rouchdy, Aleya (1989a). ÔPersistenceÕ or ÔTipÕ in Egyptian Nubian. In Nancy C. Dorian 
(Eds.), Investigating Obsolescence: Studies in Language Contraction and Death (pp. 91-
102). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rouchdy, Aleya (1989b). Urban and Non-Urban Egyptian Nubian: Is There a Reduction in 
Language Skill? In Nancy C. Dorian (Eds.), Investigating Obsolescence: Studies in 
Language Contraction and Death (pp. 259-266). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Rouchdy, Aleya (Ed.). (1991a).  The Arabic Language in America:  A Sociolinguistic 
Study on a Growing Bilingual Community. Detroit:   Wayne State University Press.
Rouchdy, Aleya (1991b). Nubians and the Nubian Language in Contemporary Egypt: A 
Case of Cultural and Linguistic Contact. Leiden: E.J. Brill.  
Rouchdy, Aleya (1991c). Nubians and the Nubian Language: A situation of Linguistic and 
Cultural Contacts. Leiden: E.J. Brill.  
Rouchdy, Aleya (Ed.). (1992a).  Arabic in the Dearborn Mosques. Detroit:   Wayne State 
University Press.
Rouchdy, Aleya (Ed.). (1992b).  The Arabic Language in America. Detroit:   Wayne State 
University Press.
Rouchdy, Aleya (1992c). Borrowing in Arab-American Speech. In Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), 
The Arabic Language in America (pp. 36-49). Detroit: Wayne State University Press.
Royal, Anne Marie (1985) Male/Female Pharyngealization Patterns in Cairo Arabic: A 
Sociolinguistic Study of Two Neighborhoods. Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin.
Russell, R. (1977a) Word order and discourse function in Arabic. Ph.D, Harvard 
University.
Russell, Robert (1977b) Word Order of Classical and Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., Harvard 
University.
Russell, Robert A. (1986). Historical Aspects of Subject-Verb Agreement in Arabic. In 
Proceedings - Eastern States Conference on Linguistics (ESCOL) (pp. 116-127). 
Columbus: Dept. of Linguistics, Ohio State University.
Rybalkin, V. S. (1991). A. Iu. KrymsÕkyi iak arabist-dialektoloh. Movoznavstvo: 
Naukovo-Teoretychnyi Zhurnal Viddilennia Literatury, Movy i Mystetstvoznavstva 
Akademii Nauk Ukr, 2, 68-74.
Ryding, Karin (1981). Semantic Motivation for Arabic Dative-Movement. Al-ÔArabiyya, 
14, 19-23.
Ryding, Karin (1989). The Search for Paradigm:  Linguistic Analysis in Medieval 
Mesopotamia. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 6(1), 31-38.
Ryding, Karin (1990). Alchemy and Linguistics:  Connections in Early Islam. In 
International Conference on the History of Alchemy,  (pp. 117-120). University of 
Groningen: Leiden:  Brill.
Ryding, Karin (1992). Morphosyntactic Analysis in Al-Jumal fii l-nahw.  Discourse 
structure and metalanguage. In E. Broselow,Mushira Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 263+). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Rzewuski, Eugeniusz (1991). Mother Tongue/Father Tongue Convergence: On 
Swahilization and Deswahilization in Mozambique. In James R. Dow,Thomas 
Stolz,Norbert Boretzky,Werner Enninger, & Matthias Perl (Eds.), 
Minoritatensprachen/Sprachminoritaten (pp. 267-305). Bochum: Brockmeyer.
SaÔadeddin, Mohammed Akram A. M. (1989). Text Development and Arabic-English 
Negative Interference. Applied Linguistics, 10(1), 36-51.
Saad, George (1979). SibawayhiÕs Treatment of Transitivity. Al-ÔArabiyya, 12, 83-88.
Saad, George Nehmeh (1982). Transitivity, Causation and Passivization: A Semantic-
Syntactic Study of the Verb in Classical Arabic. London: Kegan Paul International.  
Saad, George N., & Bolozky, Shmuel (1984). Causativization and Transitivization in 
Arabic and Modern Hebrew. Afroasiatic Linguistics, 9(2), 29-38.
Sabar, Yona (1984). The Arabic Elements in the Jewish Neo-Aramaic Texts of Nerwa and 
ÔAmadiya, Iraqi Kurdistan. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 104(1), 201-211.
Sabra, Souheila Moussa (1987) The Acquisition of English Syntax by Four Arabic-
Speaking Children. Ph.D., Michigan State University.
Sabuni, Abdulghafur (1980). Laut- und Formenlehre des arabischen Dialekts von Aleppo. 
Frankfurt a. M.: Lang.  
Sabuni, Abdulghafur (1981). Einfuhrung in die Arabistik. Hamburg: Buske.  
Sadygov, Evez (1989). Some Syntactic Figures Used in FizuliÕs Poetry. Izvestiya 
Akademii Nauk Azerbaidzhanskoi SSR, Literatura, Yazyk i Iskusstvo, 2, 74-78.
Safar, H. (1987). Immigration and Native Language:  The Case of the Mahgrebian 
Community in Belgium. Le Langage et lÕHomme, 22(2(64)), 127-130.
Safi, Sabah (1992). Funcitons of Code-Switching:  Saudi Arabic in the United States. In 
Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 72-80). Detroit: Wayne State 
University Press.
Safi-Stagni, Sabah (1990). Slips of the Tongue in Arabic.  Papers from First Annual 
Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics, I (pp. 271-290). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Safi-Stagni, Sabah (1991). Agrammatism in Arabic.  Papers from 3rd Annual Symposium 
on Arabic Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perpsectives on Arabic 
LInguistics (pp. 251-270). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Safi-Stagni, Sabah (1994). Arabic Segmental Errors and Segmental Phonology. In 
Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 169-184). 
Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Said, Hanan AsaÕd Abdel-Karim (1988) The Cohesive Role of Reference, Substitution, 
and Ellipsis in Two Genres of Modern Literary Arabic. Ph.D., Texas A&M University.
Sakai, Yuko (1986). Motion of gender (III): Italian and Spanish in the lexicon of plants. 
Sophia Linguistics, 20-21, 411-20.
Sakhnini, Hisham M. A. (1984) Arabic Morphology as Described by Ibn Jinni in At-Tasrif 
al-Muluki. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Salam, A.M. (1980). Phonological variation in educated spoken Arabic: a study of the 
uvular and related plosive types. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies-
University of London, 43, 77-100.
Salame, Pierre, & Baddeley, Alan (1986). Phonological Factors in STM:  Similarity and 
the Unattended Speech Effect. The Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society, 24(4), 263-265.
Salame, Pierre, & Baddeley, Alan (1990). The Effects of Irrelevant Speech on Immediate 
Free Recall. The Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society, 28(6), 540-542.
Saleh, Waleed (1992). La polemica del lenguaje en el teatro arabe. Primer Acto: Cuadernos 
de Investigacion Teatral, 245, 28-33.
Salib, Maurice Boulos (1979) Spoken Literary Arabic: Oral Approximation of Literary 
Arabic in Egyptian Formal Discourse. Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley.
Salib, Maurice H. (1981). Spoken Arabic of Cairo. Cairo: American University in Cairo 
Press.  
Salibi, Kamal S. (1981). Hadramut: A Name with a Story. Festschrift for Ihsan ÔAbbas on 
His Sixtieth Birthday. In Wadad Al-Qadi (Eds.), Studia Arabica et Islamica. (pp. 393-
397). Beirut: American Univ. of Beirut.
Salih, Mamud (1985) Aspects of Clause Structure in Standard Arabic: A Study in 
Relational Grammar. Ph.D., State University of New York-Buffalo.
Salih, Mahmud Husein (1986). Raising in Universal Grammar.  State University of New 
York at Buffalo. In Soonja Choi,Dan Devitt,Wynn Janis,Terry MCCoy, & Zheng-sheng 
Zhang (Eds.), Proceedings of the Second Eastern States Conf. on Linguistics (pp. 325-
336). Columbus: Dept. of Linguistics, OSU.
Salmon, Vivian (1988). Anglo-Dutch Linguistic Scholarship:  A Survey of Seventeenth-
Century Achievements. Historiographia Linguistica, 15(1-2), 129-153.
Salonen , Erkki (1980). On the Arabic dialect spoken in Sirqat. Annales Academiae 
Scientiarum Fennicae/Suomalaisen Tiedeakatemian Toimituksia, Series B 212, 1-131.
Salonen, Erkki (1980a). On the Arabic dialect of Gaza [Part II]. Annales Academiae 
Scientiarum Fennicae/Suomalaisen Tiedeakatemian Toimituksia Series B 213, 1-62.
Salonen, Erkki (1980b). Zum arabischen Dialekt von Gaza, II. In Helsinki: Suomalainen 
Tiedeakatemia Helsinki: Suomalaisen Tiedeakatemian Toimituksia.
Sammander, Abdul Raziq (1987) A comparison of spoken with written texts with respect 
to error and non-error cohesive ties and syntactic structures of adults Arabic-speaking 
learners of English as a foreign language. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Samoeil, Simon (1992). The Arabic Novels Since 1950:  A Selected Bibliography of 
Critical Studies. In Mundus Arabicus Cambridge, Mass: Dar Mahjar.
Sanchez Alvarez, Mercedes (1981). Simbiosis arabe-romance en el lexico de los textos 
aljamiados. In Actas de las jornadas de cultura arabe e islamica: 1978. Madrid: Inst. 
Hispano-Arabe de Cultura (pp. 389-393). 
Sanni, Amidu (1989). On tadmin (enjambment) and Structural Coherence in Classical 
Arabic Poetry. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 52(3), 463-466.
Santos, Maria Jose de Moura (1980). Importacao Lexical e Estruturacao Semantica: Os 
Arabismos na Lingua Portuguesa. Biblos, 56, 573-596.
Sara, Solomon I. (1991). Al-Khalil:  the first Arab phonologist. International Journal of 
Islamic and Arabic Studies, 8.1, 1-57.
Saraireh, Mohammad Atawi (1990) Some Lexical and Syntactic Problems in English-
Arabic Translation. Ph.D., The University of Wisconson, Madison.
Sarig, Lea (1990). The Reflection of Word Order in Contemporary Hebrew through 
Translations from Arabic. Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew 
Language and Cognate Subjects, 55(1-2), 127-139.
Sarig, Lea (1992). On Two Style Markers of Modern Arabic-Hebrew Prose Translations. 
Target: International Journal of Translation Studies, 4(2), 209-222.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1980) Discourse Reference and Pronominalization in Arabic. Ph.D., 
The Ohio State University.
Sawaie, Mohammad (1982). Nouns or Pronouns?  That Question in Arabic. In Papers 
from the Parasession on Nondeclaratives (pp. 194-201). Chicago: Chicago Linguistic 
Society.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1986a). Arabic Language Academies as Language Planners. In 
Nancy Schweda-Nicholson (Eds.), Languages in the International Perspective (pp. 56-65). 
Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1986b). The Present and Future Status of Minority Language:  The 
Case of Arabic in the United States. Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, 
7(1), 31-40.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1987a). Jurji Zaydan (1861-1914): a modernist in Arabic linguistics. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 14(2), 283-304.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1987b). Speakers attitudes toward linguistic variation: a case study of 
some Arabic dialects. Linguistische Berichte, 107, 3-22.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1990). An Aspect of 19th Century Arabic Lexicography:  The 
Modernizing Role and Contribution of Faris al-Shidyaq. In Hans-Josef Niederehe & 
Konrad Koerner (Eds.), History and Historiography of Linguistics:  Papers from the 
Fourth International Conference on the History of the Language Sciences (pp. 157-171). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Sawaie, Mohammed (1992). Arabic in the Melting Pot:  Will It Survive? In Aleya Rouchdy 
(Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 83-99).  Detroit: Wayne State University 
Press.
Sawaie, Mohammed, & Fishman, Joshua A. (1985). Arabic-language maintenance efforts 
in the United States. The Journal of Ethnic Studies, 13(2), 33-49.
Sayed, Abdelrahman Ahmed (1981) The Phonology of Moroccan Arabic: A Generative 
Phonological Approach. Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Sayyid, M. Abdul-Wahid (1975). Arabic Kinesics. Al-ÔArabiyya, 8(1-2), 47-51.
Sayyid, Muhammad Abdul-Wahid (1982). An International Phonetic Arabic Alphabet. 
Dara (Riyadh)., 4-11.
Sbait, Dirgham H. (1986). Poetic and musical structure in the improvised-sung colloquial 
Qasidih of the Palestinian poet-singers. Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 75-108.
Scarcella, Robin, & Brunak, Joanna (1981). On speaking politely in a second language. 
International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 27, 59-75.
Schabram, Hans (1990). Electre and a[u]mber: On the designations of white gold and 
amber in Middle and Early Modern English. Anglia, 108(1-2), 1-18.
Schenker, Alexander M. (1989). The Gnezdovo Inscription in its historical and linguistic 
setting. Russian Linguistics, 13(3), 207-220.
Schiller, Janis Lee (1989) Writing in L1-writing in L2: Case studies of the composing 
processes of five adult arabic-speaking ESL writers. Ph.D., New York University.
Schlossberg, Eliezer (1986). A Weak fÓ in the Language of IshmaÕel - in the Language of 
R. Yosef Karo. Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language 
and Cognate Subjects/Ketav-ÕEt le-Heqer ha-Lashon, 51(1-2), 122-128.
Schmidt, Anna Marie (1988) The Acquistion of Some American English Duration 
Parameters by Nonnative Speakers of English. Ph.D., University of Florida.
Schmidt, Bernd (1986). On the formation of literary Malagasy in the nineteenth century   
(Zur Ausbildung einer madagassischen Literatursprache im 19 Jahrhundert). Linguistische 
Studien, Reihe A: Arbeitsberichte, 148, 240-51.
Schmidt, Jean Jacques (1979). Vocabulaire dÕarabe moderne. Paris: Maison du 
Dictionnaire.  
Schmidt, Richard (1986). Applied sociolinguistics: the case of Arabic as a second 
language. Anthropological Linguistics, 28(1), 55-72.
Schoch, Gernot (1989). The Notion of MutawaÔa and the Arabic Verbal System. 
Linguistische Studien, 189, 17-28.
Schub, Michael B. (1981). A Sublime Subtlety? Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik,  6, 
72-73.
Schub, Michael B. (1982a). The expression of panchronic actions in Arabic; an exegetical 
clarification. Journal of Semitic Studies, 27(1), 57-9.
Schub, Michael B. (1982b). A note of a sextuple plural in Arabic and more on plurals of 
paucity and abundance. Al-ÔArabiyya, 15(1-2), 153-155.
Schub, Michael B. (1983). A ÔCaseÕ of Desinence and Denigration. Al-ÔArabiyya, 16(1-2), 
131-134.
Schub, Michael B. (1984). ÔIqham: The Annexation of a Binominal to a Genitive: A 
Deviation from Semiticity in Syntax? Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 13, 86-91.
Schub, Michael B. (1986). Expressing age. Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 137-8.
Schub, Michael B. (1987). The Morphological Pattern fiÔlun For Dichotomies. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics, 16, 119-120.
Schub, Michael B. (1988). Two Notes. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 18, 95-97.
Schuchardt, Hugo (1979). On Lingua Franca. Linguistica Extranea, 3, 26-47.
Schuh, Russell G. (1989). Toward a Metrical Analysis of Hausa Verse Prosody:  
Mutadaarik. 18th Conf. on African LInguistics. In Isabelle Haik & Laurice Tuller (Eds.), 
Current Approaches to African Linguistics, VI (pp. 161-175). Dordrecht: Foris.
Schulz, David Eugene (1981) Diglossia and Variation in Formal Spoken Arabic in Egypt. 
Ph.D., The University of Wisconson, Madison.
Schulz, Eckehard (1986). The first translation of work by Lenin into Arabic  (Die erste 
Ubersetzung eines Leninwerkes in das Arabische). Linguistische Studien, Reihe A:  
Arbeitsberichts, 148, 252-64.
Schulz, Eckehard (1989a). Lexical Synonymy in Arabic. Linguistische Studien, 189, 68-
80.
Schulz, Eckehard (1989b). Theoretische und praktische Probleme einer arabischen 
Synonymik fur deutschsprachige Worterbuchbenutzer. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und  Kommunikationsforschung, 42(6), 810-815.
Schweda-Nicholson, Nancy (Ed.). (1986).  Languages in the International Perspective. 
Norwood:   Ablex Publishing Corporation.
Sciriha, Adelina-Lydia (1986) A sociolinguistics study of monophthongization in Maltese. 
Ph.D., Victoria University (Toronto, Canada).
Sciriha, Lydia (1989). Language Maintenance and Language Shift of the Maltese Migrants 
in Canada. Journal of Maltese Studies, 19-20(1989-1990), 34-41.
Scmitt-Brandt, R. (1979). Berber Influences in Maghrebian Arabic. Folia Linguistica, 
13(3-4), 229-235.
Segal, J.B. (1986). Arabs at Hatra and the vicinity:  marginalia on new Aramaic texts. 
Journal of Semitics Studies, 31(1), 57-80.
Seidensticker, Tilman (1986). Das Verbum sawwama: Ein Beitrag zum Problem der 
Homonymenscheidung im Arabischen. In Kommission bei der C. H. BeckÕschen 
Verlagsbuchhandlung Munchen; vorgelegt von Herrn Anton Spitaler am 7. Nov. 1986. 
Munich: Verl. der Bayerischen Akad. der Wiss.  
Sekelj, Tibor (1981). The language problem of the non-aligned movement and its possible 
solution. Esperanto Documents, 26A, 1-9.
Selim, George Dimitri (1992). Arabic-Engilsh and English-Arabic Dictionaries in Library 
of Congress.  
Selkirk, Elizabeth (1981). Epenthesis and Degenerate Syllables in Cairene Arabic. In Hagit  
Borer & Joseph Aoun (Eds.), Theoretical Issues in the Grammar of Semitic Languages 
(pp. 209-232). Cambridge, MA: MIT Dept. of Linguistics.
Sellheim, Rudolf (1984). ÔFamiliennamenÕ im islamischen Mittelalter: Eine Skizze. 
Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 375-384.
Semaan , K.I.H. (1986). Introduction to Arabic Linguistic Studies. Henry Sweet Social 
Newsletter, 5(1986 May), 12.
Semah, David (1983). The Rhythmical Function of the Watid and the Fasila. Journal of the 
Semitic Studies, 28(no. 2, 1983 Autumn), 321-335.
Semah, D. (1984). Quantity and Syllabic Parity in the Hispano-Arabic Muwassah. Arabica: 
Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 31(1), 80-107.
Serikoff, Nikolaus I. (1987). Einige Aspekte der griechischen Grammatik des Bar 
Hebraus: Griechische Lehnworter in der ÔKurzgefassten Geschichte der DynastienÕ. 
Jahrbuch der Osterreichischen Byzantinistik, 37, 101-135.
Seror, Simon (1986). Notes on the onomastics of French Jews in the Middle Ages    
(Notes dÕonomastique des juifs de France au Moyen Age). Revue des etudes juives, 145(3-
4), 315-46.
Sethom, Hafedh, & Bachrouch, T. (1989). A propos du Dictionnaire de geographie 
(franco-arabe). IBLA: Revue de lÕInstitut des Belles Lettres Arabes, 52(2), 327-332.
Sgroi, Salvatore Claudio (1981). Inverse Allocution in the Performative Model. Lingua e 
Stile, 16(1), 3-11.
Sgroi, Salvatore Claudio (1985). Agglutination et deglutination de lÕarticle arabe dans les 
arabismes espagnols et siciliens. Actes du XVIIeme Cong. Internat. de Ling. et Philol. 
Romanes, VII (Aix-en-Provence, 29 aout-3 sept. 1983). In Jean-Claude Bouvier (Eds.), 
Contacts de langues: Discours oral (pp. 141-151). Aix-en-Provence: University de 
Provence.
Shaikh, Shafti (1983). Handbook of English-Arabic for Professionals. Bombay: Oxford 
University Press.  
Sharbatov, G. (1988). On the Tripartite Functional Paradigm of the Arabic Language: 
Literary Language, Dialects, Spoken Languages. Indian Journal of Linguistics, 15(2), 189-
197.
Sharma, V. Alex (1981) Syntactic Errors as Indices of Developing Language Profieciency 
in Arabic Speakers Writing English at the Intermidiate and Advanced Levels of English as a 
Second Language. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Shatura , V.V. (1983). The history of the name Brazil. Vestnik Moskovskogo 
Universiteta, Filologiya, 38(9(3)), 79-82.
Shawish, Bashir (1984a). Ibn SinaÕs Treatise on Phonetica and the Supposed Influence of 
the Ancient Greeks and Indians. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 1.1, 
113-126.
Shawish, Bashir (1984b) Some Aspects of the Syntax of Object Complements in Literary 
Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Shboul, Ahmad M. H. (1983). ÔHavingÕ in Arabic. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 
11, 24-47.
Shboul, Linda A. (1981). Some problems of learning to read English encountered by 
native Arabic readers. Australian Review of Applied Linguistics, 4(1), 48-58.
Shehadeh, Haseeb (1983). Kunt Ôistri in Kufir-Yasif Dialect. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 11, 79-83.
Sheikh Ibrahim, AbdulÐLatif M. (1986) The interlanguage stress phonology of Arab 
learners of English: influence of universals as well as dialect, distance, and task. Ph.D., 
Indiana University of Pennsylvania.
Sheir, Aleya Aly (1981) An Analytic Study of the Errors Made in English Sentence 
Patterns and Their Transformations by Egyptian Prospective Teachers of English as a 
Foreign Language (EFL). Ph.D, The Pennsylvania State University.
Sheynin, Hayim Y. (1982). An Unknown Jewish Arabic-Castilian Glossary. efarad: 
Revista de Estudios Hebraicos, Sefardies y de Oriente Proximo, 42, 223-241.
Shivtiel, Avihai (1985). Languages in contact: the contribution of the Arabic language to 
the revival of Hebrew. Journal of Semitic Studies, 30(1), 95-113.
Shlonsky, Ur (1992). Resumptive Pronouns as a Last Resort. Linguistic Inquiry, 23(3), 
443-468.
Shohet, Nir (1984). Niv yehudi be-geÕulato. Leshonenu LaÕAm: Kuntresim ÔAmamiyyim 
le-ÕInyane Lashon, 35(3), 91-96.
Shorrab, Ghazi (1984). GarvinÕs Standardization Model and Arabic: A Case in Language 
Planning. Journal of College of Arts, King Saud University, 11(2), 211-223.
Shorrab, Ghazi Abed-El-Jabbar (1981) Models of Socially Significant Linguistic Variation: 
The Case of Palestinian Arabic. Ph.D., State University of New York at Buffalo.
Shorrab, Ghase Abed-El-Jabbar (1986). Bilingual patterns of an Arabic-English speech 
community. International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 61, 79-88.
Sibley, E. H. (1990). Alphabets & Languages. Communications of the ACM, 33(5), 488.
Sidarus, Adel Yussef (1990). Onomastica Aegyptiaca: The Tradition of Tematic 
Lexicography in Egypt through the Afes and Languages. Histoire Epistemologie Langage, 
12(1), 7-19.
Sieny, Mahmood EsmaÕil (1978). The Syntax of Urban Hijazi Arabic. London: Longman 
Group Ltd.  
Sieny, Mahmoud Esmail (1985). Scientific terminology in the Arab world: production, co-
ordination, dissemination. Meta, 30(2), 155-61.
Singer, Hans-Rudolf (1980a). Conquista und Reconquista im Spiegel spanisch-arabischer 
Ortsnamen. In Rudolf Schutzeichel & Franz Tichy (Eds.), Erlanger Ortsnamen-
Kolloquium: Ortsnamen als Ausdruck von Kultur und Herrschaft (pp. 119-130). 
Heidelberg: Winter.
Singer, Hans-Rudolf (1980b). Ortsnamenkunde und Dialektologie im muslimischen 
Spanien: Studien zu den Ortsnamen von al-Andalus, II. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
Linguistik, 5, 136-157.
Singer, Hans-Rudolf (1981). Zum arabischen Dialekt von Valencia. Oriens., 27-28, 317-
323.
Skousen, Royal (1989). Analogical Modeling of Language. Dordrecht: Kluwer.  
Slama, Fethi Ben (1985). The enigma of the concept of sex in Arabic  (LÕEnigme du 
concept de sexe dans de langue arabe). Pueples Mediterraneens/Mediterranean Peoples, 33, 
155-62.
Smadi, Oglah Mahmoud (1979) The Acquisition of the Jordanian Arabic Interrogation and 
Negation by a Three-Year-Old Native Speaker of Jordanian Arabic. Ph.D., The University 
of Texas at Austin.
Smart, J. R. (1990). Pidginization in Gulf Arabic: A First Report. Anthropological 
Linguistics, 32(1-2), 83-119.
Smetanka, Tomas (1984). Some Linguistic Means Characteristic of Poetic Texts in Arabic. 
Archiv Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies, 52(2), 
160-166.
Smith, Bernard (1987). Arabic Speakers. In Michael Swan & Bernard Smith (Eds.), 
Learner English: A TeacherÕs Guide to Interference and Other Problems (pp. 142-157). 
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Somekh, Sasson (1979). The Emergence of Two Sets of Stylistic Norms in the Early 
Literary Translation into Modern Arabic Prose. Ha-Sifrut-Literature, 8(28), 52-57.
Somekh, Sasson (1981a). The dilemma of language in Tawfiq Al-HakimÕs plays. Ha-
Sifrut-Literature, 30-31, 88-94.
Somekh, Sasson (1981b). The Emergence of Two Sets of Stylistic Norms in the Early 
Literary Translation into Modern Arabic Prose. Poetics Today, 2(1981 Summer-Autumn), 
193-200.
Soravia, Giulio (1988). Maltese as a Linguistic Test. Archivio Glottologico Italiano, 73(1), 
55-57.
Sotiropoulos, Dimitri (1982). Social roots of Modern Greek diglossia. Language Problems 
and Language Planning, 6(1), 1-28.
Souaiaia, Mohamed (1990). Language, Education and Politics in the Maghreb. Language, 
Culture, and Curriculum, 3(2), 109-123.
Sounkalo, Jiddou (1990) Relationship between Second Language Instruction and Lexical 
Attrition and Deficiency in the Native Languages of Mauritanians. Ph.D., University of 
Pittsburgh.
Sourati, Bassam (1985). The Language of the State and Political Reality in Lebanon. 
Mediterranean Peoples, 33(Oct-Dec), 65-78.
Souriau, Christine (1980). Arabisation and French Culture in the Maghreb. In W. H. 
Morris-Jones & Georges Fischer (Eds.), Decolonisation and After: The British and French 
Experience (pp. 310-329). London: Cass.
Spaulding, J. L. (1988). The Democratic Philosophers of the Medieval Sudan:  The Pig. 
Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika (SUGIA), 9, 247-268.
Spitaler, Anton (1989). Al-qalamu ahadu l-lisanaini. Vorgelegt am 9. Mai 1986. Munich: 
Bayerische Akad. der Wiss. in Kommission bei Beck.  
Spitta, Wilhelm (1880). Grammatik des arabischen VulgŠrdialektes von Aegypten. Leipzig: 
J.C. Hinrichs.  
Spolsky, Bernard (1991). The Languages of Jerusalem. Oxford & New York: Clarendon 
Press & Oxford University Press.  
Srage, Mohamed Nader (1988). La Diglossie et le bilinguisme scolaire a Beyrouth. Cahiers 
de lÕInstitut de Linguistique de Louvain, 14(1-2), 71-73.
Steger, Hans-Albert (1980). Reconquista/Conquista und Namenubertragung. In Rudolf 
Schutzeichel & Franz Tichy (Eds.), Erlanger Ortsnamen-Kolloquium: Ortsnamen als 
Ausdruck von Kultur und Herrschaft (pp. 131-137). Heidelberg: Winter.
Stein, Gabriele (1990). The Emerging Role of English in the Dictionaries of Renaissance 
Europe. Folia Linguistica Historica, 9(1), 29-138.
Steiner, R. (1977). The Case for Fricative-Laterals in Proto-Semitic. American Oriental 
Society, 59.
Stetkevych, Jaroslav (1986). Name and Epithet:  The Philology and Semiotics of Animal 
Nomenclature in Early Arabic Poetry. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 45(2), 89-124.
Stetkevych, Jaroslav (1989). Arabic Hermeneutical Terminology:  Paradox and the 
Production of Meaning. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 48(2), 81-96.
Stetkevych, Suzanne Pinckney (1986). The Ritha of TaÕabbata Sharran: a study of blood-
vengeance in early Arabic poetry. Journal of Semitic Studies, 31(1), 27-45.
Stevens, Paul (1980). Modernism and Authenticity as Reflected in Language Attitudes: The 
Case of Tunesia. Civilisations, 30(1-2), 37-57.
Stevens, Paul B. (1983). Ambivalence, Modernisation and Language Attitudes:  French 
and Arabic in Tunisia. Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, 4(2-3), 101-
114.
Stewart, Edward C. (1983). Talking Culture: Language in the Function of Communication. 
In Robert J. Di Pietro,William Frawley, & Alfred Wedel (Eds.), The First Delaware 
Symposium on Language Studies: Selected Papers (pp. 23-34). Newark: University of 
Delaware Press.
Stewart, Frank H. (1987). A Bedouin narrative from Central Sinai. Journal of Arabic 
Lingusitics, 16, 44-92.
Stillman, Norman A. (1981). Some Notes on the Judaeo-Arabic Dialect of Sefrou 
(Morocco). In Shelomo Morag (Eds.), Studies in Judaism and Islam Presented to Shelomo 
Dov Goitein on the Occacion of His Eightieth Birthday by His Students, Colleagues, and 
Friends. (pp. 231-251). Jerusalem: Magnes Press.
Stock, Kristina (1989). The Metaphor-A Blossom in the Meadow:  On the Translation of 
Linguistic Images from Arabic. Linguistische Studien, 189, 131-140.
Stocks, Peter (1989). Edward William Lane and His Arabic-English ÔThesaurusÕ. The 
British Library Journal, 15(1), 23-34.
Stoetzer, Willem (1981). Stress in Koranic Arabic: Its Relation to ÔiÕrab. In Rudolph Peters 
(Eds.), Proceedings of the Ninth Congress of the Union Europeenne des Arabisants et 
Islamisants, Amsterdam, 1st to 7th September 1978 (pp. 261-269). Leiden: Brill.
Stoetzer, W. (1982). Some Observations on Quantity in Arabic Metrics. Journal of Arabic 
Literature, 13, 66-75.
Stromsta, C.,Kotby, M. N., & Youssef, M. (1988). Evidence of Coarticulation in Arabic. 
Folia Phoniatrica: International Journal of Phoniatrics, Speech Therapy and 
Communication Pathology, 40(4), 183-189.
Sturm, Robert (1987). Some basic linguistic action verbs of Egyptian Arabic and Israeli 
Hebrew. In Linguistic Action:  Some Empirical-Conceptual Studies (pp. 107-24). 
Norwood NJ: Ablex Publishing Corp.
Suaieh, Saadun (1980) Aspects of Relative Clauses in Arabic. Ph.D., Indiana University.
Suleiman, M. Y. (1990). SibawaihiÕs ÔParts of SpeechÕ According to Zajjaji: A New 
Interpretation. Journal of Semitic Studies, 35(2), 245-263.
Suleiman, Saleh M. (1985). Jordanian Arabic between diglossia and bilingualism: 
linguistic analysis. Pragmatics and Beyond, 6(8), 1-131.
Suleiman, Saleh M. (1989). On the Pragmatics of Subject Preposing in Standard Arabic. 
Language Sciences, 11(2), 215-235.
Suleiman, Saleh M. (1990). The Semantic Functions of Object Deletion in Classical 
Arabic. Language Sciences, 12(2-3), 255-266.
Sussman, Harvey M.,Hoemeke, Kathryn A., & Ahmed, Farhan S. (1993). A Cross-
Linguistic Investigation of Locus Equations as a Phonetic Descriptor for Place of 
Articulation. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, 94(3), 1256-1268.
Swaffar, Janet K. (1989). Rethinking Roles:  Western and Eastern Languages in the 
Foreign Language Academy. Journal of the Chinese Language Teachers Association, 
24(2), 123-134.
Swed, Abdalla (1981). Ordering and directionality of iterative rules in the Tripoli dialect of 
Libyan Arabic. Al-ÔArabiyya, 14(1-2), 38-50.
Swed, Abdalla Abdalhamid (1982) The Historical Development of the Arabic Verb. Ph.D., 
University of Washington.
Swiggers, P. (1981). A Phonological Analysis of the Harsusi Consonants. Arabica: Revue 
dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(June-Sept.), 358-361.
Syeed, Sayyid Muhammad (1986). Islamization of linguistics. The American Journal of 
Islamic Social Sciences, 3(1), 77-87.
Szende, Tamas (1979). On the Search for Unifying Phonological Quantities. Magyar 
Nyelv, 75(4), 395-405.
Taft, Ronald, & Cahill, Desmond (1989). Mother Tongue Maintenance in Lebanese 
Immigrant Families in Australia. Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, 
10(2), 129-143.
Taha, Taha Abdel Mageed (1990). The Arabicisation of Higher Education: The Case of 
Khartoum University. Journal of Multilingual and Multicultural Development, 11(4), 291-
305.
Taine-Cheikh, C. (1984). Un Example de creativite lexicale: LÕElatif en hassaniyya 
(dialecte arabe de Mauritanie). Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 31(3), 274-305.
Taine-Cheikh, Catherine (1991). Le Vent et le devant: De lÕorientation chez les Maures. 
Journal Asiatique, 279(1-2), 93-136.
Talaat, Hala M. (1987a). A government-binding analysis of VP sentential complements in 
Egyptian Arabic. Journal of the Atlantic Provinces Linguistic Association, 9, 84-99.
Talaat, Hala M. (1987b) The verb phrase in Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., University of 
Michigan.
Talmon, R. (1981). Appositival Ôatf:  An Inquiry into the History of the Syntactic 
Category. Arabic:  Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 28(2-3 June-Sept), 278-292.
Talmon, Rafael (1982). Nahwiyyun in SibawayhiÕs Kitab. Zeitschrift fur Arabische 
LInguistik, 8, 1982, 12-38.
Talmon, Rafael (1984). A Problematic Passage in SibawaihiÕs al-Kitab and the Authenticity 
of Ahbar about the Early History of Arabic  Grammatical Thinking. Journal of the 
American Oriental Society, 104(4), 691-701.
Talmon, Rafael (1985). Who Was the First Arab Grammarian? A New Approach to an Old 
Problem. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 15, 128-a45.
Talmon, Rafael (1987). SchachtÕs Theory in the Light of Recent Discoveries Concerning 
the Origins of Arabic Grammar. Studia Islamica, 65(1987), 31-50.
Talmon, Rafael (1990). The Philosophizing FarraÕ: An Interpretation of an Obscure Saying 
Attributed to the Grammarian TaÕlab. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic 
Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 May1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), 
Studies in the History of Arabic Grammar (pp. 265-279). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Talmoudi, Fathi (1984a). The Diglossic Situation in North Africa: A Study of Classical 
Arabic/Dialectal Arabic Diglossia with Sample Text in ÔMixed ArabicÕ. Gothenburg: Acta 
Univ. Gothoburgensis.  
Talmoudi, Fathi (1984b). Notes on the syntax of the Arabic dialect of Susa. Journal of 
Arabic Linguistics, 12, 48-85.
Talmoudi, Fathi (1986). A Morphosemantic Study of Romance Verbs in the Arabic 
Dialects of Tunis, Susa and Sfax, I: Derived Themes II, III, V, VI and X. Gothenburg: 
Acta Univ. Gothoburgensis.  
Tapiero, Norbert (1984). Methode dÕanalyse semiologique du discours arabe moderne. 
Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes Arabes, 31(3), 239-273.
Tarone, Elaine (1984). The role of the syllable in interlanguage phonology. Studies in 
Descriptive Linguistics, 13, 63-72.
Tarone, Elaine (1985). Variability in interlanguage use:  a study of style-shifting in 
morphology and syntax. Language Learning, 35(3), 373-403.
Tayash, Fahad Abdullah, & Ayouby, Kenneth Kahtan (1992). Arab-American Media:  Past 
and Present. In Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), The Arabic Language in America (pp. 162-183   
349pp.). Detroit: Wayne State University Press.
Tekinay, Alev (1981). Person-denoting suffixes in German and Turkish morphology:  a 
contrastive analysis. Zielsprach Deutsch, 3(July-Sept), 29-34.
Tekinay, Alev (1984). German and Turkish as reflected in their foreign-and loanword 
problems. Muttersprache, 94(3-4), 290-9.
Tel, Shadia (1988). Bilingual Linguistic Referents in Cognitive Processing. International 
Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 5.1, 33-41.
Tel, Shadia A. (1990). Bilingual Linguistic Memory.  Papers from 1st Annual Symposium 
on Arabic Linguistics. In Mushira Eid (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, I (pp. 
257-270). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Tel, Shadia A., & Cunningham, Donald J. (1986). The Independence/Interdependence of 
Knowledge in the Bilingual Memory. International Journal of Islamic and Arabic Studies, 
3.1, 1-17.
Temple, Christine M. (1989). Digit Dyslexia:  A Category-Specific Disorder in 
Development Dyscalculia. Cognitive Neuropsychology, 6(1), 93-116.
Tenishev, E. R. (1989). On the Kirghiz Literary Language of the Prenational Period. 
Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 38(5), 32-40.
Testen, D. (1985). The significance of Aramaic r <*n. Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 
44(2), 143-6.
Testen, David (1987). Vowel Structures and the Arabic Verb. In CLS 23: Parasession on 
Autosegmental and Metrical Phonology (pp. 363-73). Chicago: Chicago Linguistic 
Society.
Testen, David (1992). Extra-Arabic Affiliations of k-Yemeni. In E. Broselow,Mushira Eid, 
& John McCarthy (Eds.),  Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 77-90). Amsterdam 
& Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Testen, David (1993). On the Development of the Energic Suffixes. In Mushira Eid & 
Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics, V (pp. 293-312). Amsterdam & 
Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Testen, David (1994). On the Development of the Arabic Subjunctive. In Mushira 
Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: 
Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 151-166). Amsterdam & 
Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Thalji, Abdel-Majid I. (1986a). The absence of VP in Arabic basic unmarked order (part 
II). Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 127-136.
Thalji, Abdel-Majid I. (1986b). Marked vs. unmarked structures in modern written Arabic 
(Part I). Al-ÔArabiyya, 19(1-2), 106-26.
Thalji, Abdel-Majid Ibrahim (1988). Head-Modifier Agreement in Case in Arabic. Archiv 
Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies, 56(1), 42-53.
Theilig, Reinhard (1989). Polysemy in Arabic:  Observations Concerning the Arabic Verb. 
Linguistische Studien, 189, 81-92.
Thelwall, Robin, & Dickins, James (1985). (Nubi Creole Language). Journal of African 
Languages and Linguistics, 7(1), 92-97.
Theodoridis, Dimitri (1987). On the Ethonym *al-Aznakiya   (Zum Volksnamen *al-
Aznakiya). Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 16, 129.
Thiry, Jacques (1985). Modern Arabic, Classical Arabic. Universite Libre de Bruxelles 
Rapport dÕActivites de lÕInstitut de Phonetique, 20, 95-126.
Thiry, Jacques (1989). The Weak Consonants of Arabic:  Conservation and Mutations. 
Universite Libre de Bruxelles Rapport dÕActivities de lÕInstitute de Phonetique, 23-
24(June), 139-185.
Thiry, Jacques (1990). Synthetic and Analytic Genitive in Tunisian Arabic. University 
Libre de Bruxelles Rapport dÕActivites de lÕInstitut de Phonetique, 25, 1-25.
Thomason, Sarah G., & Elgibali, Alaa (1986). Before the Lingua Franca: Pidginized 
Arabic in the Eleventh Century A.D. Lingua: International Review of General Linguistics, 
68(4), 317-349.
Thompson-Panos, Karyn, & Thomas-Ruzic, Maria (1983). The Least You Should Know 
about Arabic: Implications for the ESL Writing Instructor. TESOL Quarterly, 17(4), 609-
623.
Thornburg, Linda (1980). Arabic loan phonology: the assimilation of English lexical items. 
Linguistics, 18(5-6(231-232)), 523-42.
Tilmatine, Mohamed (1989). Theories on the Origin of the Berbers. Afrikanistische 
Arbeitspapiere, 18(June), 83-89.
Ting-Toomey, Stella, & Korzenny, Felipe (Ed.). (1989).  Language, Communication, and 
Culture:  Current Directions. Newbury Park:   Sage Publications, Inc.
Toll, Christopher (1984). Dialektale Zuge in al-HamdaniÕs Kitab al-gawharatayn. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 13, 16-26.
Tomback, Richard S. (1983a). Archaic Features in the Iraqi Arabic Dialect. Journal of 
Northwest Semitic Languages, 11, 135-137.
Tomback, Richard S. (1983b). Random Notes on the Hebrew-Arabic Lexicons. Journal of 
Northwest Semitic Languages, 11, 139-141.
Tomback, Richard S. (1984). An Unrecognized Maltese West-Semitic Isogloss. Journal of 
Northwest Semitic Languages, 12, 121-123.
Tomiche, Nada (1982). Remarques sur la langue et lÕecriture en Egypte, 1805-1882. In 
Groupe de Recherches et dÕEtudes sur le Proche-Orient. (pp. 299-317). Paris: CNRS.
Toporov, L. I., & Mustafa, Saleka Khashem (1987). Iazyk zhestov arabov. Russkii Iazyk 
za Rubezhom, 5, 37-40.
Torreblanca, Maximo (1982). Hispano-latin /s/: Arabic evidence. Romance Philology, 
35(3), 447-63.
Torreblanca, Maximo (1983). La geminacion de l y n latinas en el dialecto mozarabe. La 
Coronica: Spanish Medieval Language and Literature Journal and Newsletter, 11(2), 300-
306.
Torreblanca, Maximo (1994). On Hispano-Arabic Historical Phonology: Latin and 
Romance evidence. In Mushira Eid,Vincente Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), 
Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the sixth symposium on Arabic 
Linguistics (pp. 37-62). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Touratier, Christian (1989). Structure de la phrase simple en arabe. Bulletin de la Societe 
de Linguistique de Paris, 84(1), 345-359.
Trabelsi, Chedia (1991). De quelques aspects du langage des femmes de Tunis. 
International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 87, 87-98.
Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (1985). Confrontation and Association. In Jacek Fisiak (Eds.), 
Papers from the 6th International Conference on Historical Linguistics (pp. 515-526). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Troupeau, Gerard (1981a). The ÒPartes OrationisÓ in the Kitab al-ÕUsul of Ibn al-Sarraj. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 379-88.
Troupeau, Gerard (1981b). La Logique dÕIbn Al-Muqaffa et les Origines de la Grammaire 
Arabe. Arabic, 28(2-3), 242-250.
Troupeau, Gerard (1981c). Les ÔPartes OrtionisÕ dans le Kitab Al-Usul dÕIbn Al Sarraj. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 379-388.
Troupeau, Gerard (1985). Les Livres des Definitions Grammaticales dans La 
Lexicographie Arabe. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 15, 146-171.
Troupeau, Gerard (1986). Problems posed by the translation of old Arabic medical terms 
into Modern French. Meta, 31(1), 11-15.
Tsoneva, Dimitrina (1990). Kontrastiven analiz na bulgarskiia i arabskiia konsonantizum i 
izvodi za praktikata. Supostavitelno Ezikoznanie, 15(6), 28-32.
Tucker, Archibald (1984). Maltese and Nubi:  Two ÔFringe SemiticÕ Languages.  Papers 
from 3rd International Hamito-Semitic Congress. In James Bynonv (Eds.), Current 
Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics (pp. 405-412). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Tushyeh, Hanna Y. (1988). Transfer and Related Strategies in the Acquisition of English 
Relative Clauses by Adult Arab Learners. Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics, 
23, 69-86.
Tushyeh, Hanna Y., & Hamdallah, Rami W. (1992). Palestinian Surnames Derived from 
Nicknames. Names: Journal of the American Name Society, 40(4), 237-252.
Tushyeh, Hanna Y.,Lawson, Edwin D., & Rishmawi, George (1989). Palestian First 
Names: An Introduction. Names: Journal of the American Name Society, 37(3), 245-264.
Tweissi, Adel Issa (1987) Language simplification in foreigner talk and second language 
development. Ph.D., University of Michigan.
Tweissi, Adel I. (1990). ÔForeigner TalkÕ in Arabic:  Evidence for the Universality of 
Language Simplification. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic 
Linguistics, II Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Tweissi, Adel L. (1988). ÔForeigner TalkÕ: Evidence for the universality of language 
simplification. In Mushira Eid & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspective in Arabic Linguistics 
(pp. 296-326). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Ul-Haq, Zia (1984) Negation in Arabic:  a Morpho-syntactic and Semantic Description. 
Ph.D., Indiana University.
Ullmann, Manfred (1981). Die Bedeutung des Adjektivs AgÕa. Festschrift for Ihsan 
ÔAbbas on His Sixtieth Birthday. In Wadad Al-Qadi (Eds.), Studia Arabica et Islamica. 
(pp. 455-471). Beirut: American Univ. of Beirut.
Ullmann, Manfred (1989). Das arabische Nomen generis. Gottingen: Vandenhoeck & 
Ruprecht.  
Urvoy, Marie-Therese (1989). Note de philologie mozarabe. Arabica: Revue dÕEtudes 
Arabes, 36(2), 235-236.
Ushakov, V.D. (1980). On several stylistic figures in the works of ÔAbdalqahir JurjaniÕ. 
Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 29(5), 64-73.
Ushakov, V. D. (1992). Nekotorye Voprosy Vnutriiazykovogo Sopostavitelnogo Analiza 
Frazeologischkikh Rechenii Arabskogo Klassicheskogo Iazyka. Voprosy Iazykoznaniia, 
2(1992 Mar-Apr), 100-111.
Vaane, Eveline (1982). Subjective Estimation of Speech Rate. Phonetica, 39(2-3), 136-
149.
Valdes Bernal, Sergio (1984). About the remnants of Insular Aruak in Cuban Spanish   (En 
torno a los remanentes del aruaco insular en el espanol de Cuba). Islas, 77, 5-22.
Van Deusen-Scholl, Petronella Lyda Francisca (1988) A Sociolinguistic and 
Conversational Analysis among Second Generation Moroccans in the Netherlands. Ph.D., 
University of Florida.
Van Hoof, H. (1981). Scientific translation:  A recent phenomenon? Le Langage et 
lÕHomme, 46, 25-30.
Van Lier, Henri (1989). Spanish and the Grill. Le Francais dans le Monde, 29(228), 44-
48.
Vanbruinessen, M. (1990). Kitab Kuning - Books in Arabic Script Used in the Pesantren 
Milieu. Bijdragen Tot de Taal-Land-en Volkenkunde, 146(2-3), 226-269.
Vanhove, Martine (1987a). La Litterature Maltaise. In Encyclopedie de lÕIslam (pp. 284-
288). 
Vanhove, Martine (1987b). Remarques sur quelques auxiliaries et particules verbales en 
maltais. Materiaux arabes et sudarabiques, 1, 35-51.
Vanhove, Martine (1988). Des Ghana dans la vie quotidienne a gozo. Cahiers de litterature 
orale(23), 109-126.
Vanhove, Martine (1990) Morphosyntaxe et Stylistique en Maltais:  Le Systeme Verbal et la 
Phrase Nominale. Ph. D., University of Paris.
Vanhove, Martine (1991a). The Island of Malta, a Crossroad for Influences?  The Case of 
Auxilairy Verbs. In Languages of the Mediterranean, IX (pp. 9). Malta: 
Vanhove, Martine (1991b). Le Rituel du Crespuscle. Paris: Editions Noel Blandin.  
Vanhove, Martine (1991c). Un Manuscrit inedit de Georges S. Col:  Le Supplement au 
Dictionnaire Maltais. Materiaux Arbes et Sudarabiques(3), 137-225.
Vanhove, Martine (1991-92). On the Survival of (S) in Maltese Idiolect at Mtahleb in 
Malta. Journal of Afroasiatic Languages, 3, 22-34.
Vanhove, Martine (1993a). La Dialectologie du Maltais et Son HIstoire. Paris: CNRS.  
Vanhove, Martine (1993b). La Langue Maltaise:  Etudes Syntaxiques dÕun Dialecte Arabe 
ÒPeripheriqueÓ. Wiesbaden: Harrasowitz.  
Vanhove, Martine (1993c). Note Sur le Dialecte Qeltu de Dale (province de Lahej, Yemen). 
Materiaux Arabes et Sudarabiques(5), 165-190.
Vanhove, Martine, & Cohen, David (1991). La Cantilene Maltiase du Xveme Siecle:  
Remarques Linguistiques. Comptes Rendus du G.L.E.C.S., XXIX-XXX(198401986), 
177-220.
Vardar , Berke (1985). Zones of terminological innovation:  Observation on the Turkish 
model. Linguistice, 21, 297-308.
Vermeer, Anne (1988). Socio-Cultural Factors and Second Language Acquisition of 
Turkish and Moroccan Children. In Roeland van Hout & Uus Knops (Eds.), Language 
Attitudes in the Dutch Language Area (pp. 143-156). Providence: Foris.
Veronique, Daniel (1984). The Acquisition and Use of Aspects of French Morphosyntax 
by Native Speakers of Arabic Dialects (North Africa). In Roger W. Andersen (Eds.), 
Second Languages: A Cross-Linguistic Perspective (pp. 191-213). Rowley, MA: Newbury 
House.
Veronique, Daniel (1986). LÕApprentissage du francais par des travailleurs marocains et les 
processus de pidginisation et de creolisation. Actes du 5e colloque internat. In Alain 
Giacomi & Daniel Veronique (Eds.), Acquisition dÕune langue etrangere: Perspectives et 
recherches (pp. 559-584). Aix-en-Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Veronique, Daniel (1989). LÕApprentissage du francais par des travailleurs arabophones et 
la genese des creoles ÔfrancaisÕ. Langage et Societe, 50-51, 9-37.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1980a). Hellenistic Education and the Origin of Arabic Grammar. 
Papers from the Internat. Conf. on the Hist. of Lang. Sciences (Ottawa, 28-31 Aug. 
1978). In Konrad Koerner & Robert H. Robins (Eds.), Progress in Linguistic 
Historiography (pp. 333-344). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1980b). The Origin of the Term ÔQiyasÕ in Arabic Grammar. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 4, 7-30.
Versteegh, C.H.M. (1981). A dissenting grammarian: Qutrub on declension. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 8(2-3), 403-29.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1982). Structural Change and Pidginization in the History of the 
Arabic Language. In Anders Ahlqvist (Eds.), Papers from the 5th International Conference 
on Historical Linguistics. (pp. 362-373). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1983). Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 10; 11, 86-89; 84-86.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1984). Current BIbliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 12, 86-89.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1985). Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. 
Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 14, 79-81.
Versteegh, C.H.M. (1987). Current Bibliography on the History of Arabic Grammar. 
Zeitschrift fur arabische Linguistik, 16(1987), 130-133.
Versteegh, C. H. M. (1993). Arabic Grammar & Quranic Exegesis in Early Islam. Studies 
in Semitic Languages and Linguistics, 19(8).
Versteegh, Cornelius H.M.,Koerner, Konrad, & Niederehe, Hans-J. (Ed.). (1983).  The 
History of Linguistics in the Near East. Amsterdam:   John Benjamins.
Versteegh, K. (1980). The international project ÒOnomasticon ArabicumÓ. BIOR, 
XXXVII(no. 5/6), 291-294.
Versteegh, Kees (1983). History of Eastern linguistics in the Soviet Union. 
Historiographia Linguistica, 10(3), 289-307.
Versteegh, Kees (1984a). Pidginization and Creolization: the Case of Arabic. Amsterdam: 
John Benjamins.  
Versteegh, Kees (1984b). Word Order in Uzbekistan Arabic and Universal Grammar. 
Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 443-453.
Versteegh, Kees (1985a). The Development of Argumentation in Arabic Grammar: The 
Declension of the Dual and the Plural. Zeitschrift fur ARabische Linguistik, 15, 152-173.
Versteegh, Kees (1985b). La ÔGrande EtymologieÕ dÕIbn Ginni. In Sylvain Auroux,Jean-
Claude Chevalier,Nicole Jacques-Chaquin, & Christiane Marchello-Nizia (Eds.), La 
Linguistique fantastique (pp. 44-50). Paris: Ed. Denoel.
Versteegh, Kees (1987). Marginality in the Arab Grammatical Tradition.  Proc. of Third 
Internatioanl Conf. on History of Language Sciences. In Hans Aarsleff,Louis G. Kelly, & 
Hans-Josef Niederehe (Eds.), Papers in the History of Linguistics Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Versteegh, Kees (1989). ÔEarlyÕ and ÔLateÕ Grammarians in the Arab Tradition:  The 
Morphology of the Hollow Verbs. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 20, 9-22.
Versteegh, Kees (1990). Freedom of the Speaker? The Term IttisaÕ and Related Notions in 
Arabic Grammar. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 
Apr.-1 May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History 
of Arabic Grammar (pp. 281-293). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Versteegh, Kees (1993). Leveling in the Sudan: From Arabic Creole to Arabic Dialect. 
International Journal of the Sociology of Language, 99, 65-79.
Versteegh, Kees, & Carter, Michael (Ed.). (1990).  Studies in the History of Arabic, 
Grammar, II. Amsterdam:   Benjamins.
Vincent, George Bureng (1986). Juba Arabic from a Bari Perspective. In Gerrit J. 
Dimmendaal (Eds.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, III (pp. 71-78). 
Dordrecht: Foris.
Vinet, Marie-Therese (1985). Les Melanges grammaticaux arabe-francais: Les Faits et le 
cadre theorique. Presence Francophone: Revue Internationale de Langue et de Litterature, 
27, 89-99.
Vion, Robert (1986). LÕ Activite de reformulation dans les echanges entre linguistes et 
apprenants nonguides (migrants maroicains). In Alain Giacomi & Daniel Veronique (Eds.), 
Acquisition dÕune Langue Etrangere: Perspectives et Recherches (pp. 231-247). Aix-en-
Provence: Univ. de Provence.
Virolle-Souibes, Marie (1985). Gestes emblematiques masculins et mixtes a Alger et en 
Kabylie. Geste & Image, 4, 69-107.
Vitale-Brovarone, Alessandro (1989). On the etymology of guai. Archivio Glottologico 
Italiano, 74(2), 205-209.
Vitestam, Gosta (1984). Sirr: A Lexicographical Essay on a Word with Various Nuances in 
Arabic and Islam. Orientalia Suecana, 33-35, 455-462.
Vycichl, Werner (1988). Arabisch naq-a.t ÔKamelstuteÕ: Ein altes passives Partizip: Ein 
Beitrag zur vergleichenden Hamitosemitistik. In Yoel L. Arbeitman (Eds.), FOCUS: A 
Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman (pp. 483-489). Amsterdam: 
Benjamins.
Wagner, Daniel A., & Lotfi, Abdelhamid (1983). Learning to Read by ÔRoteÕ. International 
Journal of the Sociology of Language, 42, 111-121.
Wagner, Daniel A.,Spratt, Jennifer E., & Ezzaki, Abdelkader (1989). Does Learning to 
Read in a Second Language Always Put the Child at a Disadvantage?  Some 
Counterevidence from Morocco. Applied Psycholinguistics, 10(1), 31-48.
Wahba, Wafaa (1984) Wh-constructions in Egyptian Arabic. Ph.D., University of Illnois-
Urbana.
Wahba, Wafaa Abdel-Faheem Batran (1985). Some aspects of LF movement in Iraqi 
Arabic. Studies in African Linguistics, supplement 9, 309-14.
Wahba, Wafaa Abdel-Faheem BAtran (1991). LF Movement in Iraqi Arabic. In C.-T. 
James Huang & Robert May (Eds.), Logical Structure and Linguistic Structure:  Cross-
Linguistic Perspectives (pp. 253-276). Dordrecht: Kluwer.
Walbridge, Linda S. (1992). Arabic in the Dearborn Mosques. In Aleya Rouchdy (Eds.), 
The Arabic Language in America (pp. 184-204). Detroit: Wayne State University Press.
Wald, Benji (1985). The influence of Arabic on the syntax of Swahili discourse (Part 1: 
verbal and nominal strategies in temporal clause subordination). Studies in African 
Linguistics, supplement 9, 315-17.
Wald, Paul,Daoudi, Abderrahim, & Sefta, Kamila (1991). LÕEnchainement question-
reponse dans une enquete sur la denomination des couleurs. Langage et Societe, 55, 61-82.
Waldmann, Albert (1989). Genitive Combination or Prepostional Group-A Structural-
Semantic Study of the Arabic Nominal Group. Linguistische Studien, 189, 29-39.
Walter, Henriette (1982a). Pourquoi des tableaux phonologiques? Application aux 
consonnes de lÕarabe libanais. La Linguistique: Revue de la Societe Internationale de 
Linguistique Fonctionnelle/Journal of the International So, 18.
Walter, Henriette (1982b). Why phonological tables?  An applications to the consonants of 
the Lebanese Arabic. La Linguistique, 18(2), 21-31.
Walters, Keith (1991). Women, Men and Linguistic Variation in the Arab World.  Papers 
from 3rd Annual Symposium on Arabic Linguistics. In Bernard Comrie & Mushira Eid 
(Eds.), Perpsectives on Arabic Linguistics, III (pp. 199-229). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Walters, Keith (1992). Toward a Sociolinguistic Description of (u:) in Korba Arabic:  
Defining linguistic variables in contact situations and relic areas. In E. Broselow,Mushira 
Eid, & John McCarthy (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics IV (pp. 181-218). 
Amsterdam & Phildelphia: John Benjamins.
Walters, Samuel Keith (1989) Social Change and Linguistic Variation in Korba, a Small 
Tunisian Town. Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Wang, Youyong (1993). A Study of the Relation between Attributives and Head Words in 
Arabic. Waiguoyu, 4(86), 73-78.
Wardhaugh, Ronald (1987). Languages In Competition:  Dominance, Diversity, and 
Decline. Oxford: Basil Blackwell Ltd.  
Wasserstein, David (1984). Gamasa in Taha Husayn. Zeitschrift fur Arabische Linguistik, 
13, 93.
Watson, Janet (1992). A Lexicon of Cairene Horse Terminology. Journal of Semitic 
Studies (JSS), 37(no. 2), 247-303.
Webb, Charlotte (1982). A historical source for the geminate roots in Arabic. Glossa:  An 
International Journal of Linguistics, 16(1), 13-27.
Weber, George (1987a). Divehi. Language Monthly, 43, 27.
Weber, George (1987b). Tamashek and Tifinagh. Language Monthly, 50, 11-12.
Webster, Roger (1991). Notes on the Dialect and Way of Life of the Al Wahiba Bedouin of 
Oman. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 54(3), 473-485.
Webster, Sheila K. (1986). Arabic Proverbs and Related Forms. Proverbium, 3, 179-194.
Weill , Claire (1987). This agitation of language  (Cette agitation de la langue). Les 
Langues Neo-Latines, 81(1(260)), 197-201.
Weiss, Bernard (1984). Language and Tradition in Medieval Islam: The Question of al-
Tariq ila maÕrifat al-lugha. Der Islam: Zeitschrift fur Geschichte und Kultur des Islamischen 
Orients, 61(1), 91-99.
Weiss, Bernard (1985). Subject and Predicate in the Thinking of the Arabic Philologists. 
Journal of the American Oriental Society, 105(no. 4), 605-622.
Weitzman, Michael (1987). Statistical Patterns in Hebrew and Arabic Roots. Journal of the 
Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, 1(2), 15-22.
Welden, Ann (1980). Stress in Cairo Arabic. Studies in the Linguistic Sciences, 10(2), 99-
120.
Werner, Otmar (1981). Contrastive Phonology:  German Against an Egyptian-Arabic 
Background. Deutsche Sprache, 3(Sept), 193-223.
Weryho, Jan W. (1983). Modern Tajiki Persian:  Gharbzadagi of a different kind. 
Nationalities Papers, 11(1), 27-40.
Wettinger, Godfrey (1993). Plurilingualism and Cultural Change in Medieval Malta. 
Mediterranean Language Review, 6-7, 144-160.
Wexler, Paul (1980). Zhunyanese (Dungan) as an Islamic and Soviet language. Journal of 
Chinese Linguistics, 8(2), 294-304.
Wexler, Paul (1983). Notes on the Iraqi Judeo-Arabic of eastern Asia. Journal of Semitic 
Studies, 28(2), 337-354.
Wickens, G.M. (1980). Arabic Grammar:  A First Workbook. New York: Cambridge 
University Press.  
Wild , Stefan (1980). Die konjunktion hatta mit dem indikative imperfekt im klassischen 
Arabisch. In W. Diem & S. Wild (Eds.), Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik (pp. 204-
23). 
Williams, Malcolm Paston (1989) A Comparison of the Textual Structures of Arabic and 
English Written Texts: A Study in the Comparative Orality of Arabic. Ph.D., University of 
Leeds (U.K.).
Windfuhr, Gernot L. (1985). A spatial model for tense, aspect, and mood. Folia 
Linguistica, 19(3-4), 415-61.
Windfuhr, Gernot L. (1989). Metrics, Licenses, and Historical Linguistics. Journal of the 
American Oriental Society, 109(2), 255-281.
Wisbey, R. (Ed.). (1971).  The Computer in Literary and Linguistic Research: Papers from 
a Cambridge Symposium. Cambridge:   Cambridge University Press.
Wise, H. (1983). Functionally Motivated Rules in Tunisian Phonology. Journal of 
Linguistics, Vol. 19, 165-181.
Wittig, Sabine (1981). Der Einfluss von Streckformen auf die Satzstruktur im Arabischen. 
Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 34, 84-101.
Wittig, Sabine (1989a). Bemerkungen zur Wortstellung im einfachen Deklarativsatz der 
modernen arabischen Schriftsprache. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft und 
Kommunikationsforschung, 42(1), 71-89.
Wittig, Sabine (1989b). On the Linguistic Realization of the Communicative Intention of 
Request in Modern Arabic. Linguistische Studien, 189, 54-68.
Wittig, Sabine (1989c). Zur propositionalen Realisierung der Aufforderungsintention in der 
indirekten Rede am Beispiel des modernen Arabischen. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 42(6), 836-846.
Wittig, Sabine (1990). Valence Patterns and Sentence Structures of Arabic Functional Verb 
Complexes-Syntactic Analysis, I. Journal of Arabic Linguistics, 21(7-29).
Wittig, Sabine (1991). Fa- als Indikator arabischer Kausalsatze. Zeitschrift fur Phonetik, 
Sprachwissenschaft und Kommunikationsforschung, 44(2), 180-189.
Wittig, Sabine (1992). Zur semantischen und syntaktischen Struktur ornativer und 
kombinativer Beforderungsverben im modernen Arabischen. Quarterly Journal of African, 
Asian, and Latin-American Studies, 60(1), 1-15.
Witztum, Allan, & Gruber, Mayer I. (1991). Hebrew, Aramaic and Arabic Names for 
Plants in the Mint Family. Leshonenu/Lesonenu: A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew 
Language and Cognate Subjects/Ketav-ÕEt le-Heqer ha-Lashon, 56(2), 147-151.
Woidich, Manfred (1980a). Das mesopotamische Arabisch. Wiesbaden: Otto 
Harrassowitz.  
Woidich, Manfred (1980b). Illi als Konjunktion im Kairenischen. Anton Spitaler zum 
siebzigsten Geburtstag von seinen Schulern uberreicht. In Werner Diem & Stefan Wild 
(Eds.), Studien aus Arabistik und Semitistik (pp. 224-238). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.
Woidich, Manfred (1989). Illi ÔThatÕ, Illi ÔBecauseÕ, and zayy illi ÔAs IfÕ:  On the 
Reinterpretation of Relative Sentence Structures in Cairo Arabic. Mediterranean Language 
Review, 4-5, 109-128.
Woidich, Manfred, & Behnstedt, Peter (1980). Zum Sprachatlas von Agypten. Zeitschrift 
fur Arabische Linguistik, 5, 176-192.
Wolf, Heinz Jurgen (1985a). Glottal Stop in Orgosolo:  Thoughts on Sardinian Phonetic 
Chronology. Zeitschrift fur romanische Philologie, 101(3-4), 269-311.
Wolf, Heinz Jurgen (1985b). Knacklaut in Orgosolo: Uberlegungen zur sardischen 
Lautchronologie. Zeitschrift fur romanische Philologie, 101(3-4), 269-311.
Wolfe, Ronald (1990). Ibn MadaÕ al-QurtubiÕs Kitab ar-Radd Ôala n-Nuhat: An Historical 
Misnomer. Proc. of 2nd Symposium on Hist. of Arabic Grammar, Nijmegen, 27 Apr.-1 
May 1987. In Kees Versteegh & Michael G. Carter (Eds.), Studies in the History of Arabic 
Grammar (pp. 295-304). Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Wolfson, Nessa (1981). Compliments in cross-cultural perspective. TESOL Quarterly, 
15(2), 117-34.
Wood , Richard E. (1984). Saudi Arabian English. English Language Research Journal, 4, 
83-98.
Wood, Richard E. (1979). Language Choice in Transnational Radio Broadcasting. Journal 
of Communication, 29(2), 112-123.
Wood, Sidney A. J. (1992). A Radiographic and Model Study of the Tense vs. Lax 
Contrast in Vowels. In Wolfgang U. Dressler,Hans C. Luschutzky,Oskar E. Pfeiffer, & 
John R. Rennison (Ed.), Sixth International Phonology Meeting,  (pp. 283-291). 
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Works, Nancy McKinney (1985) A Study of the Use of English Sentence Stress for the 
Comprehension of Meaning by Adult Second Language Learners. Ph.D., University of 
Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
Xrakovskij, Victor S. (1988). Resultative and Passive in Arabic. In Vladimir P. Nedjalkov 
& Bernard Comrie (Eds.), Typology of Resultative Constructions (pp. 327-339). 
Amsterdam: Benjamins.
Yaqub, Basim A.,Gascon, Generoso G.,Al-Nosha, Mansour, & Whitaker, Harry (1988). 
Pure Word Deafness (Acquired Verbal Auditory Agnosia) in Arabic Speaking Patient. 
Brain, 111(2), 457-466.
Yasin, Raslan Bani, & Owens, Jonathan (1984). The Bduul Dialect of Jordan. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 26(2), 202-232.
Yassin, M Aziz F. (1981). Arabs communicating: a sociolinguistic approach. The 
Incorporated Linguist, 20(3), 96-9.
Yassin, M. Aziz F. (1986). The Arabian Way With Names: A Sociolinguistic Approach. 
Linguistics, 25(2), 77-82.
Yassin, Mahmoud Aziz F. (1988). Spoken Arabic Proverbs. Bulletin of the School of 
Oriental and African Studies, 51(3), 59-68.
Yazbeck-Haddad, Katia (1990). Polyglot and Francophile. Le Francais dans le Monde, 
supplement 13, 43-45.
Yetiv, Isaac (1987). 1,001 Proverbs From Tunisia. Washington D.C.: Three Continents 
Press, Inc.  
Yip, Moira (1988). Template Morphology and the Direction of Association. Natural 
Language & Linguistic Theory, 6(4), 551-577.
Yokwe, Eluzai M. (1984). Arabicization and language policy in the Sudan. Studies in the 
Linguistic Sciences, 14(2), 149-70.
Yokwe, ELuzai M. (1985). The diversity of Juba Arabic. Studies in African Linguistics,  
supplement 9, 323-8.
Younes, Munther (1982) Problems in the Segmental Phonology of Palestinian Arabic. 
Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin.
Younes, Munther (1993). Emphasis Spread in Two Arabic Dialects. In Mushira Eid & 
Clive Holes (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics V (pp. 119-148). Amsterdam & 
Philadelphia: John Benjamins.
Younes, Munther A. (1994). On Emphasis and /r/ in Arabic. In Mushira Eid,Vincente 
Cantarino, & Keith Walters (Eds.), Perspectives on Arabic Linguistics VI: Papers from the 
sixth symposium on Arabic Linguistics (pp. 215-235). Amsterdam & Philadelphia: John 
Benjamins.
Young, M.J.L. (1982). An Arabic Almanac of favourable and unfavourable days. Journal 
of Semitic Studies, 27(2), 261-79.
Youssef, Anga, & Simpkins, Edward (1985). Parent Attitudes on Americanization and 
Bilingual Education:  The Dearborn, Detroit, and Farmington Study. The Bilingual 
Review, 12(3), 190-197.
Youssi, Abderrahim (1983). La Triglossie dans la typologie linguistique. La Linguistique: 
Revue de la Societe Internationale de Linguistique Fonctionnelle, 19(2), 71-83.
Youssi, Abderrahim (1992). Grammaire et lexique de lÕarabe marocain moderne. 
Casablanca: Editin Wallada.  
Yudakin, A.P. (1982). Lexical-grammatical laws of the evolution of the active participle 
[Using Indo-European and Semitic material]. Voprosy yazykoznaniya, 31(2), 59-67.
Zahniser, A. H. Mathias (1991). The Word of God and the Apostleship of Isa:  A 
Narrative Analysis of AlÕImran (3):  33-62. Journal of Semitic Studies (JSS), 36(1), 77-
112.
Zahri, Maysoon (1992) Metaphor and Translation. Ph.D., University of Salford.
ZavÕialova, O. I. (1992). Sino-musulÕmanskie teksty: Grafika - fonologiia - 
morfonololgiia. Voprosy Iazykoznaniia, 6, 113-122.
Zavadovskii, Iu. N. (1981). Mavritanskii dialekt arabskogo iazyka: Khassaniia. Moscow: 
Nauka.  
Zemanek, Petr (1990). A Propos de la pharyngalisation et la glottalisation en arabe. Archiv 
Orientalni: Quarterly Journal of African, Asian, and Latin-American Studies, 58(2), 125-
134.
Zhalai , V. Ya (1984). Osoblivosti movnoi situatsii v krainakh, shcho rozvivayutÕsya (na 
materiali TunisÕkoi respubliki). Movoznavstvo, 18(1(103)), 54-8.
Zhalai, V. Ya (1984). Peculiarities of the Language Situation in Developing Countries 
(With Special Reference fo Tunisia). Movoznavsto, 18(1(103)), 54-58.
Ziadah, M. (1984). PrŽsentation linguistique dÕune modele de synthese morphologique de 
lÕarabe littŽraire. CGE: Compte-rendu, 45.
Ziadeh, Farhat (1986). Prosody and the Initial Formation of Classical Arabic. Journal of 
the American Oriental Society, 106(2), 333-338.
Zimmer, Karl (1985). Arabic loanwords and Turkish phonological structure. International 
Journal of American Linguistics, 51(4), 623-5.
Ziv, Yehuda (1988). Naming Places. A Journal for the Study of the Hebrew Language and 
Cognate Subjects, 53(1-2), 126-131.
Zizi, Assia (1984). LÕEnseignement des sciences: Entre deux langues. Le Francais dans le 
Monde, 189, 50-53.
Zollinger, Beat E. (1987). Sociolinguistic and other aspects influencing the joint literacy 
project in Southern Sudan. Notes on Literacy, supplement 3, 20-34.
Zubin, David A. , & Svorou, Soteria (1984). Perceptual schemata in the spatial lexicon: a 
cross-linguistic study. Papers from the Parasessions, Chicago Linguistic Society, 346-58.
Zughoul, Muhammad Raji (1980). Diglossia in Arabic: investigating solutions. 
Anthropological Linguistics, 22(5), 201-17.
Zughoul, Muhammad Raji, & Taminian, Lucine (1984). The linguistic attitudes of Arab 
University students: factorial structure and intervening variables. International Journal of 
the Sociology of Language, 50, 155-79.




(1978). usus manhaj al-bahth fi al-lughawiyat al-Ôarabiyyah. majallat kulliyat al-adab wa al-
ulum al-insaniyah, 1(1), 35-56.
ÔAbd Al-Tawwab, Ramadan (1982). thalathat kutub fi al-huruf lil-khalil ibn ahmad wa-ibn 
al-sikkit wa-al-razi. Cairo: maktabat al-khanji.  
ÔAttar, Ahmad ÔAbd Al-Ghafur (1982). qadaya wa-mushkilat lughawiyah. Jedda: Tihamah.  
ÔAwad, Luwis (1980). muqaddimah fi fiqh al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah. Cairo: al-hayah al-
misriyah al-Ôammah lil-kitab.  
ÔAzawi, NiÕmah Rahman (1978). al-naqd al-lughawi Ôinda al-arab:  hatta nihayat al-qarn al-
sabiÔ al hijri. Baghdad: wizarat al-thaqafah wa al-funun.  
ÔId, Muhammad (1980). al-mazahir al-tariÕah Ôala al-fusha: al-lahn, al-tashif, al-tawlid, al-
taÔrib, al-mustalah al-Ôilmi. Cairo: Ôalam al-kutub.  
ÔId, Muhammad (1981). al-mustawa al-lughawi lil-fusha wa-al-lahajat wa-lil-nathr wa-al-
shiÔr. Cairo: Ôalam al-kutub.  
ÔUmar, Ahmad Mukhtar (1981). al-Ôarabiyyah al-sahihah: dalil al-bahth ila al-sawab al-
lughawi. Cairo: Ôalam al-kutub.  
ÔUmar, Ahmad Mukhtar (1982). iÔrab al-qurÕan lil-nahhas: Ôarad wa-naqd. In Amin FuÔad 
Sayyid (Eds.), dirasat Ôarabiyyah wa-islamiyah: muhdah ila adib al-Ôarabiyyah al-kabir abi 
fahd mahmud muhammad shakir bi-munasabat bulugihih al-sabÔin (pp. 81-101). Cairo: 
Madani.
Al-Ani, Salman, & Amayreh, Muhammad masadir dirasat al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah murajah 
wa taqdim. al-lisan al-arabi, 26, 49-58.
Al-Ani, Salman H. (1983). at-tashkil as-sawti fil-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah (al-Mallah, Yasser, 
Trans.). Jeddah: The Literary Club.  
Al-DawaÕimah, Ibn, & Salamah, ÔAbd Al-Rahman (1981). al-taÔrib fi al-jazaÕir min khilal 
al-wathaÕiq al-rasmiyah. Algiers: al-sharikah al-wataniyah lil-nashr wa-al-tawziÕ.  
Al-Kawakibi, Muhammad Salah al-Din (1982). istidrak al-naqsan fi maqalat asmaÕ aÔdaÕ al-
insan. majallat majmaÔ al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah bi-dimashq., 57, 19-34; 327-342.
Al-Kubaysi, Hamad ÔUbayd (1982). dawr al-turath al-Ôarabi fi taÔrib al-taÔlim al-jamiÔi. In 
Amin FuÔad Sayyid (Eds.), dirasat Ôarabiyyah wa-islamiyah: muhdah ila adib al-Ôarabiyyah 
al-kabir abi fahd mahmud muhammad shakir bi-munasabat bulugihih al-sabÔin (pp. 219-
242). Cairo: madani.
Al-SamarraÕi, Ibrahim (1980). lughat al-sihafah. awraq, 3, 15-22.
Al-Samman, Wajih al-naht. majallat majmaÔ al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah bi-dimashq, 57, 92-
114; 343-364.
Al-Tanahi, Mahmud Muhammad (1982). urjuzah qadimah fi al-nahw lil-yashkari. In Amin 
FuÔad Sayyid (Eds.), dirasat Ôarabiyyah wa-islamiyah: muhdah ila adib al-Ôarabiyyah al-
kabir abi fahd mahmud muhammad shakir bi-munasabat bulugihih al-sabÕin (pp. 565-579). 
Cairo: madani.
Al-Tayyar, Rida ÔAbd al-Jalil (1980). al-dirasat al-lughawiyah fi al-andalus: mundhu matlaÔ 
al-qarn al-sadis al-hijri hatta muntasaf al-qarn al-sabiÔ al-hijri, Ôasr al-murabitin wa-al-
muwahhidin. Baghdad: dar al-rashid.  
Al-Yasin, Muhammad Husayn (1980). al-dirasat al-lugawiyah Ôinda alÔarab ila nihayat al-
qarn al-thalith. Beirut: dar maktabat al-hayat.  
Ali, N. (1988). al-kumbyuutir wa-l-hÔaajja al-maassa ila nahw Ôarabiy jadiid! al-Ôarabiyya, 
350, 30-34.
Amin, Sharif Yahya (1982). muÔjam al-alfaz al-muthanna (al-muthannayan). Beirut: dar al-
Ôilm lil-malayin.  
Babiti, ÔAzizah Fawwal (Ed.). (1983).  min taÕrikh al-Ôarabiyyah. Tripoli, Lebanon:   dar 
al-inshaÕ.
Barakat, Ibrahim (1982). al-jumlah al-Ôarabiyyah. Cairo: maktabat al-khanji.  
Bergstrasser, Gotthelf (1981). al-tatawwur la-nahwi lil-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah: silsilat 
muhadarat alqaha fi al-jamiÔah al misriyah. Cairo: al-markaz al-Ôarabi lil-bahth wa-al-nashr.  
Dahdah, Antwan, ÔAbd Al-Masih & Mitri, Jurj (1981). muÔjam qawaÕid al-lughah al-
Ôarabiyya fi jadawil wa-lawhat. Beirut: maktabat lubnan.  
Darwish, Muhyi al-Din (1980). iÔrab al-qurÕan al-karim wa-bayanuhu. Homs: dar al-
irshad.  
Farrukh, ÔUmar (1981). Ôabqariyat al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah. Beirut: dar al-kitab al-Ôarabi.  
Hamzawi, Muhammad Rashad (1980). manzilat baÔd anasir al-muÔjam al-Ôarabi al-hadith 
min al-dirasat al-lughawiyah al-hadithah. awraq, 3, 4-14.
Hassan, Tammam (1980). al-lughah bayna al-miÔyariyah wa-al-wasfiyah. Casablanca: dar 
al-thaqafah.  
Hassan, Tammam (1981). al-usul:  dirasah ibistimulujiyah li-usul al-fikr al-lughawi al-
Ôarabi:  al-nahw, fiqh al-lughah, al-balaghah. Casablanca: dar al-thaqafah.  
Hlal, Y. (1986). tahliil sarfii li-al-luga al-Ôarabiyya. In A. Wahab & M. Sieny (Eds.), 
Studies in Machine Translation (pp. 9-35). Riyadh: 
Ibn NuÔman, Ahmad (1981). al-taÔrib bayna al-mabdaÕ wa-al-tatbiq fi al-jazaÕir wa-al-Ôalam 
al-Ôarabi. Algiers: al-sharikah al-wataniyah lil-nashr wa-al-tawziÔ.  
Jundi, Ahmad ÔAlam Al-Din (1978). al-lahajat al-arabiyyah fi al-turath. Libya: al-dar al-
arabiyya lil kitab.  
Khudur, Muhammad (1981). fiqh al-lughah. Lebanon: Author.  
Kutti, I. K. (1982). al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah fi kirala. majallat majmaÔ al-lughah al-
Ôarabiyyah bi-dimashq., 57, 181-198.
Mabruk, Najih ÔAbd al-Hafiz (1982). al-aswat al-lughawiyah fi lisan al-Ôarab fi dawÕ 
dirasat Ôilm al-lughah al-hadith. Cairo: dar al-tawfiqiyah lil-tibaÕah.  
Murtad, ÔAbd Al-Malik (1981). al-Ôammiyah al-jazaÕiriyah wa-silatuha bi-al-fusha. Algiers: 
al-sharikah al-wataniyah lil-nashr wa-al-tawzi.  
Najjar, Ahmad Shawqi (1982). al-abjadiya al-Ôarabiyya: lamha wa-nazra. Dara (Riyadh), 
8(Oct.), 158-177.
NuÔaymi, Husam SaÔid (1980). al-dirasat al-lahjiyah wa-al-sawtiyah Ôinda ibn jinni. 
Baghdad: dar al-rashid lil-nashr.  
Qasim, Riyad (1982). ittijahat al-bahth al-lughawi al-hadith fi al-Ôalam al-Ôarabi, i: lubnan fi 
al-qarn al-tasiÔ Ôashara (1801-1900); ii: lubnan (1901-1960). Beirut: muÕassasat nawfal.  
Ramadan, Kafiyah (1982). qawaÕid al-imlaÕ wa-mushkilat al-kitabah al-Ôarabiyyah. Cairo: 
dar al-maÕrifah.  
Sabh, Husni (1982). nazrah fi muÔjam al-mustalahat al-tibbiyah. majallat majmaÔ al-lughah 
al-Ôarabiyyah bi-dimashq, 57, 3-18; 311-326.
Shahin, Tawfiq Muhhammad (1980). Ôawamil tanmiyat al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah. Cairo: 
maktabat wahbah.  
Shararah, ÔAbd al-Jabbar Hamad Husayn (1980). al-huruf al-muqattaÔah fi al-qurÕan al-
karim. Baghdad: matbaÔat al-irshad.  
YaÔqub, Imil (1981). al-maÔajim al-lughawiyah al-Ôarabiyyah: bidaÕatuha wa-tatawwuruha. 
Beirut: dar al-Ôilm lil-malayin.  
YaÔqub, Imil BadiÕ (1982). fiqh al-lughah al-Ôarabiyyah wa-khasaÕisuha. Beirut: dar al-Ôilm 
lil-malayin.  

Yaqut, Ahmad Sulayman (1980). dirasah nahwiyah fi khassaÕis ibn jinni. Alexandria: 
matabi dar al-nashr al-jamiÔi.